BANCROFT  LIBRARY 

•o 

THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

J.  Porter  Shaw  Collection 


Gift  of 
Marguerite  Bachrach 


HAND-BOOK 


ACTIVE   SERVICE; 


CONTAINING 


f  ractol  Instnttte  in  topip  $ntits. 


IPOR    THEE    USE     OF   VOLUNTEERS. 


EGBERT  L.  VIELE, 

LATE  U.S.  A., 
CAPTAIN  ENGINEERS,  SEVENTH  REGIMENT,  N.O. 


NEW   YORK: 
D.  VAN   NOSTKAND,    192   BROADWAY. 

1861. 


ENTERED,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1S61,  by 
D.  VAN  XOSTEAND, 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern 
District  of  New  York. 


JOHN  F.  TROW, 
FRITTER,  5T1IREOTYPER,  AXD  ELECTROTYPES, 

46,  48  &  50  Greene  Street, 
New  York. 


TO 


Ijve  j^imtilj  geginwtt, 


OJ^    NEW    YORK, 

WHICH, 

BY    ASSIDUITY,    DISCIPLINE,    AND    ESPRIT  DU   CORPS, 
NO   LESS  THAN  BY  ITS  EMINENT  PATRIOTISM, 

HAS  BECOME 
THE    MODEL    REGIMENT    OF    CITIZEN    SOLDIERS, 

THIS      BOOK 
IS  RESPECTFULLY  INSCRIBED. 


NEW  YORK,  21s*  February^  1861. 

CAPTAIN  E.  L.  VIELE, 

Engineer,  etc. 

SIR: — I  Lave  read  with  great  satisfaction,  the  advance  sheets  of 
the  "Hand  Book  for  Active  Service"  sent  me.  A  practical  work 
of  this  description  is  greatly  needed,  and  will  be  prized  by  the  sol- 
diers composing  our  militia  throughout  the  States.  Teaching  the 
soldier  how  to  prepare  his  food  in  the  most  economical  and  expe- 
ditious manner  is  certainly  not  the  least  important  part  of  your  in- 
teresting volume.  Knowledge  thus  disseminated  will,  in  case  of 
service  in  the  field,  save  many  lives,  and  add  to  the  efficiency  of  the 
force,  while  the  general  information  upon  military  subjects,  given 
in  a  concise  and  familiar  style,  I  doubt  not  will  be  highly  appre- 
ciated. 

I  am,  my  dear  Sir, 

Your  friend  and  servant, 

MARSHALL  LEFFERTS, 

Col  1th  Regiment,  N.  G. 


PKEF  ACE. 


THERE  are  at  this  moment  in  the  United  States 
3,000,000  of  organized  troops,  all  of  them  more  or 
less  accustomed  to  the  use  of  arms,  and  many  of 
them  have  been  drilled  in  military  tactics.  Very 
few  have  been  in  actual  service,  and  are  therefore 
unaccustomed  to  the  fatigues,  and  unacquainted 
with  the  duties,  of  camp  and  garrison  life.  "Were 
any  number  of  them  to  be  brought  suddenly  into 
the  field,  this  want  of  experience  would  be  at  once 
felt  by  officers  as  well  as  soldiers,  and  a  great  deal 
of  useless  labor,  unnecessary  privation,  and  per- 
sonal suffering  would  be  gone  through  with  before 
they  would  become  sufficiently  accustomed  to  the 
entire  change  in  their  mode  of  life.  "With  a  view 
to  avoid  these  difficulties  as  much  as  possible,  and 
set  before  the  soldier  in  a  familiar  manner  that  line 
of  conduct  to  be  pursued  in  a  campaign  which  would 
enable  him  to  husband  his  physical  resources  and 


8  PREFACE. 

at  the  same  time  render  him  most  effective  in  every 
way  for  any  duty,  these  pages  have  been  prepared  ; 
the  author  claiming  no  originality  or  merit  beyond 
a  desire  to  aid  his  fellow-citizens  in  acquiring  more 
thorough  information  on  the  subject  of  military 
duties. 

The  large  amount  of  intelligence  and  active 
energy  which  the  volunteer  brings  with  him  into 
the  field  is  frequently  thrown  away  and  wasted  for 
the  want  of  knowledge  in  daily  routine,  which,  to- 
gether with  a  strict  obedience  to  order,  makes  the 
chief  value  of  the  regular  soldier.  "When  this 
knowledge  is  once  acquired,  volunteers  have  in 
many  respects  the  advantage  over  regular  troops. 


YOEK,  March,  1861. 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


TO  FACE  PAGE 

FORMATION  OF  A  REGIMENT  AND  COMPANY,            .  .             37 

PLAN  OF  ENCAMPMENT,  FOR  A  REGIMENT  OF  INFANTRY,  .       58 

THE  PORTABLE  FIELD  COOKING  STOYE,      .             .  .90 
PROFILE  AND  OUTLINE  OF  A  BASTION  FRONT  FIELD  WORK,    .       93 

REDAN,  CREMAILLERE,  LINE  AND  STAR  FORTS,       .  .           102 

MOUNTAIN  HOWITZER  AND  LIMBER,       .            .            .  .157 

24-POUNDER  ON  A  SlEGE  CARRIAGE,           .            .  .          182 

SIEGE  MORTAR  AND  MORTAR-BED,         .             .            .  .216 

24-POUNDER   ON   A   BARBETTE    CARRIAGE,       .  .  .  222 

8-IxCH   COLUMBIAD    ON   A    CASEMATE    CARRIAGE,  .  .       244 


CONTENTS. 


CHAP.  PAGE 

I.  INTRODUCTION,  .            .            .            .            .  .11 

If.  THE  RECRUIT,        .                         .            .            .  15 

III.  THE  COMPANY,.  .....        28 

IV.  THE  REGIMENT,      .....  37 
V.  THE  MARCH,     .            .            .            .            .  .48 

YI.  THE  CAMP, 57 

VII.  GUARDS  AND  GUARD  MOUNTING,          .            .  .64 

VIII.  RATIONS,  AND  MODE  OF  COOKING  THEM,  .            .  77 

IX.  FIELD  FORTIFICATIONS,             .            .            .  .92 

X.  ARTILLERY,             .....  149 

XL  MANUAL  FOR  LIGHT  ARTILLERY,          .            .  .157 

XII.  MANUAL  FOR  HEAYY  ARTILLERY,  .            .            .  178 

XIII.  AYMUNITION,    .            .            .            .            .  .250 


HAND-BOOK  FOR  ACTIVE  SERVICE. 


CHAPTER  I. 

INTRODUCTION. 

AN  effective  organization  of  troops  for  all  purposes,  is 
composed  of  three  arms  :  Infantry,  Cavalry,  and  Artil- 
lery. Upon  a  due  proportion  of  each  of  these  arms  de- 
pends their  capacity  for  attack  or  defence. 

INFANTRY. — Experience  has  taught  us  that  the  most 
reliable  arm  under  all  circumstances  is  infantry ;  it  is 
more  capable  of  endurance,  and  of  being  manoeuvred  on 
every  ground,  even  where  the  other  arms  would  be  ut- 
terly useless. 

The  proportion  of  this  arm  in  a  complete  organiza- 
tion would  be  four-fifths  of  the  entire  force. 

Infantry  is  subdivided  into  "  Infantry  of  the  Line," 
"  Light  Infantry,"  and  Kiflemen.  The  duties  of  each  arc 
distinct.  In  an  engagement  the  Infantry  of  the  Line  bears 
the  brunt  of  the  battle ;  moving  in  mass  when  acting  on 
the  offensive,  it  delivers  its  fire  in  line,  and  overwhelms 
the  enemy  by  its  force  and  energy,  driving  him  from  his 
position  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet ;  and  on  the  defensive 
it  forms  in  square  to  repel  the  charge  of  cavalry,  and 


12  INTRODUCTION. 

upon  the  coolness  and  determination  with  which  it  re- 
ceives the  shock  of  attack,  depends  its  success ;  to  waver 
is  half  a  defeat. 

The  duties  of  light  infantry  are  to  act  as  flankers  on 
the  march,  to  open  an  engagement,  to  draw  the  enemy's 
fire,  to  unmask  his  batteries,  and  generally  to  develop  his 
strength  and  expose  the  weak  points  of  his  position,  to 
feign  attacks,  and  in  every  way  to  annoy,  worry,  and  dis- 
comfit him.  They  are  selected  for  picket  and  outpost 
duty,  advance  and  rearguard.  The  French  Zouave  is  the 
best  model  of  a  light  infantry  soldier. 

The  efficiency  of  riflemen  depends  upon  the  locality 
at  which  they  are  posted  ;  if  so  placed  that  they  can  de- 
liver their  fire  with  deliberation  and  precision,  they  be- 
come most  valuable  auxiliaries,  and  are  often  able  to  hold 
their  position  against  a  vastly  superior  force.  They 
should  be  selected  from  those  who  are  known  as  good 
shots,  otherwise  their  principal  value  would  be  lost. 

CAVALRY. — Cavalry  is  placed  second  in  importance 
to  infantry,  although  modern  warfare  has  developed  such 
perfection  in  artillery,  that  it  has  in  many  instances  turned 
the  tide  of  battle,  and  saved  the  other  arms  from  a  crush- 
ing defeat.  Well-drilled  cavalry,  however,  saves  the 
strength  of  an  army,  which,  in  the  absence  of  it,  would  be 
broken  down  by  the  advanced  post  duties,  patrol  and  de- 
tachment service,  and  many  other  duties  which,  at  the 
best,  infantry  would  but  be  able  imperfectly  to  perform. 
Its  chief  value  is  felt  when  the  infantry  is  exhausted  by 
fatigue;  coming  freshly  upon  the  ground  in  an  engage- 
ment, it  gives  the  other  troops  time  to  recover  their 
strength,  and  the  commands  to  reform.  The  nature  of 
country  in  which  a  campaign  is  undertaken,  determines 
the  relative  proportion  of  cavalry  to  infantry.  In  an  open 
country,  the  cavalry  can  be  increased  with  advantage.  As 


INTRODUCTION.  13 

a  general  rule,  however,  one  regiment  of  cavalry  to  four 
regiments  of  foot  is  a  proper  proportion,  since  cavalry, 
unless  well  supported  by  infantry,  would  at  times  be 
utterly  powerless  and  unable  to  protect  itself.  To  render 
it  perfect,  it  should  be  composed  of  strong,  skilful,  bold 
and  reckless  riders,  well-trained  and  well-built  horses, 
so  that,  dashing  forward  on  an  instant,  and  moving  with 
celerity  upon  the  enemy,  it  rides  him  down  before  he  has 
time  to  prepare  to  meet  the  shock. 

ARTILLERY. — Artillery  is  an  arm  of  great  power,  and 
in  skilful  hands  the  most  effective  arm  of  the  service ;  it 
inspires  confidence  in  the  troops,  and  if  the  fire  is  de- 
livered with  precision  and  rapidity,  it  is  next  to  impossible 
to  withstand  it.  On  the  other  hand,  if  not  well  supported 
by  infantry,  it  falls  readily  into  the  enemy's  hands,  giving 
him  an  immense  advantage  in  an  instant.  To  this  end, 
care  should  be  taken  not  to  have  it  out  of  proportion  to 
the  arms.  Two  batteries  of  six  (6-pounders)  field  pieces 
to  one  division  or  four  foot  regiments,  will  generally  be 
found  a  due  proportion.  When  the  character  of  the 
ground  is  favorable,  the  nature  of  the  service  may  re- 
quire an  increase  of  the  artillery  to  three  batteries.  Upon 
this  basis,  then,  an  effective  organization  or  army  corps 
would  be  composed  of  about  5,000  men : 

2  regiments  of  infantry  of  the  line    ....  1000  each 

1  regiment  of  light  infantry 1000 

1  regiment  of  riflemen 1000 

1  regiment  of  cavalry 1000 

2  batteries  (six  pieces)  of  artillery,  or  4  batteries  of  4 

pieces  if  mountain  howitzers  are  used. 

This  disposition  of  the  several  arms  is  predicated 
upon  the  supposition  that  the  troops  are  well  drilled  and 
disciplined,  since  the  whole  value  of  the  arrangement  is 
dependent  on  this  discipline.  Hence  the  necessity,  in  the 


14:  INTRODUCTION. 

case  of  volunteer  forces  brought  suddenly  into  active  ser- 
vice, of  making  up  for  their  want  of  experience  by  a  close 
attention  to  the  leading  points  of  military  instruction. 
For  this  purpose,  the  following  paragraphs  have  been  so 
arranged  that  each  soldier  can  follow  step  by  step  the 
necessary  course  of  instruction,  and  the  duties  which  will 
devolve  upon  him. 

An  intelligent  mind  becomes  restive  under  the  routine 
of  the  daily  drill,  unless  it  can  appreciate  the  object  to  be 
gained  by  such  discipline.  By  setting  before  the  volun- 
teer the  whole  theory  of  army  organization,  it  is  believed 
that  he  will  the  more  readily  comprehend  the  great  value 
of  discipline  in  sustaining  that  organization,  and  under 
such  impulses  will  arrive  more  rapidly  at  proficiency  in 
drill,  and  yield  a  more  ready  obedience  to  orders.  The 
minor  details  which  are  most  generally  learned  in  the 
field,  are  after  all  the  most  important  to  the  personal 
health,  comfort,  and  efficiency  of  the  troops ;  and  the 
sooner  the  volunteer  becomes  acquainted  with  these  de- 
tails, the  sooner  will  he  be  fitted  for  the  active  and  ardu- 
ous duties  of  a  campaign. 


CHAPTER  II. 

THE    RECRUIT. 

THE  patriotic  desire  of  every  good  citizen  to  serve  his 
country,  is  the  natural  result  of  our  form  of  government. 
Yet  it  is  absolutely  impossible  for  every  man  to  perform 
all  the  duties  of  a  soldier,  no  matter  what  may  be  his  nat- 
ural impulses  ;  and  to  fill  the  ranks  by  accepting  the  ser- 
vices of  all  that  offer  themselves,  would  jeopardize  the 
best  interests  of  the  service,  and  in  many  cases  would 
impede,  if  not  frustrate,  the  very  objects  of  a  campaign. 
Hence,  there  devolves  upon  the  officer  who  recruits  or 
organizes  a  company  of  men  for  active  service,  a  very 
large  share  of  responsibility ;  his  duty  to  the  individual 
who  offers,  no  less  than  to  the  service  he  seeks  to  enter, 
compels  him  to  exercise  the  wisest  discretion  in  the  selec- 
tion of  his  men.  Even  where  a  company  of  volunteers 
already  organized  in  time  of  peace  is  called  upon  to  take 
the  field,  each  man  should  be  submitted  to  a  critical 
medical  examination,  and  if  there  is  any  defect  in  his  physi- 
cal organization  which  would  render  him  unfit  to  with- 
stand the  fatigues  of  an  active  campaign,  or  any  evidence 
of  a  susceptibility  to  disease,  he  should  be  rejected  without 
hesitation. 

"  An  able-bodied  soldier  "  should  be  of  good  character, 
sound  in  body  and  mind,  of  good  appearance,  well  formed, 


16  THE    RECRUIT. 

and  fit  in  every  particular  to  perform  the  duties  required 
of  him  ;  he  should  be  over  18  years  of  age  and  under  40, 
and  the  greatest  care  should  be  taken  to  inform  him  with 
regard  to  the  nature  of  his  duties,  the  term  of  service, 
pay,  clothing,  rations,  and  other  allowances,  before  he  is 
finally  received  into  the  service.  This  will  prevent  re- 
gret and  dissatisfaction,  and  secure  efficiency. 


"THE  SQUAD." 

As  fast  as  the  men  are  enrolled,  they  should  be  in- 
structed three  times  a  day  in  the  school  of  th@  soldier : 
much  of  a  soldier's  subsequent  efficiency  depends  upon  his 
first  "  setting  up." 

For  the  purpose  of  instruction,  the  companies  are  di- 
vided into  "  squads  "  of  10,  and  are  first  drilled  in  the 
"  Position  of  a  Soldier."  Formed  in  one  rank,  about  one 
pace  apart,  the  instructor  places  them  in  position  as  fol- 
lows : 

POSITION    OF    THE    SOLDIER. 

Heels  on  the  same  line,  and  as  close  together  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  may  permit ;  the  feet  forming 
with  each  other  something  less  than  a  right  angle,  the 
toes  equally  turned  out ;  the  knees  straight,  without  stiff- 
ness ;  the  body  erect  on  the  hips,  the  upper  part  inclining 
a  little  forward  ;  the  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally ; 
arms  hanging  naturally,  elbows  near  the  body,  the  palm 
of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front,  the  little  finger 
behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons,  or  the  centre  of  the 
thigh ;  the  face  well  to  the  front,  the  chin  a  little  drawn 
in  without  constraint,  and  the  eyes  striking  the  ground 
at  the  distance  of  fifteen  paces. 


THE   RECRUIT.  17 

Remarks  on  the  Position  of  the  Soldier. 
Heels  on  the  same  line ; 

Because,  if  one  were  in  rear  of  the  other,  the  shoulder 
on  that  side  would  be  thrown  back,  or  the  position  of  the 
soldier  would  be  constrained. 

Heels  more  or  less  closed ; 

Because,  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who  have  legs 
with  large  calves,  cannot,  without  constraint,  make  their 
heels  touch  while  standing. 
Toes  equally  turned  out,  and  not  forming1  too  large  an  angle ; 

Because,  if  one  toe  were  turned  out  more  than  the 
other,  a  shoulder  would  be  deranged,  and  if  both  toes  be 
too  much  turned  out,  it  would  not  be  practicable  to  in- 
cline the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  without  rendering 
the  whole  position  unsteady. 

Knees  extended  without  stiffness; 

because,  if  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatigue  would  be 
unavoidable. 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips ; 

Because,  it  gives  equilibrium  to  the  position.  The 
instructor  will  observe  that  many  recruits  have  the  bad 
habit  of  dropping  a  shoulder,  of  drawing  in  a  side,  or  of 
advancing  a  hip,  particularly  the  left,  when  under  arms. 
These  are  defects  which  he  will  labor  to  correct. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  inclining  forward ; 

Because,  commonly  recruits  are  disposed  to  do  the 
reverse,  to  project  the  belly,  and  to  throw  back  the  shoul- 
ders when  they  wish  to  hold  themselves  erect — great  in- 
conveniences in  marching,  as  will  be  explained  in  the 
remarks  on  the  principles  of  the  step.  The  habit  of  in- 
clining forward  the  upper  part  of  the  body  is  so  impor- 
tant to  contract,  that  the  instructor  must  enforce  it  at  the 


18  THE   BECEUIT. 

beginning,  particularly  with  recruits  who  have  naturally 
the  opposite  habit ; 

Shoulders  square; 

Because,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the  line 
of  the  breast,  and  the  back  arched,  (the  defect  called 
round-shouldered,  not  uncommon  among  recruits,)  the 
man  cannot  align  himself  nor  use  his  musket  with  address. 
It  is  important,  then,  to  correct  this  defect,  and  necessary 
to  that  end  that  the  coat  should  set  easy  about  the  shoul- 
ders and  arm-pits ;  but,  in  correcting  this  defect,  the  in- 
structor will  take  care  that  the  shoulders  be  not  thrown 
too  much  to  the  rear,  which  would  cause  the  belly  to  pro- 
ject, and  the  small  of  the  back  to  be  curved. 

The  arms  hang-ing-  naturally,  elbows  near  the  body,  the  palm 
of  the  hand  a  little  turned  to  the  front,  the  little  finger 
behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons ; 

Because,  these  positions  are  equally  important  to  the 
shoulder-arms,  and  to  prevent  the  man  from  occupying 
more  space  in  a  rank  than  is  necessary  to  a  free  use  of 
the  musket ;  they  have,  moreover,  the  advantage  of  keep- 
ing in  the  shoulders. 

The  face  well  to  the  front,  the  chin  a  little  drawn  in,  without 
constraint ; 

Because,  if  there  be  stiffness  in  the  latter  position,  it 
would  communicate  itself  to  the  whole  of  the  upper  part 
of  the  body,  embarrass  its  movements,  and  give  pain  and 

fatigue. 

Eyes  cast  direct  to  the  front ; 

Because,  this  is  the  surest  means  of  maintaining  the 
shoulders  in  line — an  essential  object,  to  be  insisted  on 
and  attained. 

Too  much  attention  cannot  be  paid  to  this  first  lesson 
in  tactics,  and  the  drill  officer  should  be  constantly  on  the 
watch  throughout  the  whole  progress  of  instruction,  in  the 


THE   KECRTJIT.  19 

use  of  arms,  company  and  battalion  drills,  that  every  man 
should  always  maintain  "  the  position  of  the  soldier." 


ARM    EXERCISE. 

In  order  to  accustom  the  recruit  more  readily  to  the 
position  of  a  soldier,  and  at  the  same  time  to  render  him 
more  supple  for  acquiring  a  proficiency  in  the  manual  of 
arms — the  following  exercises  should  precede  the  regular 
drill.  Formed  in  one  rank  at  one  pace  apart,  the  in- 
structor will  give  the  command : 

Arms — UPWARD. 
i 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

First  motion. — Bring  the  forearms  to  a  vertical  posi- 
tion, the  fingers  closed,  and  hands  against  the  right  and 
left  breasts. 

Second  motion. — Extend  the  arms  vertically  over  the 
head,  open  the  fingers  and  place  the  palms  together. 

Arms — DOWNWARD. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

First  motion. — Bring  the  arms  to  the  first  position  of 
arms  upward. 

Second  motion. — Drop  the  hands  with  force  to  the  side. 

Arms — FORWARD. 
One  time  and  motion. 

Extend  the  arms  horizontally  in  front  of  the  body,  the 
palms  of  the  hands  touching. 

Arms — DOWNWARD. 
One  time  and  two  motions,  as  before. 


20  THE   EECEUTT. 

Arms — BACKWARD. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 
Carry  the  hands  behind  the  body,  the  palms  touching. 

Arms — FRONT. 
Carry  the  hands  quickly  to  the  side. 

Arms — SIDEWAYS. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Extend  the  arms  horizontally  to  the  right  and  left. 

Arms — DOWNWARD. 

As  before. 

The  instructor  will  now  command  in  rapid  succession, 
Arms  sideways  !  forward  !  upward  !  downward  !  back- 
ward !  front !  all  of  which  will  be  executed  as  directed. 
By  continuing  this  exercise  for  10  or  15  minutes  at  the 
commencement  of  every  drill  without  arms,  a  remarkable 
improvement  will  soon  be  observed  in  the  carriage  of  the 
men. 

SALUTING. 

Saluting  with  the  right  or  left  hand  is  executed  in  one 
time  and  four  motions.  The  instructor  commands : 

Right  hand — SALUTE. 

First  motion. — Extend  the  arm  horizontally  to  the 
right,  palm  down. 

Second  motion. — Carry  the  hand  to  the  visor  of  the 
cap. 

Third  motion. — Carry  the  arm  back  to  the  horizontal 
position. 

Fourth  motion. — Drop  the  hand  quickly  to  the  side. 


THE   RECRUIT.  21 

Left  hand — SALUTE. 

The  same  as  for  the  right. 

The  salute  should  always  be  made  with  the  hand  op- 
posite to  the  person  saluted. 

Having  thoroughly  impressed  upon  the  men  the  above 
rules,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Eyes — EIGHT.     2.  FRONT. 

At  the  word  right ,  the  soldier  will  turn  his  head  gen- 
tly, so  as  to  bring  the  inner  corner  of  the  left  eye  in  a  line 
with  the  buttons  of  the  coat,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of 
the  eyes  of  the  men  in  the  same  rank.  At  the  command 
front,  the  head  will  resume  the  direct  or  habitual  position. 
The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  movement  of  the 
head  does  not  derange  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders, 
and  that  the  men  do  not  acquire  a  habit  of  throwing  down 
the  head  in  dressing. 

The  movement  of  Eyes — Left,  will  ~be  executed,  by  inverse  means. 

FACINGS. 

Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  executed  in  one 
time,  or  pause.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Right  (or  left) — FACE. 

At  the  word  face,  raise  the  right  foot  slightly,  turn  on 
the  left  heel,  to  the  right,  (or  left,)  raising  the  left  toe  a 
little,  and  then  replace  the  right  heel  beside  the  left,  and 
on  the  same  line.  The  face  should  always  be  through  a 
right  angle,  and  should  be  executed  by  the  feet  and  legs, 
the  body  moving  around  to  the  right  (or  left)  without 
twisting  or  constraint.  The  instructor  should  labor  to  keep 
the  body  steady,  and  to  prevent  the  formation  of  the  habit 
of  bending  the  knees,  or  springing. 


Z5P  THE 

The  full  face  to  the  rear  is  always  to  the  right,  and  is 
executed  in  two  times,  or  pauses.  The  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Squad.     2.  ABOUT — FACE. 

First  Motion. — At  the  word  about,  the  soldier  will 
turn  far  enough  on  the  left  heel  to  bring  the  left  toe  di- 
rectly to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  carrying  his  right 
foot  to  the  rear,  the  hollow  opposite  to,  and  full  three 
inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  feet  square  to  each  other. 
The  back  of  the  right  hand  is  placed  a  little  above  the 
right  hip,  and  the  body  is  turned  to  the  right  sufficiently 
to  give  ease  to  the  position. 

Second  Motion. — At  the  word  face,  the  soldier  raises 
his  toes  a  little,  turns  upon  both  heels,  faces  to  the  rear, 
keeping  his  legs  straight,  and  draws  back  the  right  heel 
by  the  side  of  the  left,  at  the  same  time  dropping  his 
right  hand  by  his  side. 

BALANCE    STEP. 

Before  commencing  the  march  the  soldier  should  al- 
ways be  instructed  in  the  balance  step,  the  object  of  which 
is  to  teach  him  the  free  movements  of  his  limbs,  while  he 
at  the  same  time  preserves  perfect  squareness  of  the  shoul- 
ders, with  the  greatest  steadiness  of  the  body  ;  no  labor 
should  be  spared  to  attain  this  object,  which  lies  at  the 
very  foundation  of  good  marching. 

The  squad  being  at  attention,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

Left  foot — FORWARD. 

At  this  command  the  soldier  will  throw  his  left  foot 
gently  forwards,  about  twenty-four  inches,  balancing  his 
body  well  on  the  right  foot  without  changing  the  position 
of  the  shoulders,  and  without  the  body  losing  its  erect 


THE   RECRUIT.  23 

position.  The  toe  should  be  turned  out  as  in  the  position 
of  the  soldier,  the  foot  about  three  inches  from  the  ground 
and  very  nearly  parallel  to  it,  the  toe  being  very  slightly 
depressed. 

At  the  command : 

Left  foot — REAR. 

The  left  foot  is  brought  gently  back,  the  ball  of  the 
left  foot  close  to  the  right  heel,  the  leg  straight,  toe  raised, 
and  heel  depressed. 

As  soon  as  the  soldier  becomes  steady  in  the  new  po- 
sition, the  instructor  repeats  the  command,  left  foot  for- 
ward, then  left  foot  rear,  for  several  times,  and  then 
commands : 

HALT  ; 

at  which  the  left  foot,  cither  advanced  or  to  the  rear,  is 
brought  to  the  right,  as  in  the  position  of  the  soldier. 

The  instructor  then  causes  the  soldier  to  balance  on  the 
left  foot,  by  advancing  and  retiring  the  right,  as  has  been 
directed  for  the  left. 

THE    DIRECT    STEP. 

After  the  soldier  is  sufficiently  instructed  in  the  bal- 
ance step  to  execute  it  on  either  foot  without  losing  his 
balance,  the  instructor  will  proceed  to  instruct  him  in  the 
mechanicsm  of  the  direct  step.  For  this  purpose  he  will 
command  : 

1.  By  the  numbers — Forward.     2.  ONE. 

At  the  command,  one,  the  soldier  will  throw  forward 
the  left  foot  as  in  the  position  of  left  foot  forward,  the  in- 
structor then  commands  : 

Two. 

At  this  command,  the  weight  of  the  body  is  thrown 


24  THE   RECRUIT. 

forward,  the  left  foot  striking  the  ground  without  shock, 
at  the  distance  of  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  right ;  the 
body  assumes  the  perpendicular  position,  and  the  right 
foot  is  brought  up  to  the  position  of  right  foot  rear. 

The  right  foot  is  then  brought  forward  at  the  com- 
mand one,  and  the  step  completed  at  the  command  two  ; 
thus  the  squad  is  made  to  advance  step  by  step.  The 
halt  is  executed  as  in  the  balance  step. 

When  the  squad  is  sufficiently  instructed  in  the  me- 
chanism of  the  direct  step,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to 
take  up  the  march  in  common  time  ;  for  this  purpose  he 
will  command  : 

1.  Squad  forward — Common  time.     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  the  soldier  will  throw  the 
weight  of  his  body  on  the  right  leg,  without  bending  the 
left  knee. 

At  the  command  march,  he  will  smartly,  but  without 
a  jerk,  carry  straight  forward  the  left  foot  twenty-eight 
inches  from  the  right,  the  sole  near  the  ground,  the  leg 
extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed,  and  both  it  and  the 
knee  slightly  turned  out ;  he  will  at  the  same  time  throw 
the  weight  of  the  body  forward,  and  plant  flat  the  left 
foot,  without  shock,  precisely  at  the  distance  where  it 
finds  itself  from  the  right  when  the  weight  of  the  body  is 
brought  forward,  the  whole  of  which  will  now  rest  on  the 
left  foot.  The  soldier  will  next,  in  like  manner,  advance 
the  right  foofc  and  plant  it  as  directed  for  the  left,  the  heel 
twenty-eight  inches  from  the  heel  of  the  left  foot,  and  thus 
continue  the  march  without  crossing  the  legs,  or  striking 
one  against  the  other,  without  turning  the  shoulders,  and 
always  preserving  the  face  direct  to  the  front.  Common 
time  is  executed  at  the  rate  of  ninety  steps  to  the 
minute. 


THE    RECRUIT.  25 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  arrest  the  march,  he 
commands : 

1.  Squad.     2.  HALT. 

The  command  halt,  should  be  given  just  as  one  foot 
has  come  to  the  ground,  and  the  other  is  raised  for  making 
the  next  step ;  the  soldier  instinctively  completes  the 
pace  with  the  raised  foot,  and  brings  the  other  firmly  to 
its  place  beside  it.  By  careful  attention  to  this  rule  a 
large  command  may  as  readily  be  halted  at  the  same  in- 
stant, as  a  single  individual. 

The  principles  of  the  step  in  quick  time  are  the  same 
as  for  common  time ;  it  is  executed,  however,  at  the  rate 
of  110  steps  per  minute.  After  the  soldier  is  well  estab- 
lished in  the  length  and  swiftness  of  the  step  at  common 
time,  he  should  be  practised  in  quick  time,  as  it  is  the 
pace  best  adapted  to  marches,  the  manoeuvres,  etc. 

The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in  quick 
time,  commands : 

1.  Squad  forward.     2.  MARCH. 

PRINCIPLES    OF    THE    DOUBLE    QUICK    STEP. 

The  length  of  the  double  quick  step  is  thirty-three 
inches,  and  its  swiftness  is  at  the  rate  of  165  steps  per 
minute.  This  step  is  designed  especially  for  light  troops, 
such  as  light  infantry  and  riflemen,  and  to  them  it  is  in- 
dispensable ;  its  utility  has,  however,  been  so  frequently 
demonstrated  of  late  years,  as  to  make  it  proper  that  it 
should  form  a  part  of  the  instruction  of  all  infantry 
troops. 

The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  his  squad  the  prin- 
ciples and  mechanism  of  the  double  quick  step,  com- 
mands : 

1.  Double  quick  step.     2.  MARCH. 
2 


20  THE   EECEUIT. 

At  the  command  double  quick  step,  the  soldier  will 
raise  his  hands  to  a  level  with  his  hips,  the  hands  closed, 
the  nails  towards  the  body,  the  elbows  to  tire  rear,  and 
well  drawn  in  towards  the  body. 

At  the  command  march,  he  will  raise  his  left  knee  as 
high  as  possible  without  derangement  of  the  body,  keep- 
ing his  leg  from  the  knee  down  in  a  vertical  position,  the 
toe  depressed  ;  he  will  then  replace  his  foot  in  its  former 
position.  At  the  command  two,  he  will  execute  with  the 
right  leg  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left,  and 
the  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  at  the  command  one, 
two,  will  be  continued  until  the  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  soldier  will  bring  the  foot 
which  is  raised  by  the  side  of  the  other,  and  at  the  same 
time  dropping  his  hands  by  his  side  will  resume  the  posk 
tion  of  the  soldier  without  arms. 

When  the  squad  has  learned  to  execute  the  step  prop- 
erly, the  instructor  will  repeat  the  words  one,  two,  in 
more  rapid  succession,  and  will  finally  drop  them,  leaving 
the  files  to  execute  the  step  in  their  own  time.  The  in- 
structor will  see  that  the  step  is  taken  in  rapid  succession, 
and  that  none  of  the  files  lose  the  step. 

The  soldier  being  sufficiently  established  in  the  prin- 
ciples of  this  step,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad  forward.     2.  JDouble  quick.     3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  the  soldier  will  throw  the 
weight  of  his  body  on  the  right  leg,  without  bending  the 
left  knee. 

At  the  command  double  quick,  he  will  place  his  arms 
as  indicated  above. 

At  the  command  march,  he  will  carry  forward  the  left 


THE   BECRUIT.  27 

foot,  and  plant  it,  the  toe  first,  at  the  distance  of  thirty- 
three  inches  from  the  right,  the  leg  slightly  bent,  and  the 
knee  somewhat  raised ;  he  will  then  execute  with  the 
right  foot  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left.  This 
alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  take  place  by  throwing 
the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  foot  that  is  planted,  and  by 
allowing  a  natural,  oscillatory  motion  to  the  arms.  The 
feet  should  not  be  raised  too  much,  a  common  fault  with 
beginners,  and  the  body  should  incline  slightly  forward. 

The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with  different 
degrees  of  swiftness.  Under  urgent  circumstances,  the 
cadence  of  this  step  may  be  increased  to  180  per  minute. 
At  this  rate  a  distance  of  4,000,  yards  would  be  passed 
over  in  about  twenty-five  minutes. 

The  men  should  also  be  exercised  in  running ;  the 
principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double  quick  step,  the 
only  difference  consisting  in  a  greater  degree  of  swiftness. 

It  is  recommended  in  marching  in  double  quick  time, 
or  the  run,  that  the  men  should  breathe  as  much  as  pos- 
sible through  the  nose,  keeping  the  mouth  closed. 

NOTE. — The  Manual  of  Arms  is  the  next  step  of  instruction  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier ;  for  this  Tactics  will  be  referred  to,  as  the 
brevity  of  this  work  will  not  admit  of  its  insertion. 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE    COMPANY. 

IN  an  organization,  the  smallest  number  complete  in 
itself,  is  the  company,  which  varies  in  number  from  50  to 
100  rank  and  file, 

NOTE. — The  general  principles  of  organization  are  the  same  for 
all  arms.  The  variation  in  the  Cavalry  will  be  referred  to,  and  that 
for  Artillery  will  be  found  in  the  Manual  for  Light  and  Heavy  Guns. 

A  captain,  two  or  more  lieutenants,  from  four  to  six 
sergeants,  and  as  many  corporals,  are  attached  to  every 
company.  The  captain  and  lieutenants  are  the  officers, 
and  the  sergeants  and  corporals  the  non-commissioned 
officers  of  the  company. 

The  captain  is  responsible  for  the  instruction,  disci- 
pline, general  efficiency,  and  moral  tone  of  the  company. 

The  lieutenants  assist  the  captain  in  the  maintenance 
of  discipline,  and  in  the  instruction. 

The  company  is  divided  into  two  equal  parts,  which 
are  designated  as  the  first  and  second  platoon,  counting 
from  the  right ;  and  each  platoon  is,  in  like  manner,  di- 
vided into  two  sections. 

The  company  is  formed  into  two  ranks  in  the  follow- 
ing manner :  the  corporals  on  the  right  and  left  of  pla- 
toons, according  to  height ;  the  tallest  corporal  and  the 


THE   COMPANY.  29 

tallest  man  from  the  first  file  on  the  right,  the  next  two 
tallest  men  from  the  second  file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  file, 
which  is  composed  of  the  shortest  corporal  and  the  short- 
est man. 

The  odd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two,  in  the 
company,  from  right  to  left,  form  groups  of  four  men, 
who,  when  they  act  as  light  troops,  are  designated  com- 
rades  in  battle. 

The  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  com- 
pany are  posted  in  the  following  manner  : 

The  captain,  on  the  right  of  the  company,  touching 
with  the  left  elbow. 

The  first  sergeant,  in  the  rear  rank,  touching  with  the 
left  elbow,  and  covering  the  captain.  In  the  manoeuvres 
he  is  denominated  covering  sergeant,  or  right  guide  of  the 
company. 

The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  are  posted  as  file- 
closers,  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  two  paces  behind  the 
rear  rank. 

The  first  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  fourth 
section. 

The  second  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  first 
platoon. 

The  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  second 
platoon. 

The  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the 
left  of  the  company.  In  the  manoeuvres  he  is  called  the 
left  guide  of  the  company. 

The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the 
right  of  the  second  platoon. 

The  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the 
left  of  the  first  platoon. 

The  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the 
right  of  the  first  platoon. 


30  THE   COMPANY. 

The  corporals  are  posted  in  the  front  rank. 

The  company  in  cavalry  is  denominated  the  troop  ;  it  is 
organized  upon  the  same  principles  as  that  of*  infantry ; 
its  habitual  formation  is  in  two  ranks. 

When  the  company  is  in  line,  and  acting  singly,  the 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  are  posted  as  fol- 
lows : 

The  captain  in  front  of  the  centre,  one  pace  from  the 
front  rank. 

The  first  lieutenant  in  rear  of  the  centre,  in  the  rank 
of  file-closers. 

The  second  lieutenant  commands  the  first  platoon ;  in 
the  absence  of  a  third  lieutenant,  the  second  platoon  is 
commanded  by  the  senior  sergeant.  The  chiefs  of  platoons 
are  posted  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centres  of  their  re- 
spective platoons. 

The  first  sergeant  in  rear  of  the  right,  in  the  rank  of 
file-closers. 

The  second  and  third  sergeants  on  the  right  and  left 
of  the  company,  and  denominated  the  guide  of  the  right, 
and  guide  of  the  left,  respectively. 

The  fourth  sergeant  is  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon, 
in  the  front  rank,  and  counted  in  the  rank  ;  \hzfifth  ser- 
geant is  in  a  corresponding  position  on  the  right  of  the 
second  platoon. 

Corporals  on  the  flanks  of  platoons. 

Buglers  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre. 

Two  companies  of  cavalry  united  constitute  a  squad- 
ron. Each  squadron  is  composed  of  four  platoons,  distin- 
guished by  the  denomination  of  first,  second,  third,  and 
fourth,  commencing  on  the  right. 

The  first  and  second  platoons  form  the  first  division, 
the  third  and  fourth  form  the  second  division. 

The  senior  captain  of  the  squadron  is  denominated  the 


THE   COMPANY.  31 

captain  commanding,  the  junior  captain  tho  second  cap- 
tain. 

When  the  squadron  is  in  line,  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  are  posted  as  follows  : 

The  captain  commanding  at  the  centre  of  the  squadron, 
the  croup  of  his  horse  one  pace  in  front  of  the  heads  of 
the  horses  of  the  front  rank. 

The  second  captain  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of 
the  squadron.  He  is  charged  with  the  alignment  of  the 
rear  rank  and  line  of  file-closers. 

The  senior  first  lieutenant  commands  the  first  platoon; 
the  junior  first  lieutenant  commands  the  fourth  platoon. 

The  senior  second  lieutenant  commands  the  second 
platoon  ;  the  junior  second  lieutenant  commands  the  third 
platoon. 

Each  of  these  officers  is  posted  at  the  centre  of  his 
platoon,  with  the  croup  of  his  horse  one  pace  in  front  of 
the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front  rank. 

The  senior  sergeant  is  posted  behind  the  first  file  from 
the  right  of  the  first  platoon ;  he  is  the  principal  guide 
when  the  column  of  squadrons  is  left  in  front. 

The  second  sergeant  is  behind  the  third  file  from  the 
left  of  the  fourth  platoon  ;  he  is  principal  guide  when  the 
column  of  squadrons  is  right  in  front. 

The  third  sergeant  is  posted  on  the  right  of  the  front 
rank  of  the  squadron  ;  he  is  the  guide  of  the  right,  and  is 
not  counted  in  the  rank. 

The  fourth  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  ;  ho 
is  guide  of  the  left,  and  not  counted  in  the  rank. 

The  fifth  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  and 
counted  in  the  rank. 

The  sixth  sergeant  on  the  right  of  tho  second  platoon, 
also  counted  in  the  rank. 

The  seventh  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  third  platoon  ; 


32  THE   COMPANY. 

the  eighth  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  fourth  platoon — 
both  are  counted  in  the  rank. 

The  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  file-closers  are  at  one 
pace  from  the  croup  of  those  of  the  rear  rank. 

The  corporals  are  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  right  and 
left  of  their  respective  platoons,  and  supply  the  places  of 
sergeants  when  necessary. 

When  guidons  are  used,  they  are  carried  by  the  non- 
commissioned officers  on  the  left  of  the  first  and  third 
platoons. 

As  the  company  is  the  unit  of  a  military  organization, 
the  efficiency  of  that  organization  depends  upon  the  effi- 
ciency of  the  unit ;  and  the  captain  or  commanding  officer 
of  a  company  should  always  bear  in  mind  that  there  is  no 
position  in  the  service,  second  in  importance  to  his.  He 
should  be  thoroughly  familiar  with  tactics.  He  should 
strive  to  acquaint  himself  with  the  individual  character 
and  habits  of  his  men,  so  as  to  know  how  much  he  can 
depend  upon  them  ;  and  to  be  able  to  make  from  them  a 
selection  of  any  number  at  any  time  for  important  ser- 
vice. While  he  is  personally  responsible  for  the  proper 
care  and  preservation  of  the  arms  and  accoutrements,  he 
should  also  feel  himself  responsible  for  the  proper  cloth- 
ing and  diet  of  his  men.  In  order  the  more  effectively  to 
carry  out  a  rigid  supervision  of  the  personal  conduct  and 
comfort  of  the  men,  he  will  cause  them  to  be  numbered  in  a 
regular  series,  including  the  non-commissioned  officers,  and 
divided  into  several  squads,  each  to  be  put  under  the 
charge  of  a  non-commissioned  officer.  As  far  as  practicable, 
the  men  of  each  squad  should  be  quartered  together. 

Each  of  the  lieutenants  is  charged  with  a  squad  for  the 
supervision  of  its  order  and  cleanliness ;  and  captains 
should  require  their  subalterns  to  assist  them  in  the  per- 
formance of  all  company  duties. 


THE    COMPANY.  DO 

The  utmost  attention  should  be  paid  by  captains  to 
the  cleanliness  of  their  men,  as  to  their  persons,  clothing, 
arms,  accoutrements,  and  equipments,  and  also  as  to  their 
quarters  or  tents. 

The  name  of  each  soldier  should  be  labelled  on  his 
bunk  in  quarters,  and  his  company  number  should  be 
placed  against  his  arms  and  accoutrements. 

The  arms  are  placed  in  arm-racks,  the  stoppers  in  the 
muzzles,  the  cocks  let  down,  and  the  bayonets  in  their 
scabbards,  the  accoutrements  suspended  over  the  arms, 
and  the  swords  or  sabres,  when  these  are  worn,  hung  up 
by  the  belts  on  pegs. 

The  knapsack  of  each  man  should  be  placed  at  the 
foot  of  his  bunk  when  he  is  in  quarters,  packed  with  his 
effects,  and  ready  to  be  slung ;  the  overcoat  rolled,  strap- 
ped, and  placed  under  the  knapsack ;  the  cap  on  a  shelf, 
and  his  boots  well  cleaned.  Dirty  clothes  should  be  kept 
in  an  appropriate  part  of  the  knapsack ;  nothing  to  be 
put  under  the  bedding. 

Cooking  utensils  and  table  furniture  should  be  clean, 
and  in  their  appropriate  places  ;  blacking  and  brushes  out 
of  sight ;  the  fuel  in  boxes. 

The  cleaning  up  should  take  place  at  least  once  a 
week.  The  chiefs  of  squads  should  cause  bunks  and  bed- 
ding to  be  overhauled,  floors  cleaned,  and  arms,  accoutre- 
ments, etc.,  all  put  in  order. 

Non-commissioned  officers  in  charge  of  squads,  should 
be  held  immediately  responsible  that  their  men  observe 
what  is  prescribed  above ;  that  they  wash  their  hands  and 
faces  daily ;  that  they  brush  or  comb  their  heads  and 
beards  ;  that  those  who  go  on  duty  put  their  arms,  accou- 
trements, dress,  etc.,  in  the  best  order. 

Commanders  of  companies  should  see  that  the  arms 
and  accoutrements  in  possession  of  the  men  are  always 
2* 


34:  THE   COMPANY. 

kept  in  good  order,  and  that  proper  care  is  taken  in  clean- 
ing them. 

Arms  should  not  be  taken  to  pieces  without  permission 
of  an  officer.  Bright  barrels  should  be  kept  clean  and  free- 
from  rust,  without  polishing  them ;  care  should  be  taken 
not  to  bruise  or  bend  the  barrel.  After  firing,  wash  out 
the  bore,  wipe  it  dry,  and  then  pass  a  bit  of  cloth,  slightly 
greased,  to  the  bottom.  In  these  operations,  a  rod  of  wood 
with  a  loop  on  one  end  is  to  be  used  instead  of  the  ram- ' 
mer.  The  barrel,  when  not  in  use,  should  be  closed  with 
a  stopper.  For  exercise  each  man  should  keep  himself 
provided  with  a  piece  of  sole  leather  to  fit  the  cap  or 
countersink  of  the  hammer,  to  prevent  breaking  the  nipple. 

All  field  pieces  in  the  possession  of  artillery  companies 
should  be  kept  clean  and  dry ;  their  vents  frequently 
examined,  to  see  that  they  are  clear ;  the  elevating  screw 
wiped  clean,  worked,  and  oiled.  "When  tarpaulins  are 
placed  over  them,  they  should  occasionally  be  removed, 
the  guns  and  carriages  brushed  off,  and,  if  damp,  allowed 
to  dry. 

The  implements  should  all  be  kept  clean  and  under 
cover,  the  harness  and  leather  articles  should  be  brushed 
and  greased  with  neats  foot  oil  as  often  as  their  condition 
requires  it,  and  if  they  have  a  reddish  hue,  mix  a  little 
lampblack  with  the  oil.  First  brush  the  leather,  then 
pass  over  it  a  sponge  wet  with  warm  water,  and  apply 
the  oil  before  the  leather  is  quite  dry. 

Arms  should  not  be  left  loaded  in  armories,  quarters, 
or  tents,  or  when  the  men  are  off  duty,  except  by  special 
orders.  The  ammunition  in  the  possession  of  the  men 
should  be  inspected  frequently,  and  any  damaged,  wasted, 
or  lost  by  neglect,  should  be  paid  for. 

Knapsacks  should  be  black ;  they  should  be  marked 
on  the  outside  with  the  number  of  the  regiment,  and  on 


TIIE   COMPANY.  35 

the  inside  with  the  letter  of  the  company,  and  the  number 
of  the  soldier,  on  such  part  as  will  readily  be  seen  at  in- 
spections. 

Haversacks  should  be  marked  on  the  flap  with  the 
number  and  name  of  the  regiment,  the  letter  of  the  com- 
pany, and  the  number  of  the  soldier. 

Both  officers  and  men  should  wear  the  prescribed  uni- 
form in  camp  or  garrison. 

In  camp  or  quarters,  the  officers  should  visit  the  kitch- 
en daily  and  inspect  the  kettles,  food,  etc.,  and  at  all  times 
carefully  attend  to  the  messing  and  economy  of  their  com- 
panies. 

The  company  rations  are  usually  taken  charge  of  by 
the  orderly  sergeant,  and  issued  daily  to  the  cooks,  by 
whom  they  are  prepared  and  served  to  the  company.  The 
men  of  the  company  serve  in  turn  as  cooks,  two  being  the 
usual  number  serving  at  once.  When  in  camp,  the  men 
present  themselves  at  meal  times  to  the  cooks,  who  issue 
to  each  man  in  turn  his  proper  allowance ;  in  garrison  or 
quarters  the  tables  are  set  out,  and  the  cooks  place  each 
man's  ration  on  his  plate,  and  in  his  cup,  before  the  com- 
pany is  marched  in. 

When  not  actually  in  the  field  the  ration  is  in  most  cases 
more  than  sufficient,  so  that  by  care  on  the  part  of  the 
orderly  sergeant  and  cooks,  there  is  more  or  less  saved  on 
the  rations  of  the  company ;  this  saving  is  sold  for  the 
benefit  of  the  company,  and  constitutes  what  is  denomi- 
nated company  fund. 

When  a  militia  company  is  enrolled  for  active  service 
the  captain  should,  at  the  earliest  possible  moment,  have 
it  properly  uniformed  and  equipped,  and  taught  how  to 
take  care  of  its  arms,  clothing,  etc. ;  each  man  should  be 
provided  with  his  knapsack,  haversack,  blanket,  knife  and 
fork,  spoon,  tin  plate,  and  cup. 


36  TI1K   COMPANY. 

Canteens  are  also  necessary  in  most  cases  tliey  are 
worn^over  the  haversack. 

Each  man  should  also  be  provided  with  the  following 
articles  : 

Two  woollen  undershirts. 

Two  pair  thick  cotton  drawers. 

Four  pair  woollen  socks. 

Two  pair  stout  shoes,  with  broad,  thick  soles,  for 
footmen. 

One  pair  boots,  and  one  pair  shoes  for  horsemen. 

In  starting  out  on  a  campaign,  an  amount  of  clothing 
equal  at  least  to  one-fourth  the  strength  of  the  company, 
should  be  transported  with  the  company's  equipments. 
The  uniform  for  active  service  should  consist  of  a  simple 
fatigue  dress  of  durable  material,  a  plain  and  substantial 
overcoat  with  a  cape,  and  a  forage  cap. 

COMPANY  BOOKS. 

Every  company  should  be  provided  with 

1.  A  morning  report  book,  showing  the  strength  of 
the  company  every  morning,  the  number   for   duty,  the 
number  sick,  and  all  the  casualties  that  may  occur. 

2.  A  clothing  book,  showing  the  clothing  issued  to 
each  man,  the  date  of  issue,  and  price. 

3.  A   roster,   arranged   in   alphabetical   order,   from 
which  the  details  for  guard  duty  and  other  service  are  made, 
each  man  being  credited  with  his  tour,  and  the  duty  fairly 
distributed. 


Formation    of  a    IRegiment    and.    Company. 


•^u   s. 

S9 

a     3 

g  * 

a 
a 

X 

1 

Is 

*^  to 

a 
D 
D 
0 

n 
a 
D 

5? 

r 

o 

5i 
CM 

a 
a 

0 

a 
a 
D 

fc 

^                  I 
S                  S 

to 

a 
n 
a 
a 
a 
a 

D 

X 

J 

I 

§ 

> 

1  A 

a        V 

ol  i 

5      &  S 

10  «« 

S             s 

a                  ^ 
a                u- 

Li     0 

a 
a 
n 

**: 

n 
a 
a 
a 
a 
•a 
a 

| 

«5* 

R| 

a 
a 
a 
a 
n 
a 
a 

v| 

<*:                       jEi 

01         r 

e 

a 
a 
a 
a 
a 
a 
a 

1 

I 

&  * 
O>  u 

°  1 

g  * 

a    co 

*g° 

i."  ~ 

IE 

r 
i 

DS 

<o 

I 


DEI 


nf 


U 


CHAPTER  IV. 

THE    REGIMENT. 

A  REGIMENT  is  composed  of  ten  companies,  which  are 
habitually  posted  from  right  to  left,  in  the  following 
order  :  first,  sixth,  fourth,  ninth,  third,  eighth,  fifth,  tenth, 
seventh,  second,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  captain. 
With  a  less  number  of  companies  the  same  principle  will 
be  observed,  viz. :  the  first  captain  commands  the  right 
company,  the  second  captain  the  left  company,  the  third 
captain  the  right  centre  company,  and  so  on. 

The  companies  thus  posted  are  designated  from  right 
to  left,  first  company,  second  company,  etc.  This  designa- 
tion is  observed  in  all  the  manoeuvres. 

The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever  their 
denomination,  form  \ho,  first  division  ;  the  next  two  com- 
panies the  second  division  ;  and  so  on  to  the  left. 

In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  every  regiment,  or 
part  of  a  regiment,  composed  of  two  or  more  companies, 
is  called  a  battalion. 

Every  regiment  is  provided  with  a  color,  which  is 
posted  with  its  guard,  to  be  designated  hereafter,  on  the 
left  of  the  right  centre  company  ;  that  company,  and  all 
on  its  right,  belongs  to  the  right  wing  of  the  regiment,  or 
battalion ;  the  remaining  companies  constitute  the  left 
icing. 


38  THE   KKGDIENT. 

To  each  regiment  are  attached  a  colonel,  who  com- 
mands it,  and  is  responsible  for  its  general  discipline  and 
instruction;  a  lieutenant-colonel,  two  majors,  a  quarter- 
master, commissary,  paymaster,  surgeon,  and  frequently 
an  assistant  surgeon,  an  adjutant,  sergeant-major,  quarter- 
master-sergeant, and  commissary  sergeant.  The  four  first 
named  of  these  officers  are  the  field  officers  of  the  regi- 
ment ;  the  others  constitute  its  commissioned  and  non- 
commissioned staff. 

POSTS    OF    FIELD    OFFICERS    AND    REGIMENTAL  STAFF. 

The  field  officers  are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and 
on  active  service  must  be  on  horseback;  the  adjutant, 
when  the  battalion  is  manoeuvring,  is  on  foot ;  when  on 
the  march,  or  in  action,  he  is  mounted. 

The  colonel's  post  is  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  file- 
closers,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  battalion.  The 
lieutenant-colonel  and  senior  major  are  behind  the  centres 
of  the  right  and  left  wing  respectively,  the  junior  major 
behind  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  all  twelve  paces  in 
rear  of  the  file-closers. 

The  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  are  opposite  the 
right  and  left  of  the  battalion  respectively,  and  eight 
paces  in  rear  of  the  file-closers.  They  assist  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel and  major,  respectively,  in  the  manreuvres. 

The  quartermaster,  surgeon,  and  other  staff  officers, 
are  in  one  rank  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and  three  paces 
in  his  rear.  The  quartermaster-sergeant  is  on  a  line  with 
the  front  rank  of  the  field  music,  and  two  paces  on  its 
right. 

PIONEERS,    FIELD    MUSIC,    AND    BAND. 

The  pioneers  (one  for  each  company)  are  drawn  up 
in  two  ranks,  and  posted  on  the  right,  having  their  left 


THE   KEGLMENT.  39 

four  paces  from  the  right  of  the  first  company.  A  cor- 
poral of  pioneers,  selected  from  the  corporals  by  the 
colonel,  is  posted  on  the  right  of  the  pioneers. 

The  field  music  (two  musicians  to  each  company)  is 
drawn  up  in  four  ranks,  and  posted  twelve  paces  in  rear 
of  the  file-closers,  the  left  opposite  the  centre  company. 

The  principal  musician  is  two  paces  in  front  of  the 
field  music.  ,  The  regimental  band,  (not  to  exceed  sixteen 
musicians,)  if  there  be  one,  is  drawn  up  in  two  or  four 
ranks,  according  to  its  numbers,  and  posted  five  paces  in 
rear  of  the  field  music,  having  a  principal  musician  at  its 
head. 

COLOR    GUARD. 

The  color  guard  of  a  regiment  or  battalion  is  com- 
posed of  eight  corporals,  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right 
centre  company,  of  which  company,  for  the  time  being, 
the  guard  forms  a  part. 

The  front  rank  is  composed  of  a  sergean^  selected  by 
the  colonel,  who  is  called  the  color-bearer,  with  the  two 
ranking  corporals  on  his  right  and  left ;  the  rear  rank  is 
composed  of  the  three  corporals  next  in  rank  ;  the  three 
remaining  corporals  are  posted  in  rear  in  the  rank  of  file^ 
closers.  The  left  guide  of  the  color  company,  when  the 
three  last  named  corporals  are  in  the  rank  of  file-closers, 
is  immediately  on  their  left. 

In  battalions  of  less  than  five  companies,  there  should 
be  no  color  guard,  and  no  display  of  colors,  except  at  re- 
views. 

GENERAL    GUIDES    AND    MARKERS. 

There  should  be  two  general  guides  in  each  battalion, 
selected  by  the  colonel  from  among  the  sergeants  (other 
than  first  sergeants)  for  their  accuracy  in  marching.  These 
sergeants  are  denominated  right  and  left  general  guide , 


40  THE   REGIMENT. 

respectively,  and  are  posted  in  the  line  of  file-closers  ;  the 
first  in  rear  of  the  right,  and  the  second  in  rear  of  the  left 
flank  of  the  battalion. 

Three  markers  are  required  to  every  battalion ;  they 
are  posted  behind  the  first  company  in  the  rank  of  file- 
closers,  when  the  battalion  is  in  line,  and  behind  the  lead- 
ing company  or  division  whenever  it  is  in  column. 

TO  FORM  THE  REGIMENT  OR  BATTALION. 

At  the  signal,  called  the  adjutant's  call,  the  companies 
are  marched  from  the  company  parades  by  their  captains, 
the  music  playing.  The  color  company  serves  as  the  basis 
of  the  formation,  and  is  the  first  to  form  ;  the  color  guard 
being  at  the  point  where  the  centre  of  the  line  is  to  rest, 
one  marker  is  placed  in  front  of  it,  his  elbow  touching  the 
right  corporal  of  the  color  guard,  and  another  on  the  line 
at  a  little  less  than  company  distance  from  him,  on  his 
right,  and  facing  towards  him ;  the  color  company  is 
halted  three  paces  behind  this  line,  faced  to  the  front,  and 
dressed  up  upon  the  line  by  the  captain,  who  aligns  it  to 
the  left. 

The  company  on  the  left  of  the  color  is  the  next  to 
take  its  post ;  it  is  halted  three  paces  behind  the  line,  its 
right  nearly  behind  the  left  file  of  the  color  guard,  and 
faced  to  the  front.  As  soon  as  it  halts,  the  left  guide  of  the 
company  throws  himself  out,  so  as  to  be  opposite  one  of 
the  three  left  files  of  the  company,  faces  to  the  right,  and 
aligns  himself  upon  the  two  markers ;  the  captain  then 
places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  color  guard,  on  a  line  with 
its  front  rank,  and  aligns  the  company  to  the  right.  The 
company  on  the  right  of  the  colors  forms  next  upon  the 
same  principles ;  the  right  guide  posts  himself  upon  the 
line  opposite  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  the  company, 


THE   REGIMENT.  41 

and  faces  to  the  left ;  the  captain  places  himself  on  the  right 
of  the  color  company,  and  aligns  his  company  to  the  left. 
The  remaining  companies  take  their  posts  on  the  left 
and  right  in  succession,  and  when  the  formation  is  com- 
plete, the  adjutant  commands,  Guides  post ;  at  this  com- 
mand the  guides  on  the  line  retire  to  their  places  by 
passing  through  the  intervals  between  the  companies,  and 
those  captains  who  are  on  the  left  of  their  companies 
shift  to  the  right. 


DRESS    PARADE. 

There  shall  be  daily  one  dress  parade,  at  troop  or  re- 
treat, as  the  commanding  officer  may  direct. 

A  signal  will  be  beat  or  sounded  half  an  hour  before 
troop  or  retreat,  for  the  music  to  assemble  on  the  regi- 
mental parade,  and  each  company  to  turn  out  under  arms 
on  its  own  parade,  for  roll-call  and  inspection  by  its  officers. 

Ten  minutes  after  that  signal,  the  adjutant's  call  will 
be  given,  when  the  captains  will  march  their  companies 
(the  band  playing)  to  the  regimental  parade,  where  they 
take  their  positions  in  line  as  directed.  When  the  line  is 
formed,  the  captain  of  the  first  company,  on  notice  from 
the  adjutant,  steps  one  pace  to  the  front,  and  gives  to  his 
company  the  command,  Order  arms  ;  parade  ;  rest ;  which 
is  repeated  by  each  captain  in  succession  to  the  left.  The 
adjutant  takes  post  two  paces  on  the  right  of  the  line ;  the 
sergeant-major  two  paces  on  the  left.  The  music  will 
be  formed  in  two  ranks  on  the  right  of  the  adjutant.  The 
senior  officer  present  will  take  the  command  of  the  parade, 
and  will  take  post  at  a  suitable  distance  in  front,  opposite 
the  centre,  facing  the  line. 

"When  the  companies  have  ordered  arms,  the  adjutant 
will  order  the  music  to  beat  off,  when  it  will  commence 


42  THE   REGIMENT. 

on  the  right,  beat  in  front  of  the  line  to  the  left,  and  back 
to  its  place  on  the  right. 

When  the  music  has  ceased,  the  adjutant  will  step 
two  paces  to  the  front,  face  to  the  left,  and  command : 

1.  Attention.  2.  Battalion.  3.  Shoulder — ARMS.  4. 
Prepare  to  open  ranks.  5.  To  the  rear  open  order. 
6.  MARCH. 

At  the  sixth  command,  the  ranks  will  be  opened  ac- 
cording to  the  system  laid  down  in  the  Infantry  Tactics, 
the  commissioned  officers  marching  to  the  front,  the  com- 
pany officers  four  paces,  field  officers  six  paces,  opposite 
to  their  positions  in  the  order  of  battle,  where  they  will 
halt  and  dress.  The  adjutant,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned, 
will  command : 

FRONT. 

and  march  along  the  front  to  the  centre,  face  to  the  right, 
and  pass  the  line  of  company  officers  eight  or  ten  paces, 
when  he  will  come  to  the  right-about,  and  command  : 

Present — ARMS  ; 

when  arms  will  be  presented,  officers  saluting. 

Seeing  this  executed,  he  will  face  about  to  the  com- 
manding officer,  salute,  and  report,  "  Sir,  the  parade  is 
formed"  The  adjutant  will  then,  on  intimation  to  that 
effect,  take  his  station  three  paces  on  the  left  of  the  com- 
manding officer,  one  pace  retired,  passing  round  his  rear. 

The  commanding  officer,  having  acknowledged  the 
salute  of  the  line  by  touching  his  hat,  will,  after  the  adju- 
tant has  taken  his  post,  draw  his  sword,  and  command : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Shoulder — ARMS; 

and  add  such  exercises  as  he  may  think  proper,  concluding 
with: 

Order — ARMS  ; 


THE   KEGIMKNT.  43 

then  return  his  sword,  and  direct  the  adjutant  to  receive 
the  reports.  The  adjutant  will  now  pass  round  the  right 
of  the  commanding  officer,  advance  upon  the  line,  halt 
midway  between  him  and  the  line  of  company  officers, 
and  command : 

1.  First  Sergeants ',  to  the  front  and  centre.     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  they  will  shoulder  arms  as  ser- 
geants, march  two  paces  to  the  front,  and  face  inward. 
At  the  second  command,  they  will  march  to  the  centre, 
and  halt.  The  adjutant  will  then  order  : 

1.  Front — FACE.     2.  Report. 

At  the  last  word,  each  in  succession,  beginning  on  the 
right,  will  salute  by  bringing  the  left  hand  smartly  across 
the  breast  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  report  the  result  of 
the  roll-call  previously  made  on  the  company  parade. 
The  adjutant  again  commands : 

1.  First  Sergeants,  outward — FACE.    2.  To  your  posts — 
MARCH  ; 

when  they  will  resume  their  places,  and  order  arms.  The 
adjutant  will  now  face  to  the  commanding  officer,  salute, 
report  absent  officers,  and  give  the  result  of  the  first  ser- 
geants' reports.  The  commanding  officer  will  next  direct 
the  orders  to  be  read,  when  the  adjutant  will  face  about, 
and  announce : 

Attention  to  Orders. 

He  will  then  read  the  orders. 

The  orders  having  been  read,  the  adjutant  will  face  to 
the  commanding  officer,  salute  and  report ;  when,  on  an 
intimation  from  the  commander,  he  will  face  again  to  the 
line,  and  announce : 

Parade  is  Dismissed. 


4A  THE   KEGIMENT. 

All  the  officers  will  now  return  their  swords,  face  in- 
wards, and  close  on  the  adjutant,  he  having  taken  position 
in  their  line,  the  field  officers  on  the  flanks.  The  adjutant 
commands : 

1.  front — FACE.     2.  Forward — MARCH; 

when  they  will  march  forward,  dressing  on  the  centre, 
the  music  playing,  and  when  within  six  paces  of  the  com- 
mander, the  adjutant  will  give  the  word  : 

HALT. 

The  officers  will  then  salute  the  commanding  officer 
by  raising  the  hand  to  the  cap,  and  there  remain  until  he 
shall  have  communicated  to  them  such  instructions  as  he 
may  have  to  give,  or  intimates  that  the  ceremony  is  fin- 
ished. As  the  officers  disperse,  the  first  sergeants  will 
close  the  ranks  of  their  respective  companies,  and  march 
them  to  the  company  parades,  where  they  will  be  dis- 
missed, the  band  continuing  to  play  until  the  companies 
clear  the  regimental  parade. 

All  field  and  company  officers  and  men  will  be  pres- 
ent at  dress  parades,  unless  especially  excused,  or  on 
some  duty  incompatible  with  such  attendance. 

A  dress  parade  once  a  day  will  not  be  dispensed  with, 
except  on  extraordinary  and  urgent  occasions. 


THE    BATTALION   IN    COLUMN. 

For  the  march,  in  many  of  the  manoeuvres,  etc.,  the 
battalion  is  in  column.  The  column  may  be  one  of  com- 
panies or  of  divisions,  in  rare  instances  it  is  one  of  pla- 
toons. It  may  be  a  column  right  in  front,  in  which  case 
the  first  company,  or  division,  is  in  front,  all  the  others 
being  behind  it  in  regular  succession ;  or  it  may  be  a 


THE   REGIMENT.  45 

column  left  in  front,  in  which  the  last  company  or  di- 
vision leads,  the  others  following  in  the  inverse  order  of 
their  numbers. 

When  the  right  is  in  front,  the  guides  of  the  column 
are  habitually  to  the  left,  and  to  the  right  when  the  col- 
umn is  left  in  front. 

The  column  may  be  one  at  full  distance,  at  half  dis- 
tance, or  closed  in  mass  ;  in  the  first  case,  the  distance 
between  the  guides  of  any  two  consecutive  companies  or 
divisions  ;  in  the  second  case,  it  is  one-half  the  width  of 
the  company  or  division ;  and  in  the  last  case,  that  of 
the  column  closed  in  mass,  the  distance  between  the 
guides  is  six  paces. 


POSTS  OF  THE  OFFICERS  WHEN  THE  BATTALION  IS  IN  COLUMN. 

The  colonel  is  on  the  directing  flank,  fifteen  or  twenty 
paces  from  the  guides,  and  abreast  the  centre  of  his  bat- 
talion ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  is  on  the  directing  flank, 
abreast  with  the  leading  company  or  division,  and  six 
paces  from  the  guide  ;  the  majors  are  on  the  same  flank, 
the  senior  abreast  with  the  rearmost  company  or  division, 
and  six  paces  from  the  guide,  the  junior  in  a  correspond- 
ing position  abreast  the  centre  company  ;  the  adjutant  is 
near  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and  the  sergeant-major  near 
the  senior  major. 

In  a  column  of  companies,  the  captains  are  two  paces 
in  front  of  the  centres  of  their  companies  ;  the  right  guide 
of  each  company  is  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  the  left 
guide  in  a  corresponding  position  on  the  left;  the  lieuten- 
ants, and  remaining  sergeants,  are  in  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

In  a  column  of  divisions,  the  senior  captain  of  each 
division  is  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division, 
the  junior  captain  in  the  interval  between  the  two  com- 


46  THE   REGIMENT. 

panies ;  the  right  guide  of  the  right  company  is  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  division,  the  left  guide  of 
the  left  company  is  in  a  corresponding  position  on  the 
left ;  the  right  guide  of  the  left  company  is  in  the  rear 
rank,  behind  the  junior  captain,  and  the  left  guide  of  the 
right  company  is  in  the  rank  of  the  file-closers. 

Two  or  more  regiments  serving  together  constitute  a 
brigade,  under  the  command  of  a  brigadier-general. 

Two  or  more  brigades  serving  together  constitute  a 
division,  commanded  by  a  major-general. 

Two  divisions  serving  together  constitute  an  army 
corps. 

The  army  corps,  when  supplied  with  a  due  proportion 
of  cavalry,  artillery,  etc.,  comprises  within  itself  all  the 
elements  of  a  complete  army,  ready  for  any  emergency. 

The  interval  between  two  contiguous  regiments  in  the 
same  brigade,  division,  or  army  corps,  is  twenty-two  paces. 

As  often  as  one  or  more  brigades  or  divisions,  united 
in  the  same  line,  manoeuvre  together,  each  battalion  will 
be  designated  by  its  number,  according  to  its  position  in 
the  line.  The  battalion  on  the  right  of  the  whole  is  de- 
nominated ^rs/,  that  next  on  its  left  second,  the  following 
one  third,  and  so  on  to  the  battalion  that  closes  the  left  of 
the  line. 

In  line  of  battle,  the  general  (the  senior  major-general 
present)  has  no  fixed  position  ;  he  goes  whithersoever  he 
may  judge  his  presence  necessary. 

In  column,  he  will  hold  himself  habitually  at  its  head, 
in  order  to  direct  it  according  to  his  views.  In  the  evo- 
lutions, he  will  place  himself  at  the  point  whence  he  can 
best  direct  the  general  execution  of  the  movement. 

In  line  of  battle,  generals  of  division  place  themselves 
at  about  seventy  paces  in  rear  of  the  centres  of  their  di- 
visions. 


THE  REGIMENT.  4T 

In  column,  they  hold  themselves  on  the  directing  flank, 
abreast  with  the  centres  of  their  divisions,  and  at  thirty 
or  forty  paces  from  the  guides. 

In  line  of  battle,  generals  of  brigade  place  themselves 
at  about  forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  brigades. 

In  column,  they  hold  themselves  at  fifteen  or  twenty 
paces  outsidi  the  guides,  and  abreast  with  the  centre  of 
their  brigades. 


n 

r- 


CHAPTER  V, 

THE    MARCH. 

THE  army  corps  drilled  and  organized  on  the  princi- 
ples thus  far  laid  down,  is  in  the  condition  for  active  ser- 
vice, beginning  with  the  march. 

A  badly  conducted  march  is  more  injurious  to  the 
health  and  morale  of  troops,  than  any  other  error  that 
can  be  committed  in  the  progress  of  a  campaign.  If  a 
table  of  medical  statistics  could  be  formed  from  the  his- 
tory of  various  military  campaigns,  in  which  the  casualties 
incident  to  a  march  were  divided  from  those  actually  oc- 
curring in  engagements,  it  would  be  found  that  a  large 
proportion  were  due  to  causes  which  might  have  been 
easily  prevented  by  the  judicious  management  of  the 
troops  on  a  march.  Military  commanders  have  given 
to  this  subject  too  little  reflection.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  the  efficiency  of  French  troops  displayed  throughout 
every  campaign,  which  illuminates  the  history  of  that  na- 
tion of  soldiers,  has  been  due  in  a  great  measure  to  their 
capacity  for  maintaining  a  good  physical  condition.  It  is 
wisdom,  therefore,  to  profit  by  their  example. 

The  commander  of  an  expedition  or  of  troops  on  a 
march,  should  ascertain  previous  to  moving  his  force, 

1st.  The  exact  quantity  and  quality  of  the  provisions 
in  the  hands  of  the  commissary. 


THE   MAKCH.  49 

2d.  The  exact  character  and  means  of  transportation. 

3d.  The  exact  quality  and  quantity  of  reserved  cloth- 
ing. 

4th.  The  amount  of  reserved  ammunition  of  all  kinds. 

5th.  The  character  of  the  transportation  for  the  sick, 
and  the  quantity  of  hospital  stores  and  medicines. 

Should  any  of  these  be  deficient,  he  should  at  once 
take  means  to  provide  for  the  deficiency  in  some  way — at 
the  expense  of  a  positive  delay  if  necessary  ;  recklessness 
in  this  respect  is  inexcusable,  and  a  good  commander  will 
never  be  guilty  of  it. 

Besides  the  responsibility  of  the  commanding  officer 
in  this  respect,  a  great  deal  depends  upon  the  officers  in 
immediate  command  of  regiments  and  companies.  The 
personal  habits  of  the  men  should  be  carefully  studied,  in 
order  that  carelessness  or  recklessness  in  regard  to  diet, 
clothing,  or  unnecessary  exposure  to  the  climate  should 
be  checked  at  once. 

All  of  the  preliminary  arrangements  for  the  march 
having  been  carefully  made,  the  "  order  of  march "  is 
communicated  to  the  several  commanding  officers  of  di- 
visions, brigades  and  regiments  ;  but  should  not  be  pub- 
lished in  orders.  The  troops  are  distributed  according  to 
the  character  of  the  country.  In  a  very  open  country,  a 
large  proportion  of  the  cavalry  would  be  at  the  head  of 
the  column ;  but  generally  it  is  distributed  throughout 
the  line.  The  artillery  should  be  in  rear  of  the  first  foot 
regiment.  An  advance  and  rear  guard  of  mounted  troops ; 
one  or  two  companies  should  be  detailed  each  day,  and 
the  regiment  that  has  the  right  of  the  line  one  day,  should 
be  the  next  day  in  the  rear. 

If  the  nature  of  the  country  will  admit  of  it,  more  es- 
pecially in  passing  defiles  or  mountain  gorges,  a  few  de- 
tachments of  flankers  should  be  thrown  out  on  the  right 
3 


50  THE   MABCH. 

and  left  of  the  column  at  the  distance  of  one  or  two  hun- 
dred paces,  to  prevent  ambuscades  and  to  keep,  a  sharp 
lookout,  to  give  timely  notice  of  any  signs  of  the  enemy. 

The  column  having  been  formed  at  half  or  quarter 
distance,  and  the  baggage  train  assembled  in  the  rear, 
properly  protected  by  a  baggage  guard  selected  from  each 
regiment  for  its  own  baggage ;  the  column  is  put  in  mo- 
tion, and  the  march  commences  with  precisely  the  same 
regularity  as  would  be  observed  by  a  regiment  or  regi- 
ments moving  in  or  out  of  a  garrison  town ;  the  bands 
playing,  the  light-infantry  with  arms  sloped,  and  those  of 
the  riflemen  slung  over  the  shoulder,  the  officers  with 
swords  drawn,  and  exact  wheeling  distances  of  the  sec- 
tions preserved,  and  perfect  silence  observed. 

After  having  proceeded  a  short  distance  in  this  man- 
ner, the  word  of  command,  "  route  step,"  is  given  by  the 
general  at  the  head  of  the  leading  battalion,  and  this  is 
passed  quickly  on  to  the  rear  from  company  to  company. 
The  captains,  instead  of  continuing  at  the  head  of  their 
companies,  drop  back  to  the  rear  of  them  :  the  reasons 
for  allotting  this  station  to  them  is,  that  they  may  see  any 
men  of  their  respective  companies  who  attempt  to  leave 
the  ranks  without  leave.  The  officers  and  non-commis- 
sioned officers  preserve  the  wheeling  distance.  The  sol- 
diers now  carry  their  arms  in  any  manner  most  conven- 
ient. Some  sling  them  over  their  shoulder,  (most  of 
them,  indeed,  prefer  this  mode  as  the  least  fatiguing,) 
others  slope  them,  and  many  trail  them,  and  they  con- 
stantly change  from  the  right  hand  or  right  shoulder  to 
the  left.  Although  allowed  to  prosecute  the  march  in 
this  easy  and  unrestrained  manner,  a  heavy  penalty, 
nevertheless,  awaits  the  man  who  quits  the  ranks  without 
permission  from  the  captain  or  officer  commanding  his 
company.  The  captains  are  always  provided  with  tickets 


THE  MAECII.  51 

bearing  their  own  signature ;  on  each  is  written,  "  The 
bearer  has  my  permission  to  fall  out  of  the  ranks,  being 
unable  to  proceed  with  the  regiment."  Any  soldier  found 
on  the  line  of  march  by  the  rearguard,  without  a  ticket, 
is  liable  to  be  punished  for  disobedience  of  orders ;  and 
as  no  difficulty  is  ever  experienced  by  men  who  are  sick, 
or  used  up,  in  procuring  this  certificate  of  inability  to 
keep  up  with  their  regiments,  such  offenders  certainly 
merit  punishment. 

If  a  soldier  wants  to  fall  out  of  the  ranks  for  a  few 
minutes  only,  he  is  required  to  ask  leave  of  the  captain 
to  do  so,  and,  moreover,  to  take  off  his  knapsack,  and  to 
give  it,  together  with  his  musket,  in  charge  of  the  men 
of  his  own  section,  to  be  carried  by  them  until  he  rejoins 
them.  This  is  an  admirable  order,  and  it  operates  in  two 
ways  :  first,  the  soldier  is  enabled,  not  being  encumbered 
with  either  knapsack  or  musket,  more  speedily  to  over- 
take the  column  on  its  march  ;  and  secondly,  if  he  loiters 
unnecessarily  on  the  way  to  rejoin  his  comrades,  who  are 
doubly  armed  with  his  arms  and  pack,  he  will  be  certain 
to  incur  their  displeasure. 

About  once  in  every  hour  and  a  quarter  or  half,  a  halt 
is  ordered,  and  ten  or  twelve  minutes  allowed  for  the 
men  to  rest.  When  practicable,  this  is  done  on  ground 
near  which  there  is  water ;  but  it  is  almost  unnecessary 
to  add,  that  very  frequently  it  is  not  possible  to  find 
such  favorable  spots. 

Preparatory  to  these  temporary  halts,  the  word  of 
command,  "  Attention  !  "  is  given  at  the  head  of  the  lead- 
ing regiment,  and  passes  on  rapidly  (as  already  stated) 
from  company  to  company.  Upon  thisr  the  captains 
move  quickly  from  the  rear  of  their  companies  to  the 
front ;  the  arms  of  the  soldiers  are  regularly  shouldered 
or  slung ;  perfect  silence  is  observed  ;  the  dressing  and 


52  THE   MAKCH. 

the  wheeling  distances  of  the  sections  are  correctly  kept ; 
and  in  an  instant  there  is  a  magical  change  from  apparent 
irregularity  to  most  perfect  discipline  and  order. 

On  resuming  the  march  after  these  halts,  the  troops 
observe  the  same  extreme  regularity  during  the  first  hun- 
dred or  two  of  yards.  The  words  "  route  step  "  being 
again  given,  they  may  carry  their  arms  in  any  manner. 

On  approaching  rivulets  or  shallow  pieces  of  water, 
which  it  is  necessary  should  be  passed,  neither  officers  nor 
soldiers  are  allowed  to  pick  their  way  througn,  nor  is  the 
smallest  break  or  irregularity  permitted  to  exist  in  the 
ranks ;  but  the  column  marches  through  by  half-sections, 
sections,  or  subdivisions,  (according  to  the  width  of  the 
ford,)  preserving  the  same  order  as  if  moving  along  a 
road. 

That  this  regulation  is,  on  some  occasions,  too  rigidly 
enforced,  has  never  been  disputed ;  still,  the  object  at 
which  it  aims,  viz.,  that  of  expending  as  little  time  as 
possible  on  each  day's  march,  so  as  to  give  the  soldiers 
time  to  take  their  rest,  pitch  their  tents  or  construct  huts 
in  the  bivouac,  to  draw  their  rations,  and  to  cook  their 
meals,  that  they  may  be  fresh  for  whatever  fatigues  hap- 
pen to  be  in  store  for  them,  is  indisputably  a  most  de- 
sirable one. 

Those  who  have  campaigned  know,  that  in  advancing 
to  attack  an  enemy,  or  in  retiring  before  one,  the  passage 
of  rivers  in  the  line  of  march,  even  if  so  deep  as  to  reach 
their  middles,  and  under  the  fire  of  an  enemy  also,  are 
expected  to  be  crossed  by  the  troops  without  a  greater 
derangement  taking  place  in  their  order  of  march  than  the 
obstacles  which  they  are  in  the  act  of  encountering,  must 
necessarily  produce  in  a  greater  or  less  degree. 

With  a  detachment  consisting  of  a  few  hundred  men, 
at  a  distance  from  an  enemy,  and  with  ample  time  before 


THE   MAKCH.  53 

them  to  get  over  their  day's  march,  it  will  appear  that 
this  order  may  well  be  dispensed  with ;  but  with  a  divi- 
sion of  four  or  five  thousand  men,  the  case  is  widely  dif- 
ferent. 

Let  it  be  supposed  that  it  has  arrived  at  a  stream 
which  admits  of  being  passed  by  sections,  subdivisions, 
or  even  by  companies ;  and  that,  instead  of  proceeding 
straight  through  it  in  this  manner,  every  soldier  is  per- 
mitted to  pick  his  way  across  in  any  manner  he  may  think 
proper,  and  to  break  off  from  his  place  in  the  ranks,  what 
a  vast  loss  of  time  this  will  occasion  !  When  would  the 
rear  of  the  column  have  effected  its  passage  ?  Surely  the 
patience  of  those  belonging  to  the  front,  centre,  and  rear 
of  this  body  of  four  thousand  soldiers,  will  be  pretty  well 
exhausted  long  before  the  opposite  bank  is  gained  by  the 
whole,  and  the  march  resumed. 

In  rugged  and  mountainous  districts  which  armies 
so  frequently  traverse,  they  encounter  various  defiles  and 
other  obstacles,  which  preclude  the  possibility  of  their 
being  passed  except  by  a  very  small  number  of  men  at  a 
time ;  and  the  following  mode  is  therefore  adopted  by 
each  company  in  making  its  way  along :  The  first  com- 
pany of  the  leading  battalion,  as  soon  as  it  has  disentan- 
gled itself  from  the  defile,  or  broken  ground,  is  directed 
to  march  forward,  perhaps  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile ; 
there  to  stack  arms,  and  the  men  to  rest.  The  head  of  the 
next  company,  when  it  has  cleared  the  defile,  halts  about 
thirty  or  forty  yards  on  the  other  side,  until  all  the  men 
belonging  to  it  come  up  in  succession.  This  done,  the 
captain  moves  it  forward  independently  until  it  joins  the 
leading  company,  where  it  stacks  arms.  Thus  each  com- 
pany, as  soon  as  it  has  cleared  the  obstacles,  is  brought 
up  en  masse,  and  at  a  regular  pace,  without  reference  to 
those  in  its  rear.  By  these  means,  that  most  unmilitary 


54:  THE    MA-ROW, 

exhibition  of  file  after  file  running  on,  like  a  string  of  wild 
geese,  to  catch  those  in  their  front,  is  entirely  avoided. 

Few  things  tend  so  effectually  to  fatigue  and  irritate 
soldiers  who  are  already  jaded,  as  that  of  trotting  on, 
bending  under  the  weight  of  knapsack,  belts,  and  musket, 
to  overtake  those  who  continue  to  march  on  in  their  front. 

When  the  division  is  about  to  perform  a  march  not  in 
the  immediate  vicinity  of  an  enemy,  the  following  ar- 
rangements are  made  either  for  bivouacking  or  quarter- 
ing it,  (as  the  case  may  be,)  so  that  no  time  shall  be  lost 
after  it  has  reached  its  destination  : 

A  staff-officer,  accompanied  by  the  quartermaster  of 
the  division,  or  (if  other  duties  at  that  moment  are  re- 
quired to  be  performed  by  the  quartermaster)  by  a  sub- 
altern of  each  regiment,  precede  the  troops  on  horseback, 
so  as  to  arrive  long  before  them  at  the  ground  on  which 
they  are  to  halt  for  the  day,  or  at  the  town  or  village  in 
which  it  is  intended  they  shall  be  quartered. 

A  whole  street,  or  part  of  one,  (as  circumstances  ad- 
mit,) is  allotted  by  the  staff-officer  to  the  quartermasters 
for  each  of  their  regiments,  who  immediately  divide  the 
street  into  equal  portions  for  the  different  companies,  re- 
serving a  house  or  two  for  the  staff  of  the  regiment. 

A  sergeant  of  every  company  of  the  division  being 
sent  forward  so  as  to  arrive  long  before  the  troops,  and 
being  told  by  his  quartermaster  how  many  and  what 
buildings  are  set  apart  for  his  own  company,  again  sub- 
divides the  houses  into  four  equal  parts  for  each  of  the 
sections. 

In  the  event  of  any  noise  or  disturbance  taking  place, 
whether  by  day  or  by  night,  the  probabilities  are,  that 
the  officers  belonging  to  the  companies  where  such  irregu- 
larities are  going  on,  will  certainly  hear  it,  and  as  instan- 
taneously put  an  end  to  it. 


THE   MAKCH.  55 

If,  then,  the  division  marches  into  a  town,  each  com- 
pany is  by  its  sergeant  conducted  to  the  houses  allotted 
to  it ;  in  which  they  are  established  in  a  very  few  min- 
utes. It  rarely  happens,  therefore,  that  the  soldiers  are 
kept  waiting  in  the  streets  for  any  length  of  time,  as  has 
too  often  been  the  case. 

Should  it,  on  the  other  hand,  be  intended  to  encamp 
the  division,  instead  of  putting  it  into  houses,  arrange- 
ments of  a  similar  nature  are  adopted,  by  sending  forward 
officers  and  sergeants  to  take  up  the  ground ;  by  which 
means  each  company  marches  at  once  up  to  its  own  ser- 
geant, on  whom  they  form  in  open  column. 

The  rolls  are  immediately  called ;  the  men  first  for 
duty  are  warned  for  guards,  (also  inlying  and  outlying 
pickets,  if  near  the  enemy,)  for  fatigue  duties  to  draw  the 
rations,  to  procure  wood  for  cooking  if  none  is  near  at 
hand,  to  go  for  water  if  no  river  flows  near  the  encamp- 
ment, etc.,  etc. 

This  done,  and  the  alarm-post,  or  place  of  general  as- 
sembly, having  been  pointed  out  to  every  one,  the  men 
are  dismissed  ;  the  arms  stacked,  the  cooking  immediately 
commences,  and  all  further  parades  are  dispensed  with  for 
the  day,  except  a  roll-call  about  sunset. 

Parties  to  procure  forage,  whether  green  or  dry,  are 
sent  out  in  charge  of  an  officer  as  soon  as  the  troops  are 
dismissed. 

Amongst  the  various  regulations  laid  down  for  the 
light-division,  what  are  termed  mule-guards  must  not  be 
omitted. 

A  corporal  and  three  privates  of  every  company, 
mount  guard  at  nightfall,  whenever  the  division  is  en- 
camped. The  particular  duty  expected  from  the  sentinels 
of  these  company  guards,  is  to  keep  an  eye  to  the  baggage 
animals  belonging  to  their  officers,  (which  are  picketed 


56  THE   MARCH. 

to  the  trees  or  fastened  in  some  manner,)  and  to  prevent 
them  from  breaking  loose. 

After  the  establishment  of  these  little  guards,  but  few 
instances  will  occur  of  whole  troops  of  noisy  mules, 
horses,  and  asses,  chasing  each  other  round  and  through 
the  camp  or  bivouac,  and  galloping  over  the  faces  and 
bodies  of  the  soldiers  whilst  they  are  asleep. 

Independent  of  their  utility  in  this  way,  every  com- 
pany in  the  division,  having  its  own.  sentinel,  is  sure  to 
be  instantly  apprised  of  any  alarm  during  the  night  from 
the  pickets  in  front ;  and  they  are  enabled,  also,  to  com- 
municate to  their  respective  companies,  without  the  least 
delay,  any  orders  arriving  at  the  camp. 

Those  only  who  have  witnessed  it,  can  thoroughly 
understand  with  what  uncommon  facility  and  despatch 
the  division  can  suddenly  get  under  arms,  form  in  column 
of  march,  load  the  baggage,  and  proceed  on  the  route 
marked  out  for  it. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE     CAMP. 

CAMP  is  the  place  where  the  troops  are  established  in 
tents,  in  huts,  or  in  bivouac.  Cantonments  are  the  in- 
habited places  which  troops  occupy  for  shelter  when  not 
put  in  barracks.  The  camping  party  is  a  detachment  de- 
tailed to  prepare  a  camp. 

Reconnoissances  should  precede  the  establishment  of 
the  camp.  For  a  camp  of  troops  on  the  march,  it  is  only 
necessary  to  look  to  the  health  and  comfort  of  the  troops, 
the  facility  of  the  communications,  the  convenience  of 
wood  and  water,  and  the  resources  in  provisions  and 
forage.  The  ground  for  an  intrenched  camp,  or  a  camp 
to  cover  a  country,  or  one  designed  to  deceive  the  enemy 
as  to  the  strength  of  the  army,  must  be  selected,  and  the 
camp  arranged  for  the  object  in  view. 

The  camping-party  of  a  regiment  consists  of  the  regi- 
mental quartermaster  and  quartermaster-sergeant,  and  a 
corporal  and  two  men  per  company.  The  general  decides 
whether  the  regiments  camp  separately  or  together,  and 
whether  the  police  guard  shall  accompany  the  camping 
party,  or  a  larger  escort  shall  be  sent. 

The  ground  selected  for  an  encampment  either  on  the 
march  or  for  a  more  permanent  camp,  should  be  such  as 
will  enable,  as  near  as  possible,  the  following  order  to  be 


58  THE   CAMP. 

carried  out.     Of  course  circumstances  will  compel  a  vari- 
ation from  it  at  times  : 


CAMP    OF    INFANTRY. 

Each  company  has  its  tents  in  two  files,  facing  on  a 
street  perpendicular  to  the  color  line.  The  width  of  the 
street  depends  on  the  front  of  the  camp,  but  should  not 
be  less  than  five  paces.*  The  interval  between  the  ranks 
of  tents  is  two  paces  ;  between  the  files  of  tents  of  adja- 
cent companies,  two  paces ;  between  regiments,  twenty- 
two  paces. 

The  color  line  is  ten  paces  in  front  of  the  front  rank 
of  tents.  The  kitchens  are  twenty  paces  behind  the  rear 
rank  of  company  tents ;  the  non-commissioned  staff  and 
sutler,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  kitchens  ;  the  company 
officers,  twenty  paces  farther  in  rear ;  and  the  field  and 
staff,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  company  officers. 

The  company  officers  are  in  rear  of  their  respective 
companies  ;  the  captains  on  the  right. 

The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  are  near  the  centre 
of  the  line  of  field  and  staff;  the  adjutant,  a  major  and 
surgeon,  on  the  right;  the  quartermaster,  a  major  and 
assistant-surgeon,  on  the  left. 

The  police  guard  is  at  the  centre  of  the  line  of  the 
non-commissioned  staff,  the  tents  facing  to  the  front,  the 
stacks  of  arms  on  the  left. 

The  advanced  post  of  the  police  guard  is  about  two 
hundred  paces  in  front  of  the  color  line,  and  opposite  the 
centre  of  the  regiment,  or  on  the  best  ground  ;  the  pris- 
oners' tent  about  four  paces  in  rear.  In  a  regiment  of  the 
second  line,  the  advanced  post  of  the  police  guard  is  two 
hundred  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  its  field  and  staff. 

*  The  pace  is  thirty  inches,  or  two-and-a-half  feet. 


PLAN    OF    ENCAMPMENT 
IT  or     a     Regiment     of     Infantry, 


V\H^.. 


:j         Q    Q  El    El  E]  23  El    03  03    HI  CO  123  El  03  U    E3  E3    EH 

j        a    Ej  £311  D3Q1I  11   D  0   13  IHH  Hil  Hi  HH 

i  mm  mm  mm  mm  mm  mm  mm  mm  mm 

mm  mm  mm  mm  mm  mm  mm  mm  mm 


NON-COM" STAFF.  POLICE  GUARD.  SUTLER.     NON-COM?  STAFK 

m  xxn  u  m  m 

COMPANY    OFFICERS. 

m     mm     mm     mm    mm     mm    mm    mm     m  m    m  m 

AsTSuft"."    MA-I.  Q?M?       IT  COL.          COL.  AojT  MAJ.  SURK.H 


* 


4-00   PACES. 


THE   CAMP.  59 

The  horses  of  the  staff  officers  and  of  the  baggage  train 
are  twenty-five  paces  in  rear  of  the  tents  of  the  field  and 
staff;  the  wagons  are  packed  on  the  same  line,  and  the 
men  of  the  train  camped  near  them. 

The  sinks  of  the  men  are  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces 
in  front  of  the  color  line  ;  those  of  the  officers  one  hun- 
dred paces  in  rear  of  the  train.  Both  are  concealed  by 
bushes.  When  convenient,  the  sinks  of  the  men  may  be 
placed  in  rear  or  on  a  flank.  A  portion  of  the  earth  dug 
out  for  sinks  to  be  thrown  back  occasionally. 

The  front  of  the  camp  of  a  regiment  of  one  thousand 
men  in  two  ranks  will  be  four  hundred  paces,  or  one-fifth 
less  paces  than  the  number  of  files,  if  the  camp  is  to  have 
the  same  front  as  the  troops  in  order  of  battle.  But  the 
front  may  be  reduced  to  one  hundred  and  ninety  paces 
by  narrowing  the  company  streets  to  five  paces ;  and  if 
it  be  desirable  to  reduce  the  front  still  more,  the^tents  of 
companies  may  be  pitched  in  single  file,  those  of  a  division 
facing  on  the  same  street. 


CAMP    OF    CAVALRY. 

In  the  cavalry,  each  company  has  one  file  of  tents; 
the  tents  opening  on  the  street  facing  the  left  of  the  camp. 

The  horses  of  each  company  are  placed  in  a  single  file, 
facing  the  opening  of  the  tents,  and  are  fastened  to  pickets 
planted  firmly  in  the  ground,  from  three  to  six  paces  from 
the  tents  of  the  troops. 

The  interval  between  the  file  of  tents  should  be  such, 
that  the  regiment  being  broken  into  column  of  companies, 
each  company  should  be  on  the  column  extension  of  the 
line  on  which  the  horses  are  to  be  picketed. 

The  streets  separating  the  squadrons  are  wider  than 
those  between  the  companies  by  the  interval  separating 


60  THE   CAMP. 

squadrons  in  line ;  these  intervals  are  kept  free  from  any 
obstruction  throughout  the  camp. 

The  horses  of  the  rear  rank  are  placed  on  the  left  of 
those  of  their  file-leaders. 

The  horses  of  the  lieutenants  are  placed  on  the  right 
of  their  platoons ;  those  of  the  captains  on  the  right  of 
the  company. 

Each  horse  occupies  a  space  of  about  two  paces.  The 
number  of  horses  in  the  company  fixes  the  depth  of  the 
camp,  and  the  distance  between  the  files  of  tents ;  the 
forage  is  placed  between  the  tents. 

The  kitchens  are  twenty  paces  in  front  of  each  file  of 
tents. 

The  non-commissioned  officers  are  in  the  tents  of  the 
front  rank.  Camp  followers,  teamsters,  etc.,  are  in  the 
rear  rank.  The  police  guard  in  the  rear  rank,  near  the 
centre  of  the  regiment. 

The  fonts  of  the  lieutenants  are  thirty  paces  in  rear  of 
the  file  of  their  company ;  the  tents  of  the  captains  thirty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  lieutenants. 

The  colonel's  tent  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  captain's, 
near  the  centre  of  the  regiment ;  the  lieutenant-colonel 
on  his  right ;  the  adjutant  on  his  left ;  the  majors  on  the 
same  line,  opposite  the  second  company  on  the  right  and 
left ;  the  surgeon  on  the  left  of  the  adjutant.* 

The  field  and  staff  have  their  horses  on  the  left  of 
their  tents,  on  the  same  line  with  the  company  horses ; 
sick  horses  are  placed  in  one  line  on  the  right  or  left  of 
the  camp.  The  men  who  attend  them  have  a  separate 
file  of  tents  ;  the  forges  and  wagons  in  rear  of  this  file. 
The  horses  of  the  train  and  of  camp  followers  are  in  one 

*  When  there  is  but  one  major  to  a  regiment,  the  post  of  the  colonel  will 
be  in  the  centre  of  the  regiment,  on  the  line  of  the  field  and  staff;  and  that  of 
the  lieutenant-colonel  in  the  right  ^wintr,  in  place  of  the  senior  major. 


TJIE  CAMP.  61 

or  more  files  extending  to  the  rear,  behind  the  right  or 
left  squadron.  The  advanced  post  of  the  police  guard  is 
two  hundred  paces  in  front,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
regiment ;  the  horses  in  one  or  two  files. 

The  sinks  for  the  men  are  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces 
in  front,  those  for  officers  one  hundred  paces  in  rear  of 
the  camp. 

CAMP    OF   ARTILLERY. 

The  artillery  is  encamped  near  the  troops  to  which 
it  is  attached,  so  as  to  be  protected  from  attack,  and  to 
contribute  to  the  defence  of  the  camp.  Sentinels  for  the 
park  are  furnished  by  the  artillery,  and,  when  necessary, 
by  the  other  troops. 

For  a  battery  of  six  pieces  the  tents  are  in  three  files  : 
one  for  each  section  ;  distance  between  the  ranks  of  tents 
fifteen  paces ;  tents  opening  to  the  front.  The  horses  of 
each  section  are  picketed  in  one  file,  ten  paces  to  the  left 
of  the  file  of  tents.  In  the  horse  artillery,  or  if  the  num- 
ber of  horses  make  it  necessary,  the  horses  are  in  two 
files  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  file  of  tents.  The  kitchens 
are  twenty-five  paces  in  front  of  the  front  rank  of  tents. 
The  tents  of  the  officers  are  in  the  outside  files  of  com- 
pany tents,  twenty-five  paces  in  rear  of  the  rear  rank ; 
the  captain  on  the  right,  the  lieutenant  on  the  left. 

The  park  is  opposite  the  centre  of  the  camp,  forty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  officers'  tents. 


DUTIES   IN    CAMP    AND    GARRISON. 

The  duties  in  camp  and  garrison  are  to  be  conducted, 
as  far  as  practicable,  in  the  same  manner  and  on  the  same 
principles. 


62  THE   CAMP. 

The  Reveille  is  the  signal  for  the  men  to  rise,  and  the 
sentinel  to  leave  off  challenging. 

The  Troop  is  to  sound  or  beat  at  —  o'clock  in  the 
morning,  for  the  purpose  of  assembling  the  men  for  duty 
and  inspection  at  guard  mounting. 

The  Retreat  is  to  sound  or  beat  at  sunset,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  warning  the  officers  and  men  for  duty,  and  for 
reading  the  orders  of  the  day. 

The  Tattoo  is  to  be  beat  at  —  o'clock  in  the  evening, 
after  which  no  soldier  is  to  be  out  of  his  tent  or  quarters, 
unless  by  special  leave. 

Peas-upon-a-trencher,  the  signal  for  breakfast,  is  to 
sound  or  beat  at  —  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

Roast-beef,  the  signal  for  dinner,  is  to  sound  or  beat 
at  —  o'clock  ;  at  other  times  it  is  the  signal  to  draw  pro- 
visions. 

The  Surgeon's  call  is  to  sound  or  beat  at  —  o'clock, 
when  the  sick,  able  to  go  out,  will  be  conducted  to  the 
hospital  by  the  first  sergeants  of  companies,  who  will 
hand  to  the  surgeon  a  report  of  all  the  sick  in  the  com- 
pany other  than  in  hospital.  The  patients  who  cannot 
attend  at  the  dispensary  will  be  immediately  after,  if  not 
before,  visited  by  the  surgeon. 

The  General  is  to  beat,  only  when  the  whole  army  is 
to  march,  and  is  the  signal  to  strike  the  tents  and  prepare 
for  the  march. 

The  Assembly  is  the  signal  to  form  by  company. 

To  the  color  is  the  signal  to  form  by  battalion. 

The  March  is  for  the  whole  to  move. 

The  Long  roll  is  the  signal  for  getting  under  arms,  in 
case  of  alarm  or  the  sudden  approach  of  the  enemy. 

The  Parley  is  to  desire  a  conference  with  the  enemy. 


THE   CAMP.  63 


ROLL    CALLS. 

There  should  be  daily,  at  least  three  stated  roll  calls ; 
viz.,  at  reveille,  retreat,  and  tattoo.  They  will  be  made  on 
the  company  parades  by  the  first  sergeants,  superintended 
by  a  commissioned  officer  of  the  company.  The  captains 
should  report  the  absentees,  without  leave,  to  the  colonel  or 
commanding  officer. 

Immediately  after  reveille  roll  call,  (after  stable  duty 
in  the  cavalry,)  the  tents  or  quarters,  and  the  space 
around  them,  will  be  put  in  order  by  the  men  of  the 
companies,  superintended  by  the  chiefs  of  squads,  and  the 
guard  house  or  guard  tent  by  the  guard  or  prisoners. 

The  morning  reports  of  companies,  signed  by  the  cap- 
tains and  first  sergeants,  will  be  handed  to  the  adjutant 
before  eight  o'clock  in  the  morning,  and  will  be  consoli- 
dated by  the  adjutant  within  the  next  hour,  for  the  infor- 
mation of  the  colonel ;  and  if  the  consolidation  is  to  be 
sent  to  higher  authority,  it  will  be  signed  by  the  colonel 
and  the  adjutant. 


CHAPTER  VII.      , 

GUARDS    AND    GUARD-MOUNTING. 

ON  a  march  continued  from  day  to  day  the  ceremony 
of  guard-mounting  is  dispensed  with;  the  men  being 
notified  the  night  before  for  the  next  day's  guard ;  and 
the  guards  are  formed  immediately  after  the  army  is  in 
camp.  On  all  other  occasions  the  following  forms  are  ob- 
served : 

At  the  first  call  for  guard-mounting,  the  men  warned 
for  duty  turn  out  on  their  company  parades  for  inspec- 
tion by  the  first  sergeants ;  and,  at  the  second  call,  re- 
pair to  the  regimental  or  garrison  parade,  conducted  by 
the  first  sergeants.  Each  detachment,  as  it  arrives,  will, 
under  the  direction  of  the  adjutant,  take  post  on  the  left 
of  the  one  that  preceded  it,  in  open  order,  arms  shouldered 
and  bayonets  fixed  ;  the  supernumeraries  five  paces  in  the 
rear  of  the  men  of  their  respective  companies ;  the  first 
sergeants  in  rear  of  them.  The  sergeant-major  will 
dress  the  ranks,  count  the  files,  verify  the  details,  and 
when  the  guard  is  formed,  report  to  the  adjutant,  and 
take  two  paces  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank. 

The  adjutant  then  commands  Front ;  when  the  officer 
of  the  guard  takes  post  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  cen- 
tre ;  the  sergeants,  in  one  rank,  four  paces  in  the  rear  of 


GUARDS   AND   GUARD-MOUNTING.  65 

the  officers ;    and  the  corporals,  in  one  rank,  four  paces 
in  the  rear  of  the  sergeants,  all  facing  to  the  front.     The 
adjutant  then  assigns  their  places  in  the  guard. 
The  adjutant  will  then  command, 

1.  Officers  and  non-commissioned  2.  About — FACE. 

officers.  3.  Inspect  your  guards — MARCH. 

The  non-commissioned  officers  then  take  their  posts. 
The  commander  of  the  guard  then  commands  : 

1.   Order — ARMS.  2.  Inspection  of  ARMS  ; 

and  inspects  his  guard.  When  there  is  no  commissioned 
officer  on  the  guard,  the  adjutant  will  inspect  it.  During 
inspection  the  band  will  play. 

The  inspection  ended,  the  officer  of  the  guard  takes 
post  as  though  the  guard  were  a  company  of  a  battalion, 
in  open  order,  under  review  ;  at  the  same  time,  also,  the 
officers  of  the  day  will  take  post  in  front  of  the  centre  of 
the  guard ;  the  old  officer  of  the  day  three  paces  on  the 
right  of  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  one  pace  retired. 

The  adjutant  will  then  command, 

1.  Parade — BEST.          2.  Troop — Beat  Off  ; 

when  the  music,  beginning  on  the  right,  will  beat  down 
the  line  in  front  of  the  officer  of  the  guard  to  the  left,  and 
back  to  its  place  on  the  right,  where  it  will  cease  to  play. 
The  adjutant  then  commands, 

l.Attention.  2.  Shoulder — ARMS.  3.  Close  order — MARCH. 

At  the  word  "  Close  order,"  the  officer  will  face  about ; 
at  "  March,"  resume  his  post  in  line.  The  adjutant  then 
commands : 

Present — ARMS  ; 

at  which  he  will  face  to  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  salute, 
and  report,  "  Sir,  the  guard  is  formed"  The  new  officer 


66  GUAKDS    AND   GUARD-MOUNTING. 

of  the  day,  after  acknowledging  the  salute,  will  direct  the 
adjutant  to  march  the  guard  in  review,  or  by  flank,  to 
its  post.  But  if  the  adjutant  be  senior  to  the  officer  of 
the  day,  he  will  report  without  saluting  with  the  sword 
then,  or  when  marching  the  guard  in  review. 

In  review  the  guard  march  past  the  officer  of  the  day, 
according  to  the  order  of  review,  conducted  by  the  ad- 
jutant, marching  on  the  left  of  the  first  division;  the 
sergeant-major  on  the  left  of  the  last  division. 

When  the  column  has  passed  the  officer  of  the  day, 
the  officer  of  the  guard  marches  it  to  its  post,  the  adjutant 
and  sergeant-major  retiring.  The  music,  which  has 
wheeled  out  of  the  column,  and  taken  post  opposite  to 
the  officer  of  the  day,  will  cease,  and  the  old  officer  of  the 
day  salute,  and  give  the  old  or  standing  orders  to  the 
new  officer  of  the  day.  The  supernumeraries,  at  the  same 
time,  will  be  marched  by  the  first  sergeants  to  their  re- 
spective company  parades,  and  dismissed. 

In  bad  weather  or  at  night,  or  after  fatiguing  marches, 
the  ceremony  of  turning  off  may  be  dispensed  with,  but 
not  the  inspection. 

Grand  guards  and  other  brigade  guards  are  organized 
and  mounted  on  the  brigade  parade  by  the  staff  officers 
of  the  parade,  under  the  direction  of  the  field  officer  of 
the  day  of  the  brigade,  according  to  the  principles  here 
prescribed  for  the  police  guard  of  a  regiment.  The  de- 
tail of  each  regiment  is  assembled  on  the  regimental  pa- 
rade, verified  by  the  adjutant,  and  marched  to  the  brigade 
parade  by  the  senior  officer  of  the  detail.  After  inspec- 
tion and  review,  the  officer  of  the  day  directs  the  several 
guards  to  their  respective  posts. 

The  officer  of  the  old  guard,  having  his  guard  paraded, 
on  the  approach  of  the  new  guard,  commands  : 
Present — ARMS. 


GUARDS   AND   GUARD-MOUNTING.  67 

The  new  guard  will  march,  in  quick  time,  past  the 
old  guard,  at  shouldered  arms,  officers  saluting,  and  take 
post  four  paces  on  its  right,  where,  being  alligned  with 
it,  its  commander  will  order  : 

Present — ARMS. 

The  two  officers  will  then  approach  each  other  and 
salute.  They  will  then  return  to  their  respective  guards, 
and  command : 

1.  Shoulder — ARMS.          2.  Order — ARMS. 

The  officer  of  the  new  guard  will  now  direct  the  de- 
tail for  the  advanced  guard  to  be  formed  and  marched  to 
its  post,  the  list  of  the  guard  made  and  divided  into  three 
reliefs,  experienced  soldiers  placed  over  the  arms  of  the 
guard  and  at  the  remote  and  responsible  posts,  and  the 
young  soldiers  in  posts  near  the  guard  for  instruction  in 
their  duties,  and  will  himself  proceed  to  take  possession 
of  the  guard-house  or  guard-tent,  and  the  articles  and 
prisoners  in  charge  of  the  guard. 

During  the  time  of  relieving  the  sentinels  and  of  call- 
ing in  the  small  posts,  the  old  commander  will  give  to 
the  new  all  the  information  and  instruction  relating  to  his 
post. 

The  first  relief  having  been  designated  and  ordered 
two  paces  to  the  front,  the  corporal  of  the  new  guard  will 
take  charge  of  it,  and  go  to  relieve  the  sentinels,  accom- 
panied by  the  corporal  of  the  old  guard,  who  will  take 
command  of  the  old  sentinels,  when  the  whole  are  relieved. 

If  the  sentinels  are  numerous,  the  sergeants  are  to  be 
employed,  as  well  as  the  corporals,  in  relieving  them. 

The  relief,  with  arms  at  a  support,  in  two  ranks,  will 
march  by  a  flank,  conducted  by  the  corporal  on  the  side 
of  the  leading  front-rank  man  ;  and  the  men  will  be  num- 
bered alternately  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  the  man  on 


68  GUARDS   AND   GUARD-MOUNTING. 

the  right  of  the  front  rank  being  No.  1.  Should  an  of- 
ficer approach,  the  corporal  will  command  :  Carry  arms, 
and  resume  the  support  arms  when  the  officer  is  passed. 

The  sentinels  at  the  guard-house  or  guard-tent  will  be 
the  first  relieved  and  left  behind ;  the  others  are  relieved 
in  succession. 

When  the  sentinel  sees  the  relief  approaching,  he  will 
halt  and  face  to  it,  with  his  arms  at  a  shoulder.  At  six 
paces,  the  corporal  will  command  : 

1.  Relief.      2.  HALT; 

when  the  relief  will  halt  and  carry  arms.  The  corporal 
will  then  add,  «  No.  1,"  or  «  No.  2,"  or  «  No  3,"  accord- 
ing to  the  number  of  the  post : 

Arms — PORT. 

The  two  sentinels  will,  with  arms  at  port,  then  ap- 
proach each  other,  when  the  old  sentinel,  under  the  di- 
rection of  the  corporal,  will  whisper  the  instructions  to 
the  new  sentinel.  This  done,  the  two  sentinels  will  shoul- 
der arms,  and  the  old  sentinel  will  pass,  in  quick  time,  to 
his  place  in  rear  of  the  relief.  The  corporal  will  then 
command  : 

1.  Support — ARMS.      2.  Forward.     3.  MARCH  ; 

and  the  relief  proceeds  in  the  same  manner  until  the  whole 
are  relieved. 

The  detachments  and  sentinels  from  the  old  guard 
having  come  in,  it  will  be  marched,  at  shouldered  arms, 
along  the  front  of  the  new  guard,  in  quick  time,  the  new 
guard  standing  at  presented  arms ;  officers  saluting,  and 
the  music  of  both  guards  beating,  except  at  the  outposts. 

On  arriving  at  the  regimental  or  garrison  parade,  the 
commander  of  the  old  guard  will  send  the  detachments 
composing  it,  under  charge  of  the  non-commissioned 


GUARDS   AND   GUARD-MOUNTING.  69 

officers,  to  their  respective  regiments.  Before  the  men 
are  dismissed,  their  pieces  will  be  drawn  or  discharged  at 
a  target.  On  rejoining  their  companions,  the  chiefs  of 
squads  will  examine  the  arms,  etc.,  of  their  men,  and 
cause  the  whole  to  be  put  away  in  good  order. 

When  the  old  guard  has  marched  off  fifty  paces,  the 
officer  of  the  new  guard  will  order  his  men  to  stack  their 
arms,  or  place  them  in  the  arm-racks. 

The  commander  of  the  guard  will  then  make  himself 
acquainted  with  all  the  instructions  for  his  post,  visit  the 
sentinels,  and  question  them  and  the  non-commissioned 
officers  relative  to  the  instructions  they  may  have  received 
from  other  persons  of  the  old  guard. 

Sentinels  will  be  relieved  every  two  hours,  unless  the 
state  of  the  weather  or  other  causes  should  make  it  neces- 
sary or  proper  that  it  be  done  at  shorter  or  longer  in- 
tervals. 

Each  relief,  before  mounting,  is  inspected  by  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard  or  of  its  post.  The  corporal  reports 
to  him,  and  presents  the  old  relief  on  its  return. 

The  countersign  or  watchword  is  given  to  such  persons 
as  are  entitled  to  pass  during  the  night,  and  to  officers, 
non-commissioned  officers,  and  sentinels  of  the  guard. 
Interior  guards  receive  the  countersign  only  when  ordered 
by  the  commander  of  the  troops. 

The  parole  is  imparted  to  such  officers  only  as  have  a 
right  to  visit  the  guards  and  to  make  the  grand  rounds, 
and  to  officers  commanding  guards. 

As  soon  as  the  new  guard  has  been  marched  off,  the 
officer  of  the  day  will  repair  to  the  office  of  the  command- 
ing officer  and  report  for  orders. 

The  officer  of  the  day  must  see  that  the  officer  of  the 
guard  is  furnished  with  the  parole  and  countersign  before 
retreat. 


70  GUARDS   AND   GUAKD-MOUNTESfG. 

The  officer  of  the  day  visits  the  guards  during  the  day 
at  such  times  as  he  may  deem  necessary,  and  makes  his 
rounds  at  night,  at  least  once  after  twelve  o'clock. 

Upon  being  relieved,  the  officer  of  the  day  will  make 
such  remarks  in  the  report  of  the  officer  of  the  guard  as 
circumstances  require,  and  present  the  same  at  head- 
quarters. 

Commanders  of  guards  leaving  their  posts  to  visit 
their  sentinels,  or  on  other  duty,  are  to  mention  their  in- 
tention, and  the  probable  time  of  their  absence,  to  the 
next  in  command. 

The  officers  are  to  remain  constantly  at  their  guards, 
except  while  visiting  their  sentinels,  or  necessarily  engaged 
elsewhere  on  their  proper  duty. 

Neither  officers  nor  soldiers  are  to  take  off  their  cloth- 
ing or  accoutrements  while  they  are  on  guard. 

The  officer  of  the  guard  must  see  that  the  countersign 
is  duly  communicated  to  the  sentinels  a  little  before  twi- 
light. 

"When  a  fire  breaks  out,  or  any  alarm  is  raised  in  a 
garrison,  all  guards  are  to  bB  immediately  under  arms. 

Inexperienced  officers  are  put  on  guard  as  supernu- 
meraries, for  the  purpose  of  instruction. 

Sentinels  will  not  take  orders  or  allow  themselves  to 
be  relieved,  except  by  an  officer  or  non-commissioned 
officer  of  their  guard  or  party,  the  officer  of  the  day  or 
the  commanding  officer ;  in  which  case  the  orders  will  be 
immediately  communicated  to  the  commander  of  the 
guard  by  the  officer  giving  them. 

Sentinels  will  report  every  breach  of  orders  or  regula- 
tions they  are  instructed  to  enforce. 

Sentinels  must  keep  themselves  on  the  alert,  observing 
every  thing  that  takes  place  within  sight  and  hearing  of 
their  post.  They  will  carry  their  arms  habitually  at  sup- 


GUARDS   AND   GUARD-MOUNTING.  71 

port,  or  on  either  shoulder,  but  will  never  quit  them.  In 
wet  weather,  if  there  be  no  sentry-box,  they  will  secure 
arms. 

No  sentinel  shall  quit  his  post,  or  hold  conversation 
not  necessary  to  the  discharge  of  his  duty. 

All  persons,  of  whatever  rank  in  the  service,  are  re- 
quired to  observe  respect  toward  sentinels. 

In  case  of  disorder,  a  sentinel  must  call  out,  The 
Guard!  and  if  a  fire  takes  place,  he  must  cry  "  Fire  !  " 
adding  the  number  of  his  post.  If,  in  either  case,  the 
danger  be  great,  he  must  discharge  his  piece  before  call- 
ing out. 

It  is  the  duty  of  a  sentinel  to  repeat  all  calls  made 
from  posts  more  distant  from  the  main  body  of  the  guard 
than  his  own,  and  no  sentinel  will  be  posted  so  distant  as 
not  to  be  heard  by  the  guard,  either  directly  or  through 
other  sentinels. 

Sentinels  will  present  arms  to  general  and  field  officers, 
to  the  officer  of  the  day,  and  to  the  commanding  officer  of 
the  post.  To  all  other  officers  they  will  carry  arms. 

When  a  sentinel,  in  his  sentry-box,  sees  an  officer  ap- 
proaching, he  will  stand  at  attention,  and,  as  the  officer 
passes,  will  salute  him,  by  bringing  the  left  hand  briskly 
to  the  musket,  as  high  as  the  right  shoulder. 

The  sentinel,  at  any  post  of  the  guard,  when  he  sees 
any  body  of  troops,  or  an  officer  entitled  to  compliment, 
approach,  must  call, "  Turn  out  the  guard  !  "  and  announce 
who  approaches. 

Guards  do  not  turn  out,  as  a  matter  of  compliment, 
after  sunset ;  but  sentinels  will,  when  officers  in  uniform 
approach,  pay  them  proper  attention,  by  facing  to  the 
proper  front  and  standing  steady  at  shouldered  arms. 
This  will  be  observed  until  the  evening  is  so  far  advanced 
that  the  sentinels  begin  challenging. 


72  GUARDS   AND    GUARD-MOUNTING. 

After  retreat,  (or  the  hour  appointed  by  the  command- 
ing officer,)  until  broad  daylight,  a  sentinel  challenges 
every  person  who  approaches  him,  taking,  at  the  same 
time,  the  position  of  arms  port.  He  will  suffer  no  person 
to  come  nearer  than  within  reach  of  his  bayonet,  until  the 
person  has  given  the  countersign. 

A  sentinel,  in  challenging,  will  call  out,  "  Who  comes 
there ? "  If  answered,  " Friend,  with  the  countersign" 
and  he  be  instructed  to  pass  persons  with  the  countersign, 
he  will  reply,  "  Advance,  friend,  with  the  countersign." 
If  answered  " Friends"  he  will  reply,  " Halt,  friends ! 
Advance,  one,  with  the  countersign"  If  answered  " Re- 
lief," "  Patrol,"  or  "Grand,  rounds,"  he  will  reply,  "Halt ! 
Advance,  sergeant  (or  corporal),  with  the  countersign" 
and  satisfy  himself  that  the  party  is  what  it  represents  it- 
self to  be.  If  he  have  no  authority  to  pass  persons  with 
the  countersign,  if  the  wrong  countersign  be  given,  or  if 
the  persons  have  not  the  countersign,  he  will  cause  them 
to  stand,  and  call,  "Corporal  of  the  guard !  " 

In  the  daytime,  when  the  sentinel  before  the  guard 
sees  the  officer  of  the  day  approach,  he  will  call,  "Turn 
out  the  guard!  Officer  of  the  day!"  The  guard  will  be 
paraded,  and  salute  with  presented  arms. 

When  any  person  approaches  a  post  of  the  guard  at 
night,  the  sentinel  before  the  post,  after  challenging,  causes 
him  to  halt,  until  examined  by  a  non-commissioned  officer 
of  the  guard.  If  it  be  the  officer  of  the  day,  or  any  other 
officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard  and  to  make  the 
rounds,  the  non-commissioned  officer  will  call,  "Turn  out 
the  guard!"  when  the  guard  will  be  paraded  at  shoul- 
dered arms,  and  the  officer  of  the  guard,  if  he  thinks  neces- 
sary, may  demand  the  countersign  and  parole. 

The  officer  of  the  day,  wishing  to  make  the  rounds,  will 
take  an  escort  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  and  two  men. 


GUARDS   AND   GUARD-MOUNTING.  73 

When  the  rounds  are  challenged  by  a  sentinel,  the  ser- 
geant will  answer,  "  Grand  rounds ! "  and  the  sentinel 
will  reply,  "Halt,  grand  rounds!  Advance,  sergeant, 
with  the  countersign!"  Upon  which  the  sergeant  ad- 
vances and  gives  the  countersign.  The  sentinel  will  then 
cry,  "Advance,  rounds  !  "  and  stand  at  a  shoulder  till  they 
have  passed. 

When  the  sentinel  before  the  guard  challenges,  and  is 
answered,  "  Grand  rounds,"  he  will  reply,  "Halt,  grand 
rounds!  Turn  out  the  guard ;  grand  rounds  !",  Upon 
which  the  guard  will  be  drawn  up  at  shouldered  arms. 
The  officer  commanding  the  guard  will  then  order  a  ser- 
geant and  two  men  to  advance ;  when  within  ten  paces, 
the  sergeant  challenges.  The  sergeant  of  the  grand  rounds 
answers,  "Grand  rounds!"  The  sergeant  of  the  guard 
replies,  "Advance,  sergeant,  with  the  countersign  !  "  The 
sergeant  of  the  rounds  advances  alone,  gives  the  counter- 
sign, and  returns  to  his  round.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard 
calls  to  his  officer,  "The  countersign  is  right!  "  on  which 
the  officer  of  the  guard  calls,  "Advance,  rounds  !  "  The 
officer  of  the  rounds  then  advances  alone,  the  guard  stand- 
ing at  shouldered  arms.  The  officer  of  the  rounds  passes 
along  in  front  of  the  guard  to  the  officer,  who  keeps  his 
post  on  the  right,  and  gives  him  the  parole.  He  then  ex- 
amines the  guard,  orders  back  his  escort,  and,  taking  a 
new  one,  proceeds  in  the  same  manner  to  other  guards. 

All  material  instructions  given  to  a  sentinel  on  post, 
by  persons  entitled  to  make  grand  rounds,  ought  to 
be  promptly  communicated  to  the  commander  of  the 
guard. 

Any  general  officer,  or  the  commander  of  a  post  or 
garrison,  may  visit  the  guards  of  his  command,  and  go 
the  grand  rounds,  and  be  received  in  the  same  manner  as 
prescribed  for  the  officer  of  the  day. 
4 


74:  GUAKDS   AND   GUARD-MOUNTING. 


PICKET    GUARD. 

The  picket  guard  is  stationed  at  some  advantageous 
point  in  advance  of  the  main  body  for  the  purpose  of 
watching  the  enemy,  to  intercept  the  passage  of  couriers 
or  small  parties,  to  give  notice  of  the  approach  of  any 
considerable  force,  and  to  intercept  them,  if  possible,  by 
such  a  show  as  will  cause  sufficient  delay  to  enable  the 
fact  to  be  communicated  at  head-quarters.  The  strength 
of  a  picket  guard  depends  upon  the  position  they  are  sent 
to  occupy,  and  the  proximity  of  the  enemy.  The  point 
occupied  should  be  susceptible  of  some  defence.  The 
picket  should  be  relieved  every  day ;  if  not,  the  fact  should 
be  known  when  the  guard  is  posted. 

All  out  guards  stand  to  arms  at  night  on  the  approach 
of  patrols,  rounds,  or  other  parties  ;  the  sentinel  of  the 
arms  will  call  them  out. 

The  sentinels  and  videttes  are  placed  on  points  from 
which  they  can  see  furthest,  taking  care  not  to  break  their 
connection  with  each  other,  or  with  their  post.  They  are 
concealed  from  the  enemy  as  much  as  possible  by  walls 
or  trees  or  elevated  ground.  It  is  generally  of  more  ad- 
vantage not  to  be  seen  than  to  see  far.  A  sentinel  should 
always  be  ready  to  fire,  and  when  once  satisfied  of  the 
presence  of  an  enemy,  he  should  fire,  although  all  defence 
on  his  part  were  useless,  since  the  safety  of  the  post  may 
depend  upon  it. 

PRISONERS. 

The  prisoners  under  charge  of  a  guard  should  not  be 
allowed  to  hold  extended  communication  with  each  other 
or  with  the  men  on  guard.  They  should  be  forced  to 
maintain  the  utmost  decorum,  and  a  disturbance  of  any 


GUARDS   AND   GUARD-MOUNTING. 


75 


kind  should  be  checked  at  once  by  the  application  of  the 
most  efficient  means.  On  the  march  the  prisoners  are 
placed  in  charge  of  the  old  picket  guard  with  bayonets 
fixed  and  arms  loaded.  They  march  in  the  centre  of  the 
regiment.  On  reaching  camp,  they  are  turned  over  to 
the  new  guard  as  soon  as  posted. 


LIST  OF  PKISONEES. 

K 

a 

CJ 

-M 

c 

O 

Confined. 

No. 

Names. 

& 

•§ 

When. 

By 

Charges. 

Sentences. 

Remarks. 

6 

1 

whom. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

A.  B.  C., 

Lieutenant  1st  Regiment, 

Commanding  the  Guard. 


FORM  OF  GUARD  REPORT. 

Report  of  a  Guard  mounted  at  ,  on  the  ,  and  relieved 
on  the  . 

Parole. 

Lieutenants. 

Sergeants. 

Corporals. 

2 

3 

Privates. 

1 

1 

«? 

Articles  in 
Charge. 

Eec'd  the  forego- 
ing articles  : 

A  1> 

LUut.  lat 
JRegiment. 

Detail. 

76 


GUARDS   AND   GUARD-MOUNTING. 


Q 

3 

o 
3 

B 

0 

1 

,3 

2-d 

I! 

1   §   | 

°     *N      -^ 

b  g  ^ 

If' 

I 

i 

O 

w     la 
1 

£  3 

s 

o 

« 

•S  -S  -2 

00     C5     O 
rH 

Sergeant  W.  V.,  Co.  A.,  Regiment. 
Corporal  W-.  X,  Co.  B.,  « 
Corporal  Y.  Z.,  Co.  C.,  " 

0 

O 

6  te  M 

i 

fn"  P5  H 

0*  0s  02 

2D  RELIEF. 
From  to  and  to  . 

« 

T3    TJ    ^ 
CO    <M    10 

Q 

««,• 

O 

| 

HH    W"    J^ 

S     £ 

W        S 

M 

B    o 

I 

« 

IIS 

O 

^•d 

1 

rjj    ^    ^J 

0 

rH    <M    CO 

rH     <M     CO 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

RATIONS,  AND  MODE  OF  COOKING  THEM. 

THE  history  of  military  campaigns  develops  no  fact 
more  striking,  than  that  a  very  large  percentage  of  the 
casualties  are  those  of  diseases  incident  to  an  improper 
diet.  Especially  was  this  made  evident  in  the  Mexican 
War  among  the  volunteer  troops  :  called  suddenly  from 
the  pursuits  of  civil  life,  and  from  the  comforts  and  con- 
veniences of  home,  they  were  transferred  at  once  to  a  cli- 
mate, different  in  every  respect  to  that  in  which  they  had 
always  lived.  Exposed  to  every  change  of  weather,  from 
the  intense  heat  of  the  plains,  to  the  piercing  cold  of  the 
mountains ;  sleeping  constantly  in  the  open  air ;  they 
universally  exhibited  that  want  of  discretion  in  regard  to 
their  food,  the  manner  of  cooking  it,  and  time  of  eating 
it,  which  would  naturally  be  expected  from  men  who  had 
never  been  called  upon  to  give  the  slightest  thought  to 
the  subject. 

In  the  case  of  the  regular  troops,  it  was  considered  a 
part  of  the  duties  of  the  officers  in  immediate  command  to 
watch  the  soldiers  in  this  particular,  and  to  prevent  them 
from  eating  unripe  fruit  or  other  improper  food,  which 
they  procured  along  the  march.  This  surveillance  was 
found  to  be  the  more  necessary  during  the  temporary  oc- 


78  RATIONS,    AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM. 

cupation  of  towns,  as  it  was  there  so  very  easy  to  pro- 
cure something  to  eat  without  the  trouble  of  cooking  it. 
In  addition  to  all  this,  it  was  found  to  be  generally  the 
case  that  the  ration  was  badly  cooked  at  the  regular  mess, 
owing  to  a  want  of  knowledge  of  the  time  required  for 
the  different  articles  of  food  to  be  properly  cooked. 

The  Crimean  War  was  another  example  of  the  same 
fatal  error,  and  so  palpable  did  it  become,  that  the  War 
Department  of  Great  Britain  was  induced  to  send  out  to 
the  seat  of  war  competent  persons  to  instruct  the  troops 
in  the  manner  of  cooking  their  rations.  The  beneficial 
effects  of  this  step  were  at  once  exhibited  in  the  improved 
condition  of  the  health  of  the  army. 

With  a  view  to  obviate  a  large  portion  of  discomfort 
and  disease  in  this  particular,  a  number  of  receipts  have 
been  prepared : 

1st.  For  cooking  the  ration  as  issued  to  the  troops  ; 

2d.  For  cooking  such  food,  other  than  the  ration,  as 
may  be  obtained  in  the  field,  and 

3d.  For  hospital  diets  for  the  use  of  the  sick. 

The  regular  daily  ration  of  food  issued  to  the  troops 
in  the  United  States  service,  is  three-fourths  of  a  pound 
of  pork  or  bacon,  or  one  and  a  fourth  pounds  of  fresh  or 
salt  beef;  eighteen  ounces  of  bread  or  flour,  or  twelve 
ounces  of  hard  bread,  or  one  and  a  fourth  pounds  of  corn 
meal,  and  at  the  rate,  to  one  hundred  rations,  of  eight 
quarts  of  peas  or  beans,  or,  in  lieu  thereof,  ten  pounds  of 
rice ;  six  pounds  of  coffee  ;  twelve  pounds  of  sugar  ;  four 
quarts  of  vinegar,  one  and  a  half  pounds  of  tallow,  or  one 
and  a  fourth  pounds  of  adamantine,  or  one  pound  sperm 
candles  ;  four  pounds  of  soap,  and  two  quarts  of  salt. 

On  a  campaign,  or  on  marches,  or  on  board  transports, 
the  ration  of  hard  bread  is  one  pound. 

Fresh  beef,  when  it  can  be  procured,  should  be  fur- 


RATIONS,    AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM.  79 

nished  at  least  twice  a  week  ;  the  beef  to  be  procured,  if 
possible,  by  contract. 


RECEIPTS. 

1st. — Soldiers'  Soup  for  25  men. 

15  quarts  of  water  to  25  pounds  of  meat,  2  small  ta- 
ble-spoonsful of  salt,  half  a  one  of  pepper.  About  2  pounds 
of  rice  put  in  while  boiling,  and  what  vegetables  fresh  or 
preserved  that  can  be  procured — say  3  pounds. 

2d. — PorJc  Soup  for  25  men. 

In  6  gallons  of  cold  water  put  12  pounds  of  pork,  3 
quarts  of  beans,  2  pounds  of  rice,  season  to  suit ;  let  boil 
one  hour  and  a  half.  Soak  the  beans  over  night. 

3d. — Irish  Stew  for  25  men. 

25  pounds  of  mutton,  veal,  beef  or  pork,  cut  into 
pieces  six  inches  square,  4  pounds  of  onions,  8  pounds  po- 
tatoes, 4  table-spoonsful  of  salt,  1  of  pepper  ;  add  8  quarts 
of  water.  Cook  it  from  one  to  two  hours  slowly,  thicken 
the  gravy  with  flour  mixed  into  a  smooth  paste  with  water 
or  potatoes,  mashed  fine. 

4th. — Tea  for  25  men. 

Allow  12  quarts  of  water;  put  the  rations  of  tea — a 
large  teaspoonful  to  each — in  a  cloth  tied  up  very  loosely, 
throw  it  into  the  boiler  while  it  is  boiling  hard  for  a  mo- 
ment. Then  take  off  the  boiler,  cover  it,  and  let  it  stand 
full  ten  minutes,  when  it  will  be  ready  to  use ;  first  add 
sugar  and  milk  if  to  be  had,  at  the  rate  of  3  pints  or  2 
quarts  of  milk,  and  a  pound  or  a  pound  and  a  half  of 
sugar. 


80  KATKXSTS,    AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM. 

5th. — Pork  with  Peas  or  Beans  for  25  men. 

To  14  pounds  of  pork  add  6  pounds  of  peas  or  beans, 
put  them  in  a  cloth  to  boil,  tying  it  very  loosely,  place 
them  both  in  the  boiler  ;  let  them  boil  about  two  hours. 
Then  take  out  the  pork,  add  some  flour  to  the  gravy,  and 
put  the  peas  or  beans  in  it  with  two  or  three  onions  cut. 
up  fine ;  let  it  boil  a  little  longer,  mash  up  the  vegetables 
very  finely,  and  serve  them  round  the  dish  with  the  meat. 

6th. — Plain  Stewed  Meat  for  25  men. 

Take  14  pounds  of  mutton,  beef,  veal  or  pork,  cut  it 
into  chunks  and  put  it  in  the  boiler.  Add  4  quarts  of 
water,  2  quarts  to  a  teaspoonful  of  salt,  and  half  a  tea- 
spoonful  of  pepper,  8  or  1 0  onions  cut  in  pieces  ;  let  it 
boil  half  an  hour,  then  let  it  stew  slowly  from  half  an  hour 
to  an  hour  longer,  adding  1  pound  of  rice,  potatoes,  or  any 
vegetable  that  can  be  obtained ;  thicken  the  gravy  with 
flour  mixed  to  a  smooth  paste  in  cold  water. 

7th. — Stewed  Salt  Pork  or  Beef  for  25  men. 

Wash  the  meat  well,  let  it  soak  all  night,  wash  out  the 
salt  as  much  as  possible  ;  8  pounds  of  salt  beef,  5  pounds 
of  salt  pork,  1  of  a  pound  of  sugar,  2  pounds  of  sliced 
onions,  6  quarts  of  water,  and  a  pound  of  rice ;  let  it  sim- 
mer gently  for  two  or  three  hours. 

8th. — Salt  Pork  with  Potatoes  and  Cabbage  for  25  men. 

Take  15  pounds  of  pork,  extract  the  bones,  3  pounds 
of  potatoes,  2  winter  cabbages,  let  it  boil  for  two  hours  ; 
10  quarts  of  water.  Serve  the  meat  with  vegetables 
round  it.  The  gravy  will  make  a  good  broth  with  peas, 
beans,  or  rice  added,  also  a  little  onion.  Ship  biscuit 
broken  into  the  broth  makes  a  very  nutritious  soup. 


RATIONS,    AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM.  81 

9th. — To  Fry  any  kind  of  Meat. 

Get  your  frying-pan  very  hot,  put  in  some  fat  pork 
which  will  immediately  melt,  then  put  in  the  meat  you 
wish  to  fry,  (a  small  teaspoonful  of  salt  and  a  quarter  of 
a  teaspoonful  of  pepper  to  every  pound  of  meat.)  When 
done,  lay  the  meat  on  a  dish,  add  a  pint  of  water  to  the 
fat  in  the  frying-pan,  a  few  slices  of  onions,  or  2  teaspoons- 
ful  of  vinegar ;  thicken  it  with  a  little  flour  and  pour  it 
over  the  cooked  meat.  Any  sauce,  or  a  few  chopped 
pickles,  may  be  substituted  for  the  vinegar  or  onions. 

10th. — Coffee  for  25  men. 

Take  12  quarts  of  water,  when  it  boils  add  20  ounces 
of  coffee,  mix  it  well  and  leave  it  on  the  fire  till  it  com- 
mences  to  boil ;  then  take  it  off,  and  pour  into  it  a  little 
more  than  a  quart  of  cold  water ;  let  it  stand  in  a  warm 
place  full  ten  minutes  ;  the  dregs  will  settle  at  the  bottom 
and  the  coffee  be  perfectly  clear.  Pour  it  then  into  an- 
other vessel,  leaving  the  dregs  in  the  first ;  add  sugar,  4 
teaspoonsful  to  the  quart.  If  you  can  get  milk,  leave  out 
five  quarts  of  water  in  the  above  receipt,  and  put  milk  in 
its  place. 

llth. — Peas  or  Bean  Soup  for  25  men. 

Take  14  pounds  of  pork,  8  quarts  of  peas  or  beans,  20 
quarts  of  water,  25  teaspoonsful  of  sugar,  12  of  pepper, 
and  several  large  onions ;  boil  gently  till  the  vegetables 
are  soft,  from  four  to  five  hours. 

12th. — Receipt  for  a  small  quantity  of  mashed  Meat. 

Cut  the  meat  in  very  small  pieces ;  heat  the  frying- 
pan,  put  into  it  half  a  pint  of  water,  half  a  teaspoonful  of 
salt,  and  a  teaspoonful  of  flour,  and  let  it  cook  fifteen  min- 
4* 


82  RATIONS,   AND  MODE   OF   COOKING  THEM. 

utes.  Salt  meat  can  be  cooked  the  same,  omitting  the 
salt ;  in  its  place  putting  a  small  spoonful  of  sugar,  spices, 
or  pickles,  chopped  fine,  dish  it  on  to  some  ship  biscuit. 
Steak,  chops,  sausages,  bacon  slices  of  any  kind  of  meat 
can  be  cooked  in  a  frying-pan,  with  a  little  melted  fat  at 
the  bottom.  Salt  meat  should  always  be  soaked. 


HOSPITAL    DIETS. 

No.  1. — Semi-stewed  Mutton  and  Barley  Soup  for  100 
men. 

Put  in  a  convenient-sized  caldron  130  pints  of  cold 
water,  70  pounds  of  meat,  or  about  that  quantity,  12 
pounds  of  plain  mixed  vegetables,  (the  best  that  can  be 
obtained,)  9  pounds  6  ounces  of  barley,  1  pound  7  ounces 
of  salt,  1  pound  4  ounces  of  flour,  1  pound  4  ounces  of 
sugar,  1  ounce  of  pepper.  Put  all  the  ingredients  into 
the  pan  at  once,  except  the  flour ;  set  it  on  the  fire,  and 
when  beginning  to  boil,  diminish  the  heat,  and  simmer  gen- 
tly for  two  hours  and  a  half;  take  the  joints  of  meat  out, 
and  keep  them  warm  in  the  orderly's  pan ;  add  to  the 
soup  your  flour,  which  you  have  mixed  with  enough  water 
to  form  a  light  batter ;  stir  well  together  with  a  large 
spoon ;  boil  another  half  hour,  skim  off  the  fat,  and  serve 
the  soup  and  meat  separate.  The  meat  may  be  put  back 
into  the  soup  for  a  few  minutes  to  warm  again  prior  to 
serving.  The  soup  should  be  stirred  now  and  then  while 
making,  to  prevent  burning  or  sticking  to  the  bottom  of 
the  caldron. 

NOTE. — The  word  "  about "  is  applied  to  the  half  and  full  diet, 
which  varies  the  weight  of  the  meat ;  but  -£  Ib.  of  mutton  will 
always  make  a  pint  of  good  soup  :  3  Ibs.  of  mixed  preserved  vege- 
tables must  be  used  when  fresh  are  not  to  be  obtained,  and  put  in 
one  hour  and  a  half  prior  to  serving,  instead  of  at  first ;  they  will 
then  show  better  in  the  soup,  and  still  be  well  done. 


RATIONS,    AND   MODE   OF   COOKING  THEM.  83 

The  joints  are  cooked  whole,  and  afterwards  cut  up  in 
different  messes  ;  being  cooked  this  way,  in  a  rather  thick 
stock,  the  meat  becomes  more  nutritious. 

All  the  following  receipts  may  be  increased  to  large 
quantities,  but  by  all  means  closely  follow  the  weight 
and  measure. 

No.  2. — Beef  Soup. 

Proceed  the  same  as  for  mutton,  only  leave  the  meat 
in  till  serving,  as  it  will  take  longer  than  mutton.  The 
pieces  are  not  to  be  above  4  or  5  pounds  weight,  and  for 
a  change  half  rice  may  be  introduced  ;  the  addition  of  2 
pounds  more  will  make  it  thicker  and  more  nutritive ; 
^  pound  of  curry  powder  will  make  an  excellent  change 
also.  To  vary  the  same,  half  a  pint  of  burnt  sugar  water 
may  be  added ;  it  will  give  the  soup  a  very  rich  brown 
color. 

No.  3. — Beef  Tea.     Receipt  for  6  pints. 

Cut  3  pounds  of  beef  into  pieces  the  size  of  walnuts, 
and  chop  up  the  bones,  if  any  ;  put  it  into  a  convenient- 
sized  kettle,  with  ^  pound  of  mixed  vegetables,  such  as 
onions,  leeks,  celery,  turnips,  carrots,  (or  one  or  two  of 
these,  if  all  are  not  to  be  obtained,)  one  ounce  of  salt,  a 
little  pepper,  1  teaspoonful  of  sugar,  2  ounces  of  butter, 
half  a  pint  of  water.  Set  it  on  a  sharp  fire  for  ten  minutes 
or  a  quarter  of  an  hour,  stirring  now  and  then  with  a 
spoon,  till  it  forms  a  rather  thick  gravy  at  bottom,  but 
not  brown  ;  then  add  7  pints  of  hot  or  cold  water,  but  hot 
is  preferable ;  when  boiling,  let  it  simmer  gently  for  an 
hour  ;  skim  off  all  the  fat,  strain  it  through  a  sieve,  and 
serve. 


84:  RATIONS,    AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM. 

No.  4.— Thick  Beef  Tea. 

Dissolve  a  good  teaspoonful  of  arrowroot  in  a  gill  of 
water,  and  pour  it  into  the  beef  tea  twenty  minutes  before 
passing  through  the  sieve  ;  it  is  then  ready. 

No.  5. — Strengthening  Beef  Tea  with  Calms-foot  Jelly  or 
Isinglass. 

Add  £  ounce  calves-foot  gelatine  to  the  above  quantity 
of  beef  tea  previous  to  serving,  when  cooking. 

No.  6. — Mutton  and  Veal  Tea. 

Mutton  and  veal  will  make  good  tea  by  proceeding 
precisely  the  same  as  above.  The  addition  of  a  little  aro- 
matic herbs  is  always  desirable.  If  no  fresh  vegetables 
are  at  hand,  use  2  ounces  of  mixed  preserved  vegetables 
to  any  of  the  above  receipts. 

No.  7.— -Chicken  Broth. 

Put  in  a  stew-pan  a  fowl,  3  pints  of  water,  2  tea- 
spoonsful  of  rice,  1  teaspoonful  of  salt,  a  middle-sized 
onion,  or  2  ounces  -of  mixed  vegetables ;  boil  the  whole 
gently  for  three-quarters  of  an  hour ;  if  an  old  fowl,  sim- 
mer from  one  hour  and  a  half  to  two  hours,  adding  one 
pint  more  water ;  skim  off  the  fat,  and  serve.  A  small 
fowl  will  do. 

NOTE. — A  light  mutton  broth  may  be  made  precisely  the  same, 
by  using  a  pound  and  a  half  of  scrag  of  mutton  instead  of  fowl. 

For  thick  mutton  broth  proceed  as  for  thick  beef  tea,  omitting 
the  rice ;  a  table-spoonful  of  burnt  sugar  water  will  give  a  rich 
color  to  the  broth. 

No.  8. — Plain  Boiled  Rice. 

Put  2  quarts  of  water  in  a  stew-pan,  with  a  teaspoon- 
ful of  salt ;  when  boiling,  add  to  it  J  pound  of  rice,  well 


RATIONS,  AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM.  85 

washed  ;  boil  for  ten  minutes,  or  till  each  grain  becomes 
rather  soft ;  drain  it  into  a  colander,  slightly  grease  the 
pot  with  butter,  and  put  the  rice  back  into  it ;  let  it  swell 
slowly  for  about  twenty  minutes  near  the  fire,  or  in  a 
slow  oven ;  each  grain  will  then  swell  up,  and  be  well 
separated ;  it  is  then  ready  for  use. 

No.  9. — Sweet  Rice. 

Add  to  the  plain  boiled  rice  1  ounce  of  butter,  2  table- 
spoonsful  of  sugar,  a  little  cinnamon,  a  quarter  of  a  pint 
of  milk  ;  stir  it  with  a  fork,  and  serve ;  a  little  currant- 
jelly  or  jam  may  be  added  to  the  rice. 

No.  10. — Rice  with  Gravy. 

Add  to  the  rice  4  table-spoonsful  of  the  essence  of 
beef,  a  little  butter,  if  fresh,  half  a  teaspoonful  of  salt ; 
stir  together  with  a  fork,  and  serve. 

No.  11. — Plain  Oatmeal. 

Put  in  a  pan  J  pound  of  oatmeal,  1£  ounce  of  sugar, 
half  a  teaspoonful  of  salt,  and  3  pints  of  water  ;  boil  slowly 
for  twenty  minutes,  stirring  continually,  and  serve.  A 
quarter  of  a  pint  of  boiled  milk,  an  ounce  of  butter,  and  a 
little  pounded  cinnamon  or  spico  added  previous  to  serv- 
ing, is  a  good  variation. 

This  receipt  has  been  found  most  useful  at  the  com- 
mencement of  dysentery,  by  medical  authorities. 

No.  12. —  Calves-foot  Jelly. 

Put  in  a  proper-sized  stew-pan  2J  ounces  of  calves-foot 
gelatine,  4  ounces  of  white  sugar,  4  whites  of  eggs  and 
shells,  the  peel  of  a  lemon,  the  juice  of  3  middle-sized 
lemons,  half  a  pint  of  Marsala  wine ;  beat  all  well  together 


86  RATIONS,  AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM. 

with  the  egg-beater  for  a  few  minutes,  then  add  4^  pints 
of  cold  water  ;  set  it  on  a  slow  fire,  and  keep  whipping  it 
till  boiling.  Set  it  on  the  corner  of  the  stove,  partly  cov- 
ered with  the  lid,  upon  which  you  place  a  few  pieces  of 
burning  charcoal ;  let  it  simmer  gently  for  ten  minutes, 
and  strain  it  through  a  jelly-bag.  It  is  then  ready  to  put 
in  the  ice  or  some  cool  place.  Sherry  will  do  if  Marsala 
is  not  at  hand. 

For  orange  jelly  use  only  1  lemon  and  2  oranges. 
Any  delicate  flavor  may  be  introduced. 

Jelly  Stock, 

made  from  calves'  feet,  requires  to  be  made  the  day  pre- 
vious to  being  used,  requiring  to  be  very  hard  to  extract 
the  fat.  Take  two  calves'  feet,  cut  them  up,  and  boil  in  3 
quarts  of  water ;  as  soon  as  it  boils  remove  it  to  the  cor- 
ner of  the  fire,  and  simmer  for  five  hours,  keeping  it  skim- 
med ;  pass  through  a  hair-sieve  into  a  basin,  and  let  it  re- 
main until  quite  hard ;  then  remove  the  oil  and  fat,  and 
wipe  the  top  dry.  Place  in  a  stew-pan  half  a  pint  of 
water,  1  of  sherry,  half  a  pound  of  lump  sugar,  the  juice 
of  4  lemons,  the  rinds  of  2,  and  the  whites  and  shells  of 
5  eggs ;  whisk  until  the  sugar  is  melted,  then  add  the 
jelly,  place  it  on  the  fire,  and  whisk  until  boiling,  pass  it 
through  a  jelly-bag,  pouring  that  back  again  which  comes 
through  first,  until  quite  clear ;  it  is  then  ready  for  use, 
by  putting  it  in  moulds  or  glasses.  Vary  the  flavor  ac- 
cording to  fancy. 

No.  IB.— Sago  Jelly. 

Put  into  a  pan  3  ounces  of  sago,  1|-  ounce  of  soft 
sugar,  half  a  lemon  peel  cut  very  thin,  ^  teaspoonful  of 
ground  cinnamon,  or  a  small  stick  of  the  same ;  put  to  it 


RATIONS,  AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM.  87 

3  pints  of  water  and  a  little  salt ;  boil  ten  minutes,  or 
rather  longer,  stirring  continually  until  rather  thick,  then 
add  a  little  port,  sherry,  or  Marsala  wine  ;  mix  well,  and 
serve  hot  or  cold. 

No.  14. — Arrowroot  Milk. 

Put  into  a  pan  4  ounces  of  arrowroot,  3  ounces  of  su- 
gar, the  peel  of  half  a  lemon,  |-  teaspoonful  of  salt,  2^ 
pints  of  milk ;  set  it  on  the  fire,  stir  round  gently,  boil 
for  ten  minutes,  and  serve.  If  no  lemons  are  at  hand,  a 
little  essence  of  any  kind  will  do. 

When  short  of  milk,  use  half  water  ;  half  an  ounce  of 
fresh  butter  is  an  improvement  before  serving.  If  required 
thicker,  put  a  little  milk. 

No.  15. — Thick  Arrowroot  Panada. 

Put  in  a  pan  5  ounces  of  arrowroot,  2J  ounces  of  white 
sugar,  the  peel  of  half  a  lemon,  a  quarter  of  a  teaspoonful 
of  salt,  4  pints  of  water ;  mix  all  well,  set  on  the  fire, 
boil  for  ten  minutes ;  it  is  then  ready.  The  juice  of  a 
lemon  is  an  improvement ;  a  gill  of  wine  may  also  be  in- 
troduced, and  -J-  ounce  of  calves-foot  gelatine  previously 
dissolved  in  water  will  be  strengthening.  Milk,  however, 
is  preferable,  if  at  hand. 

No.  16. — Arrowroot  Water. 

Put  into  a  pan  3  ounces  of  arrowroot,  2  ounces  of 
white  sugar,  the  peel  of  a  lemon,  J  teaspoonful  of  salt,  4 
pints  of  water  ;  mix  well,  set  on  the  fire,  boil  for  ten  min- 
utes. It  is  then  ready  to  serve  either  hot  or  cold. 

No.  17.— Rice  Water. 

Put  7  pints  of  water  to  boil,  add  to  it  2  ounces  of  rice 
washed,  2  ounces  of  sugar,  the  peel  of  two-thirds  of  a  lem- 


88  RATIONS,  AKD   MODE   OF   COOKIXG   THEM. 

on  ;  boil  gently  for  three-quarters  of  an  hour  ;  it  will  re- 
duce to  5  pints ;  strain  through  a  colander ;  it  is  then 
ready. 

The  rice  may  be  left  in  the  beverage  or  made  into  a 
pudding,  or  by  the  addition  of  a  little  sugar  or  jam,  will 
be  found  very  good  for  either  children  or  invalids. 

No.  18. — Barley  Water. 

Put  in  a  saucepan  7  pints  of  water,  2  ounces  of  barley, 
which  stir  now  and  then  while  boiling  ;  add  2  ounces  of 
white  sugar,  the  rind  of  half  a  lemon,  thinly  peeled ;  let 
it  boil  gently  for  about  two  hours,  without  covering  it ; 
pass  it  through  a  sieve  or  colander ;  it  is  then  ready. 
The  barley  and  lemon  may  be  left  in. 

No.  19. — Plain  Lemonade. 

Thinly  peel  the  third  part  of  a  lemon,  which  put  into 
a  basin  with  2  table-spoonsful  of  sugar ;  roll  the  lemon 
with  your  hand  upon  the  table  to  soften  it ;  cut  it  into 
two,  lengthwise,  squeeze  the  juice  over  the  peel,  &c.,  stir 
round  for  a  minute  with  a  spoon  to  form  a  sort  of  syrup ; 
pour  over  a  pint  of  water,  mix  well,  and  remove  the  pips  ; 
it  is  then  ready  for  use.  If  a  very  large  lemon,  and  full 
of  juice,  and  very  fresh,  you  may  make  a  pint  and  a  half 
to  a  quart,  adding  sugar  and  peel  in  proportion  to  the  in- 
crease of  water.  The  juice  only  of  the  lemon  and  sugar 
will  make  lemonade,  but  will  then  be  deprived  of  the 
aroma  which  the  rind  contains,  the  said  rind  being  gen- 
erally thrown  away. 

No.  20. — Semi-citric  Lemonade.     Receipt  for  50  pints. 

Put  1  ounce  of  citric  acid  to  dissolve  in  a  pint  of  wa- 
ter ;  peel  20  lemons  thinly,  and  put  the  peel  in  a  large 


RATIONS,  AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM.  89 

vessel,  with  3  pounds  2  ounces  of  white  sugar  well  broken ; 
roll  each  lemon  on  the  table  to  soften  it,  which  will  facili- 
tate the  extraction  of  the  juice ;  cut  them  into  two,  and 
press  out  the  juice  into  a  colander  or  sieve,  over  the  peel 
and  sugar,  then  pour  half  a  pint  of  water  through  the 
colander,  so  as  to  leave  no  juice  remaining ;  triturate  the 
sugar,  juice,  and  peel  together  for  a  minute  or  two  with  a 
spoon,  so  as  to  form  a  sort  of  syrup,  and  extract  the  aroma 
from  the  peel  and  the  dissolved  citric  acid  ;  mix  all  well 
together,  pour  on  50  pints  of  cold  water,  stir  well  togeth- 
er ;  it  is  then  ready.  A  little  ice  in  summer  is  a  great 
addition. 

No.  21. —  Cheap  Lemonade. 

Put  into  a  basin  2  table-spoonsful  of  white  or  brown 
sugar,  half  a  table-spoonful  of  lime  juice ;  mix  well  togeth- 
er for  one  minute,  add  1  pint  of  water,  and  the  beverage 
is  ready.  A  drop  of  rum  will  make  a  good  variation,  as 
lime  juice  and  rum  are  daily  issued  to  the  soldiers. 

No.  22. — Tartaric  Lemonade. 

Dissolve  1  ounce  of  crystallized  tartaric  acid  in  a  pint 
of  cold  water,  which  put  in  a  large  vessel ;  when  dis- 
solved, add  1  pound  9  ounces  of  white  or  brown  sugar — 
the  former  is  preferable  ;  mix  well  to  form  a  thick  syrup ; 
add  to  it  24  pints  of  cold  water,  slowly  mixing  well ;  it 
is  then  ready. 

It  maybe  strained  through  either  a  colander  or  a  jelly- 
bag  ;  if  required  very  light,  add  5  pints  more  water,  and 
sugar  in  proportion ;  if  citric  acid  be  used,  put  only  20 
pints  of  water  to  each  ounce. 


90  KATIONS,  AND   MODE   OF  COOKING-   THEM. 

No.  23.— Toast  and  Water. 

Cut  a  piece  of  crusty  bread,  about  ^  pound  in  weight, 
place  it  upon  a  toasting-fork,  and  hold  it  about  six  inches 
from  the  fire ;  turn  it  often,  and  keep  moving  it  gently 
until  of  a  light  yellow  color,  then  place  it  nearer  the  fire, 
and  when  of  a  good  brown  chocolate  color,  put  it  in  a  jug 
and  pour  over  3  pints  of  boiling  water ;  cover  the  jug 
until  cold,  then  strain  it  in  a  clean  jug,  and  it  is  ready  for 
use.  Never  leave  the  toast  in  it,  for  in  summer  it  would 
cause  fermentation  in  a  short  time.  I  would  almost  venv 
ture  to  say  that  such  toast  and  water  should  be  made,  anc| 
that  it  would  keep  good  a  considerable  time  in  bottles. 


THE    CAMP    STOVE. 

The  arrangements  for  cooking  the  rations  on  a  march 
or  in  camp,  are  always  more  or  less  annoying  to  troops. 
Coming  into  camp  perhaps  during  a  storm  after  a  long 
day's  march,  the  men  have  to  wait  for  their  supper  until 
a  party  has  been  despatched  with  a  team  sometimes  sev- 
eral miles  to  procure  fuel,  this  more  frequently  green 
wood  than  dry.  After  the  fuel  arrives  and  a  fire  is  kin- 
dled, it  takes  a  long  time  before  the  food  is  cooked.  In 
the  meanwhile,  wet,  weary,  and  half  sick,  the  men  are 
waiting  for  their  supper.  If  this  could  be  given  to  them 
at  once,  and  they  could  go  to  their  tents  and  rest,  how 
much  more  fitted  they  would  be  for  duty  the  next  morn, 
ing,  and  how  much  smaller  would  be  the  sick  report.  A 
great  portion  of  this  discomfort  would  be  obviated  by 
the  use  of  a  camp  stove,  a  drawing  of  which  is  shown  in 
plate  .  Two  of  these  stoves  to  a  company  are  sufficient. 
All  the  necessary  kettles  and  utensils  accompany  it,  in- 
cluding gridiron,  frying-pan,  griddle,  and  bake-oven. 


The    l?orta~ble    Field    Cooking    Stove. 


RATIONS,  AND   MODE   OF   COOKING   THEM.  91 

Light  and  portable,  the  whole  is  fitted  into  a  cask  which 
secures  its  transportation  without  fear  of  injury.  The 
fire  is  made  in  a  few  moments  from  a  few  short  faggots 
which  are  placed  in  the  stove  when  starting  on  the  march 
in  the  morning  after  breakfast ;  so  that,  in  half  an  hour 
after  coming  into  camp,  the  men  may  all  have  hot  coffee, 
and  go  to  bed.  This  stove  is  made  in  New  York,  and 
may  be  procured  from  the  agent,  No.  13  Broadway. 


PRESERVED  MEATS  AND  OTHER  FOOD. 

The  great  difficulty  of  transporting  provisions  in  bulk 
without  their  becoming  damaged  by  exposure  to  the  wet, 
and  therefore  unfit  for  use,  causing  serious  inconvenience, 
and  often  impeding  materially  the  operations  of  a  cam- 
paign, renders  it  eminently  desirable  that  such  food,  as- 
similating to  the  ration,  as  can  be  prepared  in  a  condensed 
form  should  be  procured.  Samples  of  preserved  and  con- 
densed food  have  been  submitted  to  careful  examination 
and  test  by  competent  and  reliable  officers,  and  found  to 
answer  all  the  purposes  for  which  they  are  intended,  and 
can  therefore  be  safely  recommended  for  campaign  use. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

FIELD  WORKS  are  any  constructions  which  have  for  their 
object  to  impede  the  advance  of  an  enemy,  or  to  enable 
an  inferior  force  to  maintain  their  position  against  the  at- 
tack of  a  superior  number. 

The  name  of  field  fortification  is  applied  to  a  work 
which  is  composed  of  an  embankment  of  earth  called  a 
"  parapet,"  and  an  excavation  called  a  "  ditch,"  on  the 
exterior  side,  wThich  last  furnishes  the  earth  for  the  em- 
bankment. 

The  outline  or  form  of  the  work  varies  with  the  char- 
acter of  the  ground,  the  circumstances  under  which  it  is 
constructed,  the  strength  of  the  force,  and  particular  char- 
acter of  the  defence.  The  profile  or  shape  of  the  embank- 
ment or  parapet  is  usually  the  same  in  all  cases. 

"When  the  ground  about  a  work  within  effective  range 
of  the  fire-arms  of  the  attacking  party  is  quite  flat,  the 
height,  called  the  "  command "  of  the  work,  must  be  at 
least  7  feet  6  inches,  in  order  that  the  defenders  may  be 
covered  from  the  fire  of  men  on  horseback — that  class  of 
troops  being  able  to  discharge  their  arms  at  7  feet  6  inches 
above  the  ground. 

Unimportant  works,  or  such  as  are  situated  on  higher 
ground  than  that  within  effective  artillery  range,  may 
have  their  parapets  as  low  as  6  feet,  or  even  5  feet. 


Profile  and.  Outline  of  a  Bastion  Front  Field  "Worls. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  93 

Fig.  1. — Plate  2  shows  the  ordinary  form  of  the 
profile  of  an  intrenchment,  in  soils  of  which  the  natural 
slope  is  one  perpendicular  to  one  base. 

A  B  C  D  E  F  is  the  profile  of  the  Parapet. 

G  H  I  K  the  profile  of  the  Ditch. 

L  M  X  the  profile  of  the  Glacis. 

A  B  the  Banquette  Slopes. 

B  C  Tread  of  the  Banquette. 

C  D  the  Interior  Slope. 

D  E  the  Superior  Slope. 

E  F  the  Exterior  Slope. 

F  G  the  Berm. 

G  II  the  Scarp. 

H  I  the  Bottom  of  the  Ditch. 

I  K  the  Counterscarp. 

A  the  Foot  of  the  Banquette  Slope. 

B  the  Crest  of  the  Banquette. 

C  the  Foot  of  the  Interior  Slope. 

D  the  Interior  Crest. 

E  the  Exterior  Crest. 

F  the  Foot  of  the  Exterior  Slope. 

G  the  Crest  of  the  Scarp. 

H  the  Foot  of  the  Scarp. 

I    the  Foot  of  the  Counterscarp. 

K  the  Crest  of  the  Counterscarp. 

M  the  Crest  of  the  Glacis. 

N  the  Foot  of  the  Glacis. 

Fig.  2  shows  the  general  plan  of  intrenchments  with 
flanking  arrangements. 

0  A  B  and  E  F  P  are  the  Advanced  Parts. 

B  C  D  E  are  the  Retired  Parts. 

A  0,  A  B,  E  F,  and  F  P  are  the  Faces. 

B  C  and  D  E  are  the  Flanks. 

C  D  the  Curtains. 

A  D  and  C  F  the  Lines  of  Defence. 

0  A  B  and  E  F  P  are  the  Salient  Angles. 

BCD  and  C  D  E  the  Re-entering  Angles. 

A  D  F  and  B  C  F  the  Angles  of  Defence. 

b  A  c  and  e  F  g  the  Sectors  without  Fire. 

L  M  and  N  R  the  Capitals. 

Sometimes  the  parapet*  is  formed  of  earth  taken  from 

*  In  this  manner  cover  for  troops  may  be  very  quickly  obtained,  with  the 
advantage  of  having  the  power  to  advance  over  the  parapet  in  order  of  battle 
when  occasion  offers. 


9i  FIELD   FOETIFICATIONS. 

an  excavation  or  trench  inside  of  it ;  in  this  case  a  parapet 
may  be  as  low  as  3  feet,  because,  then,  the  defenders 
standing  in  the  trench  of  equal  depth,  and  close  behind 
the  parapet,  are  sufficiently  covered  by  it.  < 

Should  there  be  ground  near  the  position  to  be  forti- 
fied, higher  than  that  on  which  the  parapet  stands,  the 
latter  must  then  have  a  greater  command  than  7  feet  6 
inches,  but  in  the  more  simple  kind  of  field  works  the 
command  does  not  exceed  12  feet ;  for  as  soldiers  cannot 
easily  throw  earth  with  a  shovel  to  a  greater  height  than 
6  feet,  and  as  other  means  are  generally  wanting  in  the 
field,  it  is  evident  that  the  height  of  a  parapet  for  such  a 
work,  must  be  limited  by  the  capability  of  executing  it 
with  shovels  and  pickaxes  by  two  parties  of  men,  one 
standing  on  a  level  6  feet  above  the  other.  The  same 
reason  determines  the  greatest  depth  of  ditch  to  be  12 
feet,  a  scaffolding  being  necessary  at  6  feet  above  the  bot- 
tom of  the  ditch  to  receive  the  earth  which  is  thrown  from 
thence ;  the  earth  is  then  thrown  up  to  the  level  of  the 
ground,  by  other  laborers  placed  on  the  scaffolding. 

In  the  construction  of  field  works  it  should  always  be 
recollected  that  a  great  command  of  parapet  not  only 
requires  additional  means,  trouble,  and  time  to  throw  up 
the  earth,  but  also  renders  necessary  an  increased  mass 
of  earth  for  the  banquette,  which  may  thus  encumber  the 
interior  of  the  work. 

To  obviate,  as  much  as  possible,  the  latter  evil,  it  is 
usual  to  mount  the  banquette  by  steps,  when  the  parapet 
has  a  greater  command  than  8  feet. 

The  thickness  of  the  parapets  of  field  works  must  be 
regulated  by  the  description  of  arms  likely  to  be  employed 
against  them  ;  in  order,  therefore,  that  they  may  afford  a 
reasonable  degree  of  resistance  to  repeated  firing,  the 


FIELD  FORTIFICATIONS.  95 

thickness  of  parapets  must  somewhat  exceed  the  penetra- 
tion of  the  shot  which  may  be  used  in  the  attack. 

Penetration  of  shot.  Thickness  of  parapet. 
Musket  ball,  10  to  18  inches.  3  feet. 

6 — pounder,  3|  to    4  feet.  6  feet. 

9 — pounder,  6£  to  7  feet.  8  or  9  feet. 

12— pounder,  8|  to  10  feet.  10  or  12  feet. 

It  is  found  by  experiment  that  loose  earth  resists  the 
penetration  of  shot  just  as  well  as  that  which  has  been 
rammed  together. 

Although  a  musket  ball  penetrates,  at  most,  only  18 
inches  into  earth,  musketry  parapets  require  to  be 
made  3  feet  thick,  in  order  that  they  may  be  sufficiently 
substantial  to  preserve  the  requisite  height,  notwithstand- 
ing the  action  of  the  weather. 

Heavier  guns  than  12-pounders  are  rarely  brought 
into  the  field,  consequently  12  feet  may  be  considered  as 
the  greatest  thickness  of  a  parapet ;  and  it  has  been  shown 
that,  for  the  simpler  works,  12  feet  is  the  greatest  com- 
mand of  a  parapet,  and  likewise  the  greatest  depth  of  a 
ditch. 

The  exterior  side  of  a  parapet  is  formed  with  a  slope 
which  has  a  base  equal  to  its  height,  that  being  the  in- 
clination which  (ordinary)  earth  assumes  when  thrown  up 
loosely ;  and,  therefore,  it  is  the  most  advantageous  form 
for  a  mass  of  earth  whose  sides  are  unsupported. 

The  interior  slope  of  a  parapet  has  a  base  not  greater 
than  one-third  or  one-fourth  of  its  height,  in  order  to  allow 
the  men  to  approach  near  the  crest,  and  to  fire  over  the 
parapet  with  ease. 

As  newly  moved  earth  will  not  remain  at  such  a  steep 
slope  without  support,  it  must  be  retained  in  that  state 
by  a- revetment. 

The  REVETMENT  is  commonly  made  with  gabions,  fas- 


96  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

cines,  sand-bags,  or  sods  of  turf;  or  again  with  hurdles, 
casks,  trunks  of  trees,  and  occasionally  with  doors,  shut- 
ters, &c.,  from  any  neighboring  houses.  Trunks  of  trees 
are  objectionable  as  a  revetment  for  the  interior  slope,  on 
account  of  the  splinters  that  fly  from  them  when  struck 
by  shot ;  and  large  trees,  laid  horizontally  to  revet  the 
escarp  or  counterscarp,  are  defective,  because  they  serve 
as  steps  for  the  assailants. 

GABIONS  are  strong  cylindrical  baskets  without  top  or 
bottom,  2  feet  in  diameter,  and  2  feet  9  inches  in  height. 
These  are  placed  in  rows  along  the  line  of  work  at  an 
inclination  corresponding  to  the  required  slope,  and  then 
filled  with  earth.  To  make  a  gabion,  from  eight  to  four- 
teen pickets,  3  feet  6  inches  long,  are  fixed  upright  in  the 
ground,  at  equal  distances,  in  the  circumference  of  a  circle, 
1  foot  11  inches  in  diameter  ;  flexible  twigs  (or  rods)  are 
then  interwoven  with  the  upright  pickets,  commencing 
with  three  rods  at  the  bottom,  and  weaving  each  in  succes- 
sion outside  of  two  pickets  and  inside  of  one  ;  as  the  twigs 
(or  rods)  are  expended,  others  are  added,  and  the  basket 
work  continued  to  the  height  of  2  feet  9  inches  ;  this  work 
(which  is  called  the  web)  is  sewn  in  three  or  four  parts, 
from  top  to  bottom  ;  withes,  (called  gads,)  or  spun-yarn 
being  used  for  that  purpose,  in  order  to  keep  it  from 
coming  off  the  pickets ;  the  ends  of  these  are  then  cut  off, 
about  an  inch  from  the  web.  A  gabion,  thus  made,  stands 
3  feet  high  in  the  revetment,  and  weighs  from  36  to  40  Ibs. 
The  best  wood  for  the  web,  and  particularly  for  the  gads, 
is  willow  and  hazel. 

FASCINES  are  military  faggots,  18  feet  long  and  9 
inches  in  diameter  :  they  can  be  sawed  into  shorter  lengths, 
and  are  sometimes  made  only  6  feet  long. 

To  make  a  fascine,  two  trestles  (like  a  St.  Andrew's 
cross)  are  fixed  in  the  ground  at  16  feet  apart;  then 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  97 

three  or  four  other  trestles  (according  to  the  length  and 
thickness  of  the  brushwood)  are  placed  at  equal  distances 
between  the  two  first  trestles,  and  in  a  direct  line  with 
them ;  brushwood  is  next  laid  along  the  trestles,  (the 
smallest  inside,)  so  as  to  project  17  or  18  inches  beyond 
the  extreme  trestles,  and  is  compressed  to  a  diameter  of 
9  inches  by  means  of  an  instrument  called  a  choker  ;*  the 
brushwood  is  bound  with  gads,  (before  the  choker  is  re- 
laxed,) at  6  inches  beyond  the  extreme  trestles,  and  at  in- 
termediate intervals  of  15£  inches,  and  the  ends  of  the 
fascine  are  sawed  off  square,  at  1  foot  beyond  the  extreme 
trestles.  v 

FASCINE  GADS  are  tough  and  flexible  twigs,  5  feet  long, 
very  much  twisted  to  render  them  fit  for  tying.  A  squad 
of  five  men  can,  in  an  hour,  make  a  fascine  which  weighs 
(when  of  tolerably  dry  material)  from  140  to  160  Ibs. 
If,  however,  the  brushwood  is  green,  and  much  thicker 
than  a  man's  thumb,  it  will  weigh  200  Ibs.  The  fascines 
forming  a  revetment  are  fastened  in  their  position,  (one 
above  another,)  by  pickets  3J  or  4  feet  long,  which  are 
driven  obliquely  downwards  through  the  fascine  so  as  to 
form  an  angle  of  45°  with  the  slope.  The  pickets  should 
be  in  the  proportion  of  6  to  an  18-inch  fascine,  of  which 
two  are  driven  vertically,  in  order  to  fasten  each  fascine 
to  that  which  is  beneath  it. 

Two  gabions  make  nearly  the  same  quantity  of  revet- 
ment as  an  18-inch  fascine,  and  consume  but  half  the 
quantity  of  materials ;  moreover,  they  require  only  com- 
mon laborers  to  form  them  into  a  revetment,  and  stand  in 
their  positions  without  pickets  or  other  fastening  ;  they  also 
make  a  more  durable  revetment  than  fascines  or  sand-bags. 

*  The  choker  consists  of  4  feet  of  chain,  with  a  wooden  lever  at  each  end. 
On  the  chain  is  marked,  by  rings,  a  length  of  28  inches,  being  a  circumfer- 
ence equivalent,  nearly,  to  a  diameter  of  9  inches. 

5 


98  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

As  fascines  are  heavy,  require  pickets  to  fasten  them, 
and  experienced  men  to  build  them  in  revetment;  as, 
moreover,  each  fascine  takes  twice  as  much  material  as 
two  gabions,  which,  together,  will  make  a  revetment  of 
equal  superficies,  it  is  evident  that  fascines  are  inferior  to 
gabions  for  the  formation  of  revetments,  although  they 
support  the  earth  at  the  same  slope,  viz.,  with  a  base 
equal  to  one-quarter  of  its  height. 

SAND-BAGS  are  bags  of  coarse  canvas,  measuring,  when 
empty  and  laid  flat,  2  feet  8  inches  by  1  foot  4  inches ; 
they  contain,  when  quite  full,  a  bushel  of  earth ;  but  when 
tied  and  placed  in  revetment,  only  three-quarters  of  a 
bushel.  In  building  a  revetment  with  them  they  are  ar- 
ranged with  their  ends  and  sides  presented  alternately  to 
the  front  in  each  course,  and  with  the  joints  in  the  succes- 
sive courses  broken,  like  brickwork.  Sixteen  sand-bags 
build  10  square  feet  of  revetment ;  they  ought  to  be  tarred, 
if  the  revetments  are  to  last  a  considerable  time  ;  if  not 
tarred,  they  rot  in  two  months.  An  empty  sand-bag 
weighs  1  Ib.  2  oz.,  and  when  tarred  1  Ib.  12  oz. 

Filled  sand-bags  are  musket-shot  proof,  and  are  fre- 
quently placed  on  a  parapet,  one  across  two  others,  the 
latter  being  a  short  distance  asunder,  in  order  that  the  in- 
tervals may  serve  as  loopholes. 

Gun  batteries  are  sometimes  made  entirely  of  sand- 
bags, which  are  filled  at  a  distance  and  brought  to  the 
place ;  this  may  be  done  either  to  save  time,  or  when 
earth  cannot  be  procured  on  the  spot,  in  consequence  of 
the  soil  being  rocky  or  marshy. 

On  naval  expeditions  sand-bags  are  very  serviceable, 
as  there  is  no  other  way  in  wrhich  a  battery  can  be  prompt- 
ly formed  on  a  shore. 

When  sand-bags  or  gabions  are  made  use  of  to  revet 
the  cheeks  of  embrasures,  they  should  be  covered  with 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  99 

raw  hides,  to  prevent  them  from  being  damaged  by  the 
flash  and  the  concussion  caused  by  the  discharge  of  the 
gun. 

SODS  OF  TURF,  being  generally  procurable  on  the  spot, 
are  much  used  in  the  revetments  of  the  slopes  of  field 
works  ;  but  there  are  strong  objections  to  sod  revetments, 
particularly  as  they  take  three  times  as  long  to  build  as  a 
brick  wall. 

Good  sods  ought  to  be  cut  16  inches  long,  8  inches 
wide,  and  4  inches  thick ;  they  are  built  up  in  the  same 
manner  as  bricks,  and  with  the  grass  downwards,  and  are 
fastened  with  pickets  long  enough  to  penetrate  three 
courses.  Six  sods  build  2  square  feet  of  revetment.  A 
sod  revetment  requires  most  labor  ;  revetments  of  sand- 
bags, fascines,  and  gabions,  require  successively  less  ;  the 
last  is  the  best  in  all  respects ;  a  sod  revetment  retains 
the  earth  at  a  slope  of  one-third  only,  the  three  others  at 
a  slope  of  one-fourth. 

The  parapet  is  bounded  on  its  upper  surface  by  a 
plane  called  the  "  superior  slope  ;  "  this  declines  towards 
the  counterscarp,  in  order  to  enable  the  defenders  to  see 
and  fire  on  the  assailants  (directly)  until  they  descend 
into  the  ditch.  The  amount  of  this  slope  is  called  the 
"  plongee,"  and  this  varies  from  one-sixth  to  one-fourth 
of  the  thickness  of  the  parapet,  but  it  must  not  exceed 
one-fourth  in  order  that  the  crest  *  of  the  parapet  may  not 
become  too  weak. 

It  is  of  great  importance  that  the  superior  slope  should 
be  directed  to  the  counterscarp,  as  it  then  enables  the 
defenders,  notwithstanding  the  smoke  and  confusion  con- 
sequent on  an  attack,  to  direct  their  fire  with  certainty  to 

*  It  has  been  found  by  experience  that  a  soldier  cannot  depress  his  musket, 
when  firing,  more  than  15°  below  a  horizonal  plane,  and  a  plangee  of  one-fourth 
of  the  thickness  of  the  parapet  gives  a  depression  of  15° ;  this  is  an  additional 
reason  for  limiting  the  plongee  to  onerfourth  of  the  thickness  of  the  parapet. 


100  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

a  spot  where  the  assailants'  columns  must  be,  more  or 
less,  detained  by  the  ditch  and  the  obstacles  in  it. 

If  the  superior  slope  cannot  be  directed  to  the  edge  of 
the  counterscarp  without  making  the  plongee  more  than 
one-fourth  of  the  thickness  of  the  parapet,  the  counter- 
scarp must  be  raised  by  means  of  a  small  glacis.  The 
crest  of  this  glacis,  however,  should  be  kept  at  least  4  feet 
below  the  crest  of  the  parapet  of  the  work,  that  the  assail- 
ants, when  on  the  glacis,  may  not  have  the  power  of  firing 
into  the  work. 

The  outer  edge  of  the  superior  slope  is  called  the 
"  exterior  crest,"  whilst  the  inner  (and  upper)  edge  of  the 
same  slope  is  called  the  "  interior  crest,"  or  the  "  crest " 
of  the  parapet. 

A  step,  called  a  "  banquette,"  is  placed  at  the  foot  of 
the  interior  slope,  and  from  4  feet  3  inches  to  4  feet  6 
inches  below  the  crest,  in  order  to  enable  the  defenders  to 
fire  with  ease  over  the  parapet,  and  in  the  direction  of  its 
superior  slope. 

The  terreplein,  or  tread  of  the  banquette,  is  made  3 
feet  wide  for  one  rank  of  men,  and  4  feet  wide  if  intended 
for  two  ranks.  In  order  that  the  men  on  it  may  descend 
backwards  with  ease,  there  is  a  gentle*  slope  for  that 
purpose,  having  a  base  equal  to  twice  the  height  of  the 
banquette. 

The  ditch  is  not  excavated  immediately  at  the  foot  of 
the  exterior  slope  of  the  parapet,  but  at  a  distance  from  it, 
varying  from  1  to  4  feet,  according  to  the  adhesiveness  of 
the  soil.  This  space  of  unmoved  earth  is  called  the  berme, 
and  it  is  requisite  both  to  remove  the  pressure  of  the  par- 
apet from  the  immediate  edge  of  the  ditch,  and  to  facili- 

*  If  the  parapet  has  a  greater  command  than  8  feet,  this  convenience  is  re- 
linquished on  account  of  the  great  space  occupied  by  it,  and  the  banquette  is 
ascended  by  steps. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  101 

tate  the  construction  and  repair  of  the  parapet.  A  berme 
has  the  defect  of  affording  an  intermediate  landing-place 
on  which  the  assailants  may  form  ;  and  although  it  may 
be  occupied  by  obstacles,  these  require  additional  labor, 
and  may  be  destroyed  by  cannon ;  yet  a  berme  can  scarcely 
be  dispensed  with  unless  the  earth  is  very  adhesive,  and 
that  the  parapet  is  not  more  than  8  feet  high. 

The  berme,  in  most  cases,  may  be  cut  away  after  the 
parapet  has  had  two  or  three  days  to  settle. 

The  ditch  will  not  be  an  effective  obstacle  if  less  than 
6  feet  in  depth,  and  for  the  reason  given,  it  is  not  made 
deeper  than  12  feet. 

The  sides  of  the  ditch  being  of  unmoved  earth,  they 
will  support  themselves,  without  revetment,  at  a  steeper 
slope  than  those  of  the  parapet ;  and  as  the  counterscarp 
has  not  the  weight  of  the  parapet  to  resist,  and  is  not 
exposed  to  fire,  it  may,  generally,  be  made  steeper  than 
the  escarp. 

The  slopes  of  both  vary  from  a  base  equal  to  the  height 
to  a  base  of  one  quarter  of  the  height. 

To  find  the  breadth  of  the  ditch,  (of  the  usual  shape,) 
divide  the  area  of  a  profile  of  the  parapet  by  the  intended  * 
depth  of  the  ditch,  and  the  quotient  is  the  mean  breadth 
of  the  latter  ;  to  this,  add  half  the  sum  of  the  bases  of  the 
escarp  and  counterscarp  slopes  for  the  breadth  at  top,  and 
deduct  the  same  half  sum  for  the  breadth  at  bottom. 

The  best  shape  for  an  unfianked  ditch  is  one  having  a 
triangular  section,  as  it  does  not  permit  the  assailants  to 
form  at  the  bottom  ;  and  moreover,  with  an  equal  depth 
and  area  of  section,  it  may  be  made  wider  at  top  than  a 
trapezoid  would  be  ;  by  which  means  the  superior  slope 
of  the  parapet  can  be  directed  to  the  counterscarp  without 

*  This  is  determined  chiefly  by  tho  nature  of  the  soil  and  the  size  of  the 
parapet. 


102  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

too  much  increasing  the  plongee,  or  without  raising  the 
counterscarp  by  a  glacis. 

To  find  the  breadth  of  a  ditch  having  a  triangular  sec- 
tion, divide  the  area  of  a  profile  of  the  parapet  by  half 
the  given  depth  of  ditch,  and  the  quotient  is  the  required 
breadth  at  top  ;  the  sides  may  evidently  have  any  given 
inclinations  to  the  horizon  consistently  with  the  given 
breadth,  depth,  and  area  of  a  transverse  section. 


THE    OUTLINES    OF    FIELD    WORKS. 

The  direction  which  a  parapet  is  made  to  assume  in 
order  to  enclose,  or  partially  enclose,  the  ground  to  be 
fortified,  is  called  the  outline  of  a  work. 

The  following  are  general  principles  to  be  observed  in 
determining  the  outlines  of  field  works  : 

1st.  There  should  be  a  reciprocal  defence  between  all 
the  parts  of  works,  so  that  the  ground  over  which  an 
enemy  must  pass  to  the  attack  should,  if  possible,  be  seen 
both  in  front  and  in  flank. 

2dly.  The  "  lines  of  defence "  must  not  exceed  the 
effective  range  of  muskets,  viz.,  about  160  yards. 

3dly.  Re-entering  *  angles  (viz.,  flanking  angles)  ought 
never  to  be  less  than  90°  and  seldom  more  than  100° ; 
for,  if  less  than  90°,  the  men  on  the  flanking  parts  would 
fire  against  each  other ;  and  if  more  than  100°,  the  fire  of 
the  flanking  parts  would  diverge  too  far  from  the  salient 
to  be  flanked. 

4thly.  The  salient  angles  of  works  should  be  as  obtuse 
as  possible,  and  never  less  than  60°,  otherwise  the  interior 
space  might  become  too  contracted  ;  the  angle  would  be 
so  sharp  as  to  be  quickly  worn  away  by  the  weather,  and 

*  In  both  these  cases  it  is  presumed  that  the  soldier  fires  (as  he  [generally 
does)  at  right  angles  to  the  parapet  behind  which  he  stands. 


Redan,    Crexnaillere,    Line    and    Star    Forts. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  103 

would  be  easily  battered  down;  also  the*  undefended 
sectoral  space  in  front  of  the  salient  angle  (which  is  the 
supplement  of  the  angle)  would  become  very  great ;  and 

5thly.  The  outline  of  a  field  work  should  be  propor- 
tioned in  length  to  the  number  of  men  and  guns  intended 
for  its  defence.  One  man  occupies  a  space  of  three  feet. 

The  names  of  the  works  most  commonly  employed  in 
field  fortification  are  redans,  single,  double,  and  triple ; 
redans  with  auxiliary  fianks  ;  lunettes,  redoubts,  star 
forts,  bastioned  and  demi-bastioned  forts,  block-houses, 
and  works  used  mostly  for  lines  of  intrenchment,  such  as 
tenailles  and  cremailleres. 

The  REDAN  is  a  work  consisting  of  two  faces,  which 
form  with  each  other  a  salient  angle,  the  rear  being 
open.  When  the  faces  are  not  more  than  about  20  yards 
in  length,  the  work  is  sometimes  called  a  fleche. 

The  redan  is  in  the  most  advantageous  position  when, 
the  ground  before  the  salient  angle,  and  approaches  to  the 
gorge,  are  inaccessible,  or  when  the  work  can  be  sup^ 
ported  by  troops ;  for  example,  when,  with  obstacles  in 
its  front,  it  is  employed  as  an  advanced  work  to  defend 
hollow  ground  which  cannot  be  seen  from  the  principal 
work — to  protect  a  bridge,  a  dam,  a  road,  a  defile,  or  to 
cover  a  guard,  an  advanced  post,  &c. 

The  weak  points  of  this  work  are  :  that  it  has  an  open 
gorge,  and  that  its  ditch,  and  the  ground  in  front  of  the 
salient  angle,  are  undefended  either  by  direct  or  flanking 
fire. 

On  account  of  its  having  an  open  gorge,  it  is  seldom 
advisable  to  construct  a  redan  as  an  isolated  work ;  its 
rear  should  be  exposed  to  the  fire  of  some  collateral  work, 

*  Undefended  by  direct  fire.  To  prevent  the  enemy  from  approaching  tho 
work  on  these  undefended  sectors  the  salients  should  be  directed  towards  somo 
natural  obstacle,  such  as  a  marsh,  &c. ;  or  if  this  cannot  bo  done,  then  artificial 
obstacles  should  be  disposed  in  their  front. 


104:  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

or  have  free  communication  with  a  body  of  troops  in  its 
rear,  to  whom  it  may  form  an  advanced  post,  or  outwork ; 
otherwise  the  faces  should  terminate  on  a  river,  a  marsh, 
or  any  inaccessible  ground,  which  would  prevent  it  from 
being  turned. 

The  first  defect,  viz.,  that  of  having  an  open  gorge, 
may  be  remedied  in  a  slight  degree  by  placing  along  the 
gorge  abatis,  trous  de  loup,  &c.,  (or  palisades,  if  time  and 
materials  abound ;)  as  for  the  second  defect,  a  direct  fire 
may  be  brought  in  front  of  the  salient  either  by  rounding 
the  latter,  or  by  cutting  off  the  angle  by  a  short  face  not 
less  than  6  yards  long. 

A  flanking  fire  may  be  procured  for  the  ditch  and  sa- 
lients, by  forming  auxiliary  flanks,  which  may  be  placed 
either  towards  the  middle  or  at  the  extremities  of  the 
faces ;  such  a  flank  ought  not  to  be  less  than  12  yards 
long,  that  there  may  be,  at  least,  12  men  firing  from  it. 

DOUBLE  REDANS  consist  of  two  redans  joined  together, 
their  exterior  faces  being  generally  longer  than  the  others : 
the  French  call  a  work  of  this  kind  a  queue  d'  hyronde. 

A  TRIPLE  RED  AN  consists  of  three  redans  joined  to- 
gether, the  exterior  faces  of  these  are  also,  in  general, 
longer  than  the  others. 

A  LUNETTE  is  a  large  redan  with  flanks  parallel  or 
nearly  parallel  to  the  capital ;  as  a  general  rule,  the  flanks 
are  traced  perpendicularly  to  the  intended  line  of  fire,  for 
the  purpose  of  bringing  on  certain  spots  a  more  direct 
fire  than  could  be  made  from  the  faces  of  the  work. 

It  is  often  desirable  to  secure  the  gorges  of  these  works 
against  surprise ;  this  may  be  done  by  disposing  across 
the  gorge  a  single  or  double  row  of  palisades,  or  a  stock- 
ade-work, in  the  form  of  a  front  fortification  or  of  a  te- 
naille :  there  should  be  a  banquette  to  it,  that  the  defenders 
may  have  a  command  over  the  assailants,  and  a  ditch  to 


FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS.  105 

prevent  the  enemy  from  getting  close,  and  cutting,  burn- 
ing, or  blowing  down  the  obstacle.  Trous  de  loup, 
abatis,  and  chevaux-de-frise  are  sometimes  disposed 
across  the  gorge  for  the  same  purpose. 

A  REDOUBT  is  a  closed  work,  the  parapet  of  which  does 
not  form  re-entering  angles  ;  it  may  be  quadrilateral, 
polygonal,  or  circular. 

Circular  redoubts,  although  they  have  no  undefended 
sectors,  and  enclose  a  greater  space  than  any  other  re- 
doubt with  an  equal  length  of  parapet,  are  seldom  formed 
on  account  of  the  difficulty  of  their  construction,  and  also 
because  their  ditches  are  incapable  of  any  flanking  de- 
fence ;  the  lines  of  fire  diverging  from  the  parapet,  any 
one  spot  on  the  ground  is  very  imperfectly  defended. 

A  four-sided  figure  is  the  best  and  most  usual  form 
for  a  redoubt,  because  it  is  of  simple  construction ;  the 
ditches  are  more  easily  flanked,  and  there  are  not  so 
many  points  of  attack  as  in  a  redoubt  of  a  greater  num- 
ber of  angles.  Redoubts,  being  closed  works,  are  better 
calculated  to  stand  detached  than  redans  or  lunettes,  and 
are,  therefore,  constructed  when  a  small  work  is  required 
without  any  immediate  protection  from  the  gorge — the 
armed  party  being  strong  enough  to  complete  and  man  a 
four-sided  redoubt,  each  side  of  which  is  not  less  than  15 
yards  long. 

The  size  depends  on  the  number  of  men  who  are  to 
garrison  it,  and  upon  the  number  of  guns  which  it  is  to 
contain ;  also  upon  the  length  of  time  during  which  it  is 
to  be  occupied  :  this  may  be  for  a  few  hours  only,  (as  on 
a  field  of  battle,)  or  for  a  period  of  weeks  or  months. 

If  wanted  only  for  a  few  hours,  it  will  be  sufficient  to 
allow  3  feet  in  length  of  parapet  for  every  man  of  the  de- 
tachment ;  or  for  every  two  men,  if  they  are  to  be  formed 
in  double  rank.  If  guns  are  to  be  placed  in  the  work,  15 
5* 


106  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

feet  of  parapet  must  be  given  to  each,  in  order  that  the 
gunners  may  have  sufficient  room  on  each  side  to  work  it. 

But  when  the  redoubt  is  destined  to  contain  a  body  of 
men  for  a  considerable  length  of  time,  it  becomes  neces- 
sary to  have  room  for  them  to  lie  down  within  the  ban- 
quette with  their  arms  and  packs ;  supposing  one-third  to 
be  on  guard,  patrolling,  &c.,  two  square  yards,  in  addi- 
tion to  the  slope  of  the  banquette,  are  sufficient  for  each 
man,  and  36  square  yards  for  each  gun  with  its  appoint- 
ments. 

The  rule,  consequently,  for  a  square  redoubt  is :  to 
multiply  the  given  number  of  men  by  2,  and  the  number 
of  guns  by  36,  for  the  number  of  square  yards  which  the 
work  ought  to  contain  within  the  foot  of  its  banquette, 
the  square  root  of  the  product  will  be  the  length  in  yards 
of  the  side  of  the  square  forming  that  area  ;  adding  to  this 
result  the  breadth  of  two  interior  slopes,  and  of  2  ban- 
quettes with  their  slopes,  (about  7  yards  altogether,)  we 
shall  have  the  side  of  the  square  formed  by  the  crest  of 
the  parapet. 

A  square  redoubt  ought  not  to  be  traced  with  less 
extent  of  side  than  15  yards  ;  for,  by  employing  the  cal- 
culation explained  above,  it  will  be  found  that  such  a 
work  is  only  j  ust  sufficient  to  contain  the  men  necessary 
for  its  defence  :  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  unusual  to  make 
a  square  redoubt  with  a  longer  side  than  40  yards,  because 
it  would  require  a  garrison  more  suitable  to  a  work  of  a 
stronger  outline. 

The  imperfections  of  redoubts  are,  that  they  are  en- 
tirely without  a  flanking  fire  for  the  defence  of  the  ground 
in  front  of  their  faces,  also  that  their  ditches  and  the  sec- 
toral spaces  before  the  angles  are  without  any  fire  what- 
ever for  their  defence. 

A  flanking  defence  for  the  ditches  may  be  obtained  by 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS..  107 

placing  palisade  or  stockade  caponnieres  in  them,  either 
at  the  angles  or  in  the  middle  of  the  faces  ;  by  tambours 
in  a  like  position,  or  by  loop-holed  galleries  under  the 
counterscarp  at  the  salients  of  the  work. 

The  want  of  a  fire  in  the  directions  of  the  capitals  may 
be  remedied,  as  in  the  redan,  by  cutting  off  an  angle  by 
a  short  face,  by  making  it  curved,  or  by  tracing  a  portion 
of  the  line  of  parapet  en  cremaillere  ;  viz.,  by  disposing  it 
in  a  succession  of  salient  and  re-entering  angles,  the  sides 
of  which  are  alternately  parallel  to  the  capital :  this  con- 
struction is,  however,  very  difficult,  and  causes  inconven- 
ient variations  in  the  thickness  and  height  of  the  parapet. 

A  ditch  caponniere  is  an  oblong  structure  formed  with 
palisades,  or  with  stockade  work,  loopholed,  and  roofed 
over  with  planks  and  earth  to  secure  the  men  from  the 
effects  of  shells,  and  a  plunging  fire  from  the  counterscarp. 
It  ought,  if  possible,  to  be  flanked  with  musketry,  to  pre- 
vent an  enemy  from  closing  on  it,  and  getting  under 
cover. 

The  best  position  for  a  caponniere  in  the  ditch  of  a  re- 
doubt is  at  the  salient  angle,  as  then  one  caponniere  flanks 
two  branches  of  the  ditch.  It  should  be  separated  from 
the  counterscarp  by  an  enlargement  of  the  ditch,  to  pre- 
vent an  enemy  from  using  it  as  a  bridge  to  cross  the 
ditch,  and  it  ought  to  have  a  wicket  to  allow  of  sallies 
into  the  ditch. 

The  bottom  or  sole  of  the  caponniere  may,  sometimes 
with  advantage,  be  sunk  3  or  4  feet  below  the  bottom  of 
the  ditch,  in  order  that  the  fire  from  the  loopholes  may 
graze  along  it,  and  prevent  an  enemy  from  closing  on 
them  ;  by  this  construction,  and  by  making  the  roof  con- 
vex, it  becomes  more  difficult  for  him  to  use  the  capon- 
niere as  a  bridge  to  pass  the  ditch. 

To  lessen  the  destructive  effect  of  shells,  traverses 


108  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

should  be  placed  in  all  closed  works  when  those  missiles 
are  likely  to  be  employed  against  them. 

From  the  interior  to  the  exterior  of  closed  works 
there  must  be  a  passage  through  the  parapet,  protected 
by  a  traverse  or  by  stockade  work,  and  the  traverse 
should  extend  far  enough  on  each  side  of  the  passage  to 
intercept  shot  which  might  enter  it  obliquely.  The  ditch 
is  crossed  by  a  bridge  which  is  conveniently  formed  of 
loose  planks  and  beams,  because,  in  case  of  attack,  they 
can  be  quickly  taken  up  and  used  to  barricade  the  passage. 
When  the  ditch  is  more  than  twelve  feet  wide,  a  trestle 
must  be  placed  in  the  middle  to  support  the  beams  or 
sleepers. 

When  rough  timber  only  can  be  procured,  stout 
straight  limbs  of  trees  must  be  selected  for  the  sleepers, 
which  may  be  covered  with  strong  hurdles,  (or  brush- 
wood,) over  which  a  layer  of  sods  and  then  a  small  quan- 
tity of  gravel  may  be  laid. 

A  STAR  FORT  is  a  closed  work,  the  parapet  of  which 
forms  several  acute  salient  angles  and  obtuse  re-entering 
angles,  giving  it  a  form  like  the  usual  representation  of  a 
star. 

It  has  been  seen  that  redoubts  are  defended  only  by 
direct  fire,  and  that  without  some  contrivance  for  affording 
flanking  fire,  the  sectors  at  the  salients,  as  well  as  the 
ditches,  are  absolutely  undefended.  Star  forts,  consisting 
of  re-entering  as  well  as  salient  angles,  are  intended  to 
obviate  that  defect  in  some  degree.  They  may  be  con- 
structed either  upon  an  exterior  or  interior  polygon.  If 
ground  is  to  be  fortified  which  does  not  admit  the  possi- 
bility of  working  outwards,  as  an  island  fo  instance,  a 
polygon  is  traced  to  suit  the  form  of  the  ground ;  the 
sides  of  the  polygon  are  bisected  by  perpendiculars  drawn 
inwards,  and  the  faces  of  the  star  fort  are  drawn  from  the 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  109 

angles  of  the  polygon  to  the  inner  extremities  of  the  per- 
pendiculars :  this  is  called  fortifying  upon  the  exterior 
polygon. 

The  length  of  the  perpendicular  *  in  a  square,  penta- 
gon, hexagon,  and  octagon,  should  be  respectively  one- 
eighth,  one-fifth,  one-fourth,  and  one-third  of  the  side,  in 
order  that  the  flanking  angles  may  approach  as  near  as 
possible  to  right  angles,  without  making  the  salient  angles 
less  than  60°.  When  the  polygon  is  irregular,  the  length 
of  the  perpendiculars  must  be  determined  by  the  angles 
nearest  to  them. 

Again,  it  may  be  required  to  surround  a  building 
with  a  star  fort  in  such  a  position  that  the  work  could 
not  be  traced  inwards  ;  then,  a  polygon  surrounding  the 
building  must  be  laid  down,  and  on  each  of  its  sides  an 
equilateral  triangle  must  be  formed  towards  the  exterior. 

If  this  construction  be  applied  to  a  dodecagon,  it  will 
be  found  that  the  re-entering  angles  are  exactly  right  an- 
gles ;  in  an  octagonal  fort  the  re-entering  or  flanking  angles 
are  each  equal  to  105°. 

The  necessity  for  employing  a  polygon  superior  to  an 
octagon  will  rarely  occur  ;  yet  with  irregular  figures  it 
may  happen  that  some  of  the  angles  are  equal,  or  nearly 
so,  to  those  of  regular  polygons  of  more  than  twelve 
sides. 

It  is  necessary  to  fix  some  limit  as  a  minimum  to  the 
length  of  face  for  these  works ;  this  depends  on  the  dis- 
tance at  which  a  shot  fired  from  the  parapet  of  a  face 
would  reach  the  level  of  the  ground ;  for  it  is  evident 
that  if  the  face  be  made  less  than  that  distance,  the  enemy, 
arrived  at  the  rounding  of  the  counterscarp,  will  be  more 
or  less  secure  from  the  fire  of  the  adjoining  face.  If  we 

*  The  lengths  given  are  merely  approximations  in  the  form  of  tho  nearest 
simple  fraction  of  the  side. 


110  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

suppose  a  man  to  fire  along  the  superior  slope  of  a  para- 
pet with  a  plongee  of  one-sixth,  and  that  the  work  has  a 
command  of  seven  and  a  half  feet,  we  have  by  similar 
triangles, 

1  :  6  :  :  74  (the  command)  :  45 ; 

the  distance,  in  feet,  at  which  the  shot  would  reach  the 
level  of  the  ground. 

The  face  should,  therefore,  not  be  less  than  45  feet, 
viz.,  15  yards.  If  the  bottom  of  the  ditch  on  any  face  is 
to  be  defended  by  the  fire  of  the  next  face,  a  still  greater 
length  is  required :  to  find  this,  we  have  the  proportion 
1:6::  the  relief  (the  height  of  the  crest  of  the  parapet 
above  the  bottom  of  the  ditch)  :  the  distance  at  which  a 
shot  would  reach  the  bottom  of  the  ditch ;  this  distance 
is  30  yards  when  the  command  of  the  work  and  depth  of 
its  ditch  are  both  seven  and  a  half  feet.  The  length  of 
the  faces  depends  also  upon  the  number  of  guns  to  be 
placed  behind  the  parapet,  and  upon  the  strength  of  the 
garrison  ;  but  35  yards  may  be  considered  as  the  great- 
est length  of  face,  for  the  troops  required  to  defend  a  star 
fort  having  a  longer  face  would  be  sufficient  to  construct 
and  defend  a  fort  of  a  better  tracing. 

The  construction  of  star  forts  is  attended  with  some 
trouble,  particularly  if  the  ground  is  uneven  :  such  works 
present  at  their  acute  salient  angles  numerous  points  of 
attack  :  the  faces  and  salients  are  without  flanking  defence 
when  the  polygon  is  inferior  to  an  octagon,  and  even  in 
this  case  such  defence  is  imperfect :  the  ditches  are  unde- 
fended, unless  the  faces  are  made  unreasonably  long ;  the 
line  of  parapet  to  be  manned  is  very  great,  when  compared 
with  the  interior  space,  and  is  exposed  to  be  enfiladed  in 
all  directions. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  Ill 


CONSTRUCTIONS.  . 

The  following  are  convenient  methods  of  tracing  on 
the  ground  the  most  useful  polygonal  redoubts  and  star 
forts  : 

For  a  pentagonal  redoubt :  on  a  base  equal  to  one-fifth 
of  the  perimeter,  or  length  of  the  parapet,  form  an  isos, 
celes  triangle,  of  which  each  of  the  equal  sides  is  one- 
third  of  the  perimeter,  and  on  each  side  of  this  triangle  as 
a  base  form  another  isosceles  triangle  with  its  (equal) 
sides,  each  equal  to  the  side  of  the  pentagon,  or  first  base. 

For  a  hexagonal  redoubt :  trace  an  equilateral  triangle, 
the  side  of  which  is  in  length  three  times  that  of  the  re- 
doubt; trisect  each  side,  and  join  the  nearest  outer  ex- 
tremities of  the  centre  portions :  these  lines,  with  those 
which  join  their  extremities,  will  constitute  the  hexagonal 
redoubt  required. 

For  a  hexagonal  star  fort :  trace  an  equilateral  triangle 
on  a  base  equal  to  one-fourth  of  the  whole  length  of  the 
parapet ;  trisect  each  side,  and  form  equilateral  triangles 
on  the  three  centre  portions.  These  will  complete  the 
figure. 

For  an  octagonal  redoubt :  trace  a  square  on  a  side 
equal  to  three-tenths  of  the  whole  length  of  parapet  of  the 
redoubt ;  and  from  the  angles  of  the  square  measure  on 
each  side  half  the  diagonal ;  the  points  being  joined,  the 
magistral  line  is  traced. 

For  an  octagonal  star  fort :  trace  a  square  on  a  base 
equal  to  three-twentieths  of  the  whole  length  of  the  parapet 
of  the  star  fort ;  with  this  square  form  an  octagon  as  before, 
and  on  each  of  its  sides  trace  an  equilateral  triangle. 

FORTS  WITH  BASTIONS  are  the  most  perfect  of  closed 
field  works,  as  it  is  evident  that  they  possess  all  the  ad- 


112  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

vantages  of  mutual  defence  afforded  by  the  corresponding 
works  in  permanent  fortifications ;  they  are  traced  simi- 
larly to  these  last,  although  rarely  on  a  polygon  superior 
to  a  pentagon ;  as,  however,  their  defence  mainly  depends 
on  the  fire  of  common  muskets,  their  lines  of  defence  must 
not  exceed  the  effective  range  of  such  arms,  or  about  160 
yards,  and  therefore  the  side  of  the  polygon  on  which 
they  are  constructed  must  not  exceed  200  yards  in  length. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  side  of  the  polygon  should  not 
be  less  than  120  yards  in  length  ;  since,  if  it  were  so,  the 
bastions  would  be  too  small,  and  the  flanks  and  curtain 
too  short  for  the  defence  required  from  them. 

Bastioned  forts  should  have  within  them  a  good  re- 
duit,  in  order  to  give  confidence  to  the  garrison,  and  secure 
its  retreat :  such  a  reduit  should  have  a  command  of  four 
or  five  feet  over  every  part  of  the  main  work,  in  order 
that  the  enemy,  having  gained  the  parapet  of  the  latter, 
may  not  fire  from  thence  into  the  reduit. 

The  reduit  may  either  conform  to  the  outline  of  the 
fort,  or  it  may  be  a  simple  redoubt,  a  blockhouse,  or  a 
tower  of  brick  or  stone,  so  traced  that  the  defenders  may 
fire  into  the  bastions  of  the  fort,  these  being  the  points  at 
which  an  enemy  is  most  likely  to  force  an  entrance. 

As  bastioned  forts  require  a  strong  garrison,  they  are 
constructed  when  it  is  intended  to  occupy  a  point  of  im- 
portance for  a  considerable  time,  and,  therefore,  the  reduit 
often  forms,  at  the  same  time,  the  barrack  of  the  garrison. 

In  order  to  throw  an  additional  fire  towards  the  direc- 
tion of  the  salients,  the  curtain  is  sometimes  broken  in 
the  prolongation  of  the  lines  of  defence  ;  but  in  order  that 
some  fire  may  be  directed  immediately  in  front,  a  portion 
may  be  formed  in  a  line  parallel  to  the  original  curtain, 
and  equal  to  about  one-third  of  its  length  ;  the  two  bri- 
sures  should  form  with  each  other  a  re-entering  rather 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  113 

than  a  salient  angle,  in  order  that  there  may  be  no  dead 
spaces  in  the  ditch. 

The  counterscarp  of  the  ditch  may  be  drawn  either  to 
the  shoulder  angles  of  the  bastions,  as  in  permanent  forti- 
fication, or  parallel  to  the  faces,  flanks,  and  curtain ;  the 
latter  method  is  generally  preferable,  as  it  saves  time  and 
labor  ;  in  this  case,  however,  the  counterscarp  of  one  flank 
would  conceal  the  ditch  of  the  nearest  face  from  the  fire 
of  the  opposite  flank  ;  this  counterscarp  ought,  therefore, 
in  part,  to  be  cut  away  in  an  inclined  plane,  or  ramp, 
parallel  to,  or  coinciding  with,  the  line  of  fire  from  that 
flank. 

DEMI-BASTIONED  FORTS,  like  those  with  bastions,  are 
traced  by  letting  fall  a  perpendicular  from  the  middle  of 
each  exterior  side,  and  drawing  lines  of  defence ;  but  each 
front  has  only  one  flank,  every  alternate  face  extending 
from  the  angle  of  the  polygon  to  the  inner  extremity  of 
that  flank,  and  coinciding  with  the  line  of  defence  through- 
out its  entire  length ;  such  works  have  the  defect  of  af- 
fording a  regular  flanking  defence  only  to  every  alternate 
face  ;  as  the  short  face  of  each  front  receives  a  very  oblique 
and  imperfect  flanking  defence  from  the  collateral  long 
face. 

LOOPHOLES  are  narrow  rectangular  openings  made  in 
walls  of  masonry  or  wood,  through  which  to  direct  a  fire 
of  musketry.  In  walls  of  two  feet  or  two  and  a  half  feet 
thick  they  are  about  nine  inches  high  by  fifteen  inches 
wide  on  the  inside,  and  twenty  inches  high  by  four  inches 
wide  on  the  outside.  In  timber  six  or  eight  inches  thick 
they  are  eight  inches  wide  inside  and  three  inches  outside, 
the  height  being  twelve  inches. 

They  are  made  wider  on  the  inside  than  on  the  out- 
side, because,  thus  formed,  they  afford  better  cover  for 
the  men  behind  them  ;  they  arc  placed  at  not  less  than 


114  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

three  feet  asunder,  that  the  wall  may  not  be  too  much 
weakened,  and  that  the  men  firing  through  them  may  not 
be  crowded ;  they  are  made  from  four  feet  to  four  and  a 
quarter  feet  above  the  banquette  or  ground  on  which  the 
men  stand  to  fire  through  them. 

STOCKADE  WORK  is  a  wall  composed  of  trunks  of  trees, 
or  rough  pieces  of  timber  placed  upright  in  the  ground ; 
they  are  made  to  touch  each  other,  and  loopholes  are  cut 
through  them ;  if  composed  of  trees,  they  ought  to  be 
squared,  that  the  parts  in  contact  may  be  of  the  same 
thickness  as  the  rest  of  the  wall. 

A  TAMBOUR  is  an  enclosure  of  palisades  or  stockade 
work,  sometimes  with  a  ditch  and  banquette,  and  of  any 
form  that  may  be  necessary  to  afford  the  defence  re- 
quired. 

BLOCKHOUSES  are  covered  field  works,  generally  rec- 
tangular ;  the  walls  are  formed  of  trunks  of  trees,  and 
above  the  timbers  of  the  roof  there  is,  usually,  a  bed  of 
earth,  three  or  four  feet  thick. 

In  mountainous  and  well-wooded  countries  blockhouses 
are  the  best  description  of  field  works,  because  the  enemy 
cannot  easily  bring  cannon  to  destroy  them.  It  is  very 
difficult  in  mountainous  countries  to  find  ground  where 
works  may  be  constructed  free  from  the  defect  of  being 
commanded,  and  consequently  open  works  are  there  com- 
paratively useless. 

Blockhouses  are  of  great  advantage  as  reduits  in  situ- 
ations where  it  is  difficult  to  defilade  the  interiors  of  works 
from  commanding  heights,  more  especially  since  they  may 
serve  as  barracks  for  the  troops  ;  in  such  a  case  the  bed* 
steads,  arranged  on  each  side,  are  used  as  banquettes,  and 
the  loopholes  are  made  four  feet  above  them. 

A  blockhouse  to  resist  musketry  should  be  composed 
of  trees,  squared  so  that  the  parts  in  contact  may  be  at 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  115 

least  six  inches  thick,  that  being  the  depth  to  which  a  mus- 
ket ball  will  penetrate  in  fir.  In  order  to  resist  artillery, 
two  rows  of  trees  (or  of  stockades)  are  placed  vertically  in 
the  ground,  with  an  interval  between  them  from  three  to 
six  feet  wide,  which  is  filled  with  earth  well  rammed.  The 
trees  or  logs  should  be  eleven  or  twelve  feet  long,  so  that 
they  may  be  planted  at  least  three  feet  in  the  ground,  and 
allow  the  interior  of  the  blockhouse  to  be  eight  or  nine 
feet  high  ;  it  should  also  be  from  eighteen  to  twenty-four 
feet  wide  in  the  interior. 

The  earth  used  to  render  the  covering  shell-proof  may 
be  shaped  like  a  small  parapet,  and  from  this  an  additional 
fire  (of  musketry)  may  be  obtained ;  the  access  to  this  upper 
parapet  is  through  a  trap-door  in  the  roof.  To  prevent  the 
blockhouse  from  being  set  on  fire,  a  ditch  should  be  dug 
round  it,  leaving  a  berme  of  eight  or  ten  feet,  and  on  this 
the  earth  is  piled  up  against  the  wood  as  high  as  the  loop- 
holes. 

Sometimes  blockhouses  are  constructed  in  the  form  of 
a  cross,  when  the  flanking  fire  thus  obtained  on  their  faces 
renders  them  much  more  powerful ;  they  are  also,  occa- 
sionally, built  with  an  upper  story,  the  angles  of  which 
should  project  over  the  sides  of  the  lower  story  ;  the  foot 
of  the  lower  walls  may  thus  be  defended  by  the  fire  from 
above. 

An  ordinary  dwelling-house,  with  thick  masonry  walls, 
may  be  formed  into  a  blockhouse  by  pulling  down  the 
upper  stories,  and  heaping  a  mass  of  the  materials,  three 
or  four  feet  in  thickness,  over  the  ceiling  of  the  lower 
rooms  ;  earth  or  rubbish  should  also  be  placed  about  the 
house  as  high  as  the  loopholes. 


116  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 


DEFILADING    OF    FIELD    WORKS. 

To  DEFILADE  a  work  from  a  height  is  so  to  regulate  the 
direction  and  elevation  of  the  parapets  or  covering  masses, 
that  its  interior  may  be  screened  from  the  view  of  an 
enemy  on  the  heights. 

A  PLANE  OF  SIGHT  is  an  imaginary  plane  supposed  to 
pass  through  the  summit  of  the  height  from  which  the 
work  is  to  be  defiladed,  and  the  terreplein  of  the  work. 

A  PLANE  OF  DEFILADE  is  a  plane  supposed  to  pass 
through  the  crest  of  the  parapet  of  the  work  parallel 
to  the  plane  of  sight. 

In  many  situations  it  is  practicable  (and  then  it  is  the 
easier  method)  to  defilade  the  faces  or  longest  branches 
of  a  work  by  the  tracing ;  viz.,  by  directing  them  on 
marshes,  rivers,  lakes,  precipices,  hollows,  &c.,  where 
batteries  cannot  be  erected,  or  at  worst,  on  points  of  the 
height  not  nearer  than  800  *  yards  to  the  work.  Also  the 
choice  of  the  outline  of  the  work  should  be  attended  to  ; 
for  among  the  different  tracings  by  which  the  same  object 
may  be  attained,  some  will  be  more  easy  to  defilade  than 
others. 

When  a  work  is  thrown  up  in  front  of  a  height,  it 
is  the  more  difficult  to  defilade  in  proportion  to  its  depth ; 
it  should,  therefore,  have  an  oblong  form,  and  its  longest 
faces  should  be  traced  parallel  to  the  height.  If,  for  in- 
stance,  the  work  were  a  rectangular  redoubt,  the  long 
faces  should  be  traced  parallel  to  the  height,  and  the  short 
ones  be  directed  on  it. 

An  open  work  will  be  defiladed  when  the  plane  of  de- 

*  Artillery  on  a  height,  even  of  120  feet,  at  800  yards  distance  from  a  work, 
has  no  more  advantage,  in  respect  of  a  plunging  fire,  than  if  it  were  on  a  level 
-with  the  rock;  for  in  both  cases  it  must  be  elevated  about  iy4  degree  to  attain 
this  range. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  117 

filement  passes  through  a  line  8  feet  above  the  ground  at 
its  gorge,  and  at  a  point  4  or  8  *  feet  above  the  command- 
ing hill,  according  as  the  work  is  to  be  defiladed  against 
artillery  or  musketry. 

It  is  usual  to  defilade  a  work  against  musketry  if  there 
are  heights  within  300  yards  of  it,  and  against  artillery, 
when  the  heights  are  not  farther  distant  than  800  yards. 

When  the  commanding  ground  is  not  occupied  by  the 
enemy,  the  work  may  be  defiladed  in  the  following  man- 
ner :  stretch  a  rope  between  two  poles  planted  in  the  line 
of  the  gorge  at  8  feet  above  the  ground ;  direct  visual 
rays  from  various  points  of  this  rope  to  the  top  of  a  pole 
placed  on  the  commanding  hill,  and  4  feet  high  if  the 
work  is  to  be  defiladed  against  artillery,  but  8  feet  if  it  is 
to  be  defiladed  against  musketry  ;  the  intersection  of  the 
rays  with  poles  planted  on  the  tracing  of  the  intended 
parapet,  will  indicate  the  height  to  which  the  parapet 
must  be  raised  in  order  that  its  defenders  may  be  situated 
under  the  plane  of  defilade ;  and  since  these  visual  rays 
represent  lines  of  fire  from  the  enemy's  position  on  the 
hill,  it  will  be  evident  that  a  parapet  whose  height  is  thus 
determined  will  defilade  the  interior  of  the  work. 

When  it  is  impossible  to  place  the  pole  on  the  com- 
manding ground,  the  following  method  must  be  adopted : 
along  the  gorge  of  the  intended  work  stretch  a  rope,  which 
is  to  be  4  feet  above  the  ground  if  the  work  is  to  be  de- 
filaded against  artillery,  and  1 J  feet  if  against  musketry ; 
in  rear  of  this  rope  at  any  convenient  distance  (about  5 
yards)  drive  two  pickets  into  the  ground,  and  upon  them 
raise  or  lower  a  cord  or  a  straight  edge  of  wood,  until  it 
is  in  the  same  plane  with  the  rope  at  the  gorge,  and  the 

*  A  field-gun  stands  about  3V2  feet  above  the  ground,  and  a  man  on  horse- 
back can  firo  about  1l/2  feet  above  the  ground;  therefore  4  and  8  are  taken  as 
the  nearest  whole  numbers  to  these  commands  respectively. 


118  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

top  of  the  height  from  which  the  work  is  to  be  defiladed  ; 
then  look  from  the  rear  cord  or  straight  edge  along  that 
at  the  gorge,  and  observe  where  the  line  of  sight  from 
thence  cuts  the  poles  raised  on  the  tracing  of  the  intended 
parapet ;  these  points  of  section  (indicating  the  position 
of  the  plane  of  sight)  may  be  marked  by  one  of  the  party ; 
lastly,  make  the  crest  of  the  parapet  4  feet  higher  than 
the  points  thus  found  if  the  work  is  to  be  defiladed  against 
cannon,  but  6J-  feet  higher  if  against  musketry.  I 

If  it  is  found  that,  by  this  process,  the  parapet  must 
have  more  than  12  feet  command  in  order  to  defilade  the 
work ;  the  parapet  must  be  raised  to  any  convenient 
height,  (suppose  10  or  12  feet,)  and  then,  in  order  to  defi- 
lade the  part  which  is  not  protected  by  the  parapet,  a 
traverse  must  be  erected,  or  the  terreplein  of  the  unpro- 
tected part  must  be  lowered,  or  both  of  these  steps  must 
be  taken  conjointly. 

In  defilading  a  tete  de  pont,  the  plane  of  defilade  should 
pass  8  feet  above  that  part  of  the  bridge  which  is  most 
remote  from  the  height. 

To  defilade  a  closed  work,  (or  one  with  a  parapet  both 
on  the  side  nearest  to  and  on  the  side  furthest  from  the 
height,)  unless  the  crests  on  both  those  sides  are  in  a 
plane  passing  8  feet  above  the  ground  which  the  enemy 
may  occupy,  in  front  and  in  rear,  a  parados  to  cover  the 
defenders  on  the  banquette  of  the  side  nearest  to  the 
height  from  reverse  fire,  is  indispensable ;  for  it  is  clear 
that  the  higher  the  parapet  nearest  to  a  commanding 
ground  is  raised  in  order  to  defilade  a  portion  of  the  whole 
of  the  interior  of  the  work,  the  more  will  the  defenders 
standing  on  the  banquette  of  that  parapet  be  elevated  above 
the  plane  of  defilement  of  the  parapet  furthest  from  the 
height,  (or  the  lower  one ;)  they  will,  consequently,  be- 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  119 

come  exposed  to  a  reverse  fire  directed  over  the  lower 
parapet. 

In  this  case,  therefore,  make  the  parapet  nearest  to 
the  commanding  ground  as  high  as  convenient,  and  so  as 
to  defilade  a  portion  (suppose  one-half)  of  the  interior : 
at  the  extremity  of  this  defiladed  portion,  and  (about) 
parallel  to  the  parapet,  raise  a  parados  high  enough  to  in- 
tercept visual  rays  directed  from  points  8  feet  above  the 
banquette  of  the  lower  parapet  to  4  or  8  feet  above  the 
height,  and  from  points  8  feet  above  the  banquette  of  the 
higher  parapet  to  points  8  feet  above  the  ground  in  front 
of  the  former  parapet. 

If  the  site  of  the  intended  redoubt  be  commanded  on 
opposite  sides,  the  work  will  be  defiladed  in  the  manner 
just  described,  excepting  that,  in  this  case,  both  the  par- 
apets being  commanded,  each  must  be  raised  high  enough 
to  cover  the  portion  of  the  work  between  it  and  the  trav- 
erse or  parados  from  the  opposite  height. 

Or  the  work  may  be  defiladed  thus :  the  magistral 
line  having  been  traced,  let  the  engineer  place  himself  at 
any  convenient  part  of  the  interior  with  his  eye  8  feet  from 
the  ground,  and  let  a  man  hold  up  a  measuring  rod  on  the 
tracing  line  between  the  engineer  and  each  hill ;  then  a 
visual  ray,  from  a  point  estimated  to  be  8  feet  above  each 
hill,  will  intersect  the  measuring  rods  in  points  through 
which  the  crests  of  the  parapets  should  pass.  The  place 
of  the  engineer  is  the  place  of  the  traverse  or  parados,  the 
height  of  which  is  determined,  as  before,  by  visual  rays 
crossing  each  other  from  points  4  or  8  feet  above  the  op- 
posite heights  to  points  8  feet  above  the  banquettes  most 
distant  from  the  heights. 

With  the  aid  of  a  plane  table,  the  plane  of  site  may 
be  readily  determined  thus :  let  the  upper  surface  of  the 
table  (which  should  be  near  the  surface  of  the  ground  in 


120  FIELD   FOETIFICATIOXS. 

rear  of  the  work)  be  placed  in  a  plane  touching  the  points 
of  command  :  the  intersections  of  that  surface  prolonged, 
with  the  poles  planted  at  the  angles  of  the  work,  will  de- 
termine as  man^  points  in  the  plane  of  site. 


PROFILING. 

The  proper  height  of  parapet  for  the  work  having  been 
determined,  (by  the  process  of  defilading,  if  necessary,) 
the  next  step  is  to  plant  pickets  on  the  faces,  flanks,  and 
angles  as  guides  to  the  workmen  in  giving  it  the  suitable 
dimensions  and  form.  Thus,  to  the  magistral  line  of  each 
face  and  flank,  trace  on  the  ground  perpendicularly  at  in- 
tervals, and  on  thqse  measure,  horizontally,  the  bases  of 
the  slopes  composing  the  profile  to  be  employed.  At  the 
points  thus  set  out  *  fix  poles  or  laths  perpendicularly  in 
the  ground,  and  saw  off  their  tops  at  the  height  which  the 
parapet  is  to  have  at  that  particular  part ;  nail  laths  to  the 
tops  of  these  poles  from  one  to  the  other  across  the  direc- 
tion of  the  intended  parapet ;  and  thus  there  will  be  ob- 
tained an  outline  of  the  slopes,  or  a  profile  of  the  parapet. 

For  the  profile  at  an  angle,  lay  a  rope  on  the  ground 
bisecting  that  angle,  and  produce  it  outwards  ;  drive  pick- 
ets along  this  rope  at  the  points  where  it  is  intersected  by 
the  prolongations  of  lines  joining  the  bases  of  the  profiles 
already  set  up  perpendicularly  to  the  adjoining  faces ; 
these  pickets  mark  the  bases  of  the  profiles  at  the  salient ; 
the  laths  may  then  be  set  up  as  before. 

When  the  salient  angle  is  60°,  the  breadth  of  the  base 
of  any  slope  measured  on  the  capital  will  be  equal  to  twice 
the  breadth  of  the  same  slope  taken  on  a  line  at  right 
angles  to  the  face. 

*  The  best  method  of  fixing  the  perpendicular  laths  is  to  drive  strong 
pickets  into  the  ground  at  the  required  points,  and  to  nail  to  them  the  laths, 
previously  cut  of  the  proper  length. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  121 


DISTRIBUTION    OF    THE    WORKING    PARTY. 

Divide  the  men  into  6  equal  parts,  3  of  which  are  to 
be  provided  with  pickaxes  and  shovels,  2  are  to  have 
shovels  only,  and  the  remainder  are  to  be  furnished  with 
rammers  only. 

The  party  is  then  to  be  marched  to  the  ground,  and 
the  men,  having  both  pickaxes  and  shovels,  (viz.  the  dig- 
gers,) are  to  be  stationed  6*  feet  apart  on  the  ground 
where  the  ditch  is  to  be  dug  along  the  berme  line,  and 
facing  the  work. 

The  excavation  of  the  ditch  is  now  begun,  the  men 
first  loosening  the  earth  with  their  pickaxes,  and  then 
shovelling  it  to  the  place  where  the  parapet  is  to  stand ; 
here  the  rest  of  the  party  are  posted,  and  as  the  earth  is 
thrown  up  to  them,  the  men  with  shovels  spread  it  in 
layers,  while  the  remainder  with  their  rammers,  beat  it 
down  to  a  firm  mass ;  and  as  the  parapet  is  raised  they 
give  it  the  form  indicated  by  the  profiles. 

The  profiles  may  be  made  of  3  inch  plank,  ripped  up 
into  laths  three-quarters  of  an  inch  thick. 

The  work  may  be  drained,  if  requisite,  with  fascines 
of  stout  rods,  or  with  loose  stones  having  brushwood  or 
heather  laid  over  them  ;  these  are  placed  in  trenches  dug 
across  the  ground  on  which  the  parapet  is  to  be  raised. 

In  excavating  ditches  and  trenches,  the  slopes  are 
made  after  the  ditch  or  trench  is  finished,  the  sides  being 
at  first  left  in  steps  ;  the  crest  of  the  slope  is  marked  out, 
and  then  small  sections  are  cut,  here  and  there,  according 
to  the  proper  form  of  the  finished  profile  :  finally,  the  in- 

*  The  diggers  must  not  be  placed  nearer  to  each  other  than  4£feet;  but 
if  the  party  is  strong,  another  row  of  diggers  may  be  employed  at  the  counter- 
scarp, with  their  backs  to  the  work ;  these  throw  the  earth  towards  the  middle 
of  the  space  marked  out  for  the  breadth  of  the  ditch, 

G 


122  FIELD   FOBTIFICATIONS. 

termediate  earth  is  cut  away  between  these  small  sec- 
tions ;  the  latter  answering  the  purpose  of  ensuring  regu- 
larity in  the  excavation  of  the  ditch,  as  the  lath  profiles 
ensure  it  in  the  erection  of  the  parapet. 

When  near  the  surface,  in  soil  requiring  but  little 
the  use  of  the  pickaxe,  an  excavation  of  6  cubic  yards  in 
a  day  of  8  hours  would  be  a  fair  task  for  a  soldier,  who, 
in  general,  is  little  accustomed  to  the  use  of  the  pickaxe 
and  shovel. 

In  calculating  the  time  required  to  throw  up  a  field 
work,  the  following  data  may  be  assumed ;  in  light,  dry, 
sandy  soil,  that  can  be  easily  dug  without  the  aid  of  a 
pickaxe,  a  man  can,  in  a  day  of  8  hours,  load  from  19  to 
20  cubic  yards  of  earth  on  barrows.  If  a  pickaxe  be  re- 
quired, two  men  can  do  the  same  quantity  of  work. 

If  the  whole  mass  must  be  first  moved  with  the  pick- 
axe, three  or  four  men  should  be  allowed. 

A  man  can  wheel  20  cubic  yards  of  earth  per  day  to 
a  distance  of  30  yards  on  level  ground,  or  20  yards  on  a 
ramp. 

Twenty  cubic  yards  of  earth  will  fill  500  wheelbar- 
rows. 

A  horse  can  do  as  much  work  as  7  men  :  he  can  carry 
300  Ibs.  20  miles  per  day,  or  200  Ibs.  30  miles ;  he  can 
draw  1,600  Ibs.  on  a  plain,  and  from  1,200  to  1,300  Ibs. 
on  irregular  ground,  when  the  roads  are  in  good  order. 


OBSTACLES. 

Palisades  are  triangular  prisms  of  wood  pointed  at 
the  upper  end,  and  placed  upright  in  the  ground  at  3  or 
4  inches  asunder ;  they  are  about  10  feet  long,  with  faces 
6  or  8  inches  wide,  and  are  sunk  3  or  4  feet  in  the  ground. 
A  trench  of  that  depth  is  dug,  the  palisades  are  placed  in 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  123 

it,  and  the  earth  is  well  rammed  about  them ;  they  are 
connected  at  top  (and  sometimes  at  bottom  also)  by  a 
ribbon  of  wood,  called  a  lintel,  4  inches  wide  by  2J  thick, 
nailed  to  the  inside  of  the  palisades  about  one  foot  from 
the  points  ;  they  ought  to  stand,  at  least,  7  feet  out  of  the 
ground.  Rough  palisades  may  be  formed,  quickly,  from 
trees  by  cutting  them  into  lengths  about  10  feet,  then 
describing  triangles,  with  sides  of  not  less  than  6  inches 
in  length  on  the  ends,  and  sawing  them  lengthwise  through 
those  sides  ;  if  the  trees  are  12  or  14  inches  in  diameter, 
six  equilateral  triangles  meeting  in  the  centre,  can  be 
described  on  the  ends,  and  six  palisades  made  of  one 
piece :  if  the  tree  is  but  6  inches  in  diameter,  then,  by 
sawing  it  in  halves,  two  palisades  can  be  made  of  one 
piece. 

Palisades  are  only  used  in  the  ditches,  and  to  close 
the  gorges  of  field  works,  and  are  not,  as  in  permanent 
works,  placed  on  the  banquettes  ;  when  in  the  ditch,  their 
best  position  is  at  the  foot  of  the  counterscarp,  and  slightly 
inclined  towards  it ;  for,  thus  placed,  they  are  more  se- 
cure from  a  direct  fire  of  artillery,  and  they  detain  the 
enemy  at  the  counterscarp  under  the  deadly  aim  of  the 
garrison  ;  also  it  makes  it  difficult  for  the  assailants  to  cut 
them  down,  there  being  no  room  between  them  and  the 
counterscarp  to  stand  and  wield  the  axe. 

Fraises  are  palisades  about  1 1  feet  long,  placed  in  a 
horizontal  or  in  an  inclined  position ;  they  ought  to  be 
sunk  about  5  feet  in  the  ground,  the  buried  ends  being 
joined  by  a  ribbon  in  order  to  render  it  difficult  to  pull 
them  out ;  the  pointed  ends  ought  to  be  not  less  than  7 
feet  from  the  bottom  of  the  ditch ;  and  when  placed  on 
the  berme  they  ought  to  incline  downwards,  in  order  that 
they  may  not  interrupt  the  passage  of  shells  when  rolled 
over  the  parapet.  Fraises  are  most  advantageously  placed 


124:  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

2  or  3  feet  below  the  edge  of  the  counterscarp,  as  they 
are,  there,  more  secure  than  on  the  berme,  from  the  direct 
fire  of  the  enemy,  whom  they  detain  under  a  close  fire 
from  the  work. 

Chevaux-de-frise  are  beams  of  wood  from  6  to  10  feet 
long,  which  are  cut  in  a  square  or  hexagonal  form,  and 
have  pointed  stakes  or  sword  blades  inserted  into  the 
faces ;  when  several  are  used,  in  one  length,  they  are 
chained  together  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  removing 
them ;  and  they  are  made  of  the  lengths  just  mentioned 
in  order  that  they  may  be  portable. 

They  are  employed  as  temporary  barriers  to  impede 
the  passage  of  a  breach,  the  entrance  into  a  work,  to  block 
up  a  street,  &c. ;  they  are  occasionally  placed  at  the  foot 
of  the  counterscarp  of  the  ditch,  and,  also,  on  the  berme ; 
in  the  latter  situation  they  must  be  covered  from  the 
view  and  fire  of  the  enemy  by  a  small  glacis. 

Abatis  are  large  boughs  or  entire  trees  laid  down  in 
a  line,  with  the  butt  ends  buried  3  or  4  feet  in  the  ground, 
and  the  branches  turned  towards  the  enemy :  to  form  an 
efficient  obstacle,  the  branches  ought  to  stand,  at  least,  as 
high  as  a  man's  breast,  tho  smaller  parts  being  cut  off, 
and  the  larger  pointed  ;  the  butts  should  be  secured  in  the 
ground  by  beams  or  trees  picketed  across  them,  and  they 
should  be  covered  with  earth  well  rammed ;  this  pre- 
caution will  make  it  difficult  to  drag  them  away.  They 
ought,  moreover,  to  be  covered  by  a  glacis,  that  they  may 
not  be  seen  and  breached  or  destroyed  at  a  distance,  by 
artillery. 

A  detachment  of  90  men  can  make  about  750  feet  of 
abatis  in  a  day. 

Some  of  the  trees  on  the  borders  of  a  wood  being 
formed  into  abatis,  may  deter  an  enemy  from  attempting 
to  penetrate  into  the  wood.  A  breastwork  may  be  made 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  125 

of  trunks  of  trees  piled  one  on  another  to  the  required 
height  behind  the  abatis  ;  this  is  soon  done,  and  it  much 
increases  the  strength  of  the  obstacle. 

Trous  de  loup  are  holes  dug  in  the  ground  in  the  form 
of  an  inverted  cone  or  pyramid,  and  are  made  about  6 
feet  wide  and  6  deep :  a  pointed  stake  is  planted  at  the 
bottom  to  prevent  an  enemy  from  making  use  of  them  as 
rifle  pits.  In  order  to  form  an  effective  obstacle,  they 
should  be  disposed  checker-wise  in  three  rows,  with  in- 
tervals of  about  10  feet  between  them ;  the  earth  from 
them  should  be  formed  into  a  glacis,  rather  than  heaped 
up  between  them,  as  in  the  latter  case  they  might  be  easily 
filled  up. 

Trous  de  loup  of  even  two  or  three  feet  deep,  may  be 
usefully  employed  in  rendering  impassable  shallow  wet 
ditches,  inundations,  and  fords  ;  and,  as  well  as  abatis, 
they  are  suitable  obstacles  to  the  advance  of  an  enemy  on 
the  salients  of  works,  on  the  weak  points  of  lines,  or 
through  their  intervals ;  they  may  thus  compel  the  en- 
emy to  attack  the  stronger  parts. 

The  gorges  of  works  may  also  be  closed  by  abatis  and 
trous  de  loup,  when  there  are  no  means  of  planting  pali- 
sades for  that  purpose. 

A  man  can  make  one  trou  de  loup  in  a  day. 

An  Entanglement  is  formed  by  cutting  half  through 
the  stems  of  small  trees,  and  pulling  the  upper  parts  to 
the  ground,  to  which  they  are  then  picketed. 

Crows  feet  are  four  iron  spikes  joined  together  at  one 
end  in  such  a  manner,  that  when  thrown  on  the  ground 
one  point  will  always  be  uppermost ;  they  may  be  quickly 
made  by  inserting  four  spikenails  into  a  small  block  of 
wood,  so  as  to  point  in  different  directions  ;  they  are 
chiefly  employed  to  obstruct  the  advance  of  cavalry. 

Pointed  Stakes  are  frequently  fixed  in  the  ground,  at 


126  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

any  place  which  the  enemy  might  occupy  at  the  time  of 
an  assault ;  as  on  the  bermes  of  works,  the  edges  of  trous 
de  loup,  and  in  the  spaces  between  them.  They  must  be 
firmly  planted  in  the  ground,  and  if  they  are  pointed  be- 
fore insertion,  two  mallets  must  be  used,  one  of  which  is 
provided  with  a  conical  hole  to  receive  the  point  of  the 
stake,  while  the  blows  are  struck  with  the  other ;  these 
pickets  may  be  conveniently  formed  of  the  small  branches 
cut  from  the  trees  intended  for  abatis. 

Common  Fougasses  are  small  mines  placed  in  shafts 
or  pits  from  3  to  10  feet  deep. 

The  powder  is  lodged  on  one  side  of  the  shaft  at  the 
bottom,  and  is  fired  from  a  secure  spot  by  means  of  a 
powder  hose,  or  fuze,  which  is  brought  up  one  side 
of  the  shaft,  and  carried  in  a  trough  (or  casing  tube) 
parallel  to  the  surface  of  the  ground ;  the  trough  should 
be  5  or  6  feet  below  the  ground  if  there  is  any  danger  of 
shells  falling  on  it ;  if  not,  2  feet  will  be  deep  enough. 

A  shell  foug  ass  is  formed  by  dividing  a  box  into  two 
parts  by  a  horizontal  partition ;  the  shells  being  loaded, 
are  placed  in  the  upper  part,  with  the  fuzes  pointing  dowii 
through  holes  in  the  partition,  in  order  that  they  may  be 
ignited,  at  the  same  moment,  by  the  priming ;  the  latter 
consists  of  a  few  pounds  of  powder  placed  in  the  lower 
compartment. 

Shell  fougasses  arc  very  convenient  obstacles  to  im- 
pede the  passage  of  a  ditch  and  the  ascent  of  a  breach,  as 
they  can  be  prepared  within  the  work,  and  speedily  buried 
at  the  required  spot  just  before  their  action  is  required. 

A  stone  fougass  or  rock  mortar  is  thus  formed.  Ex- 
cavate a  shaft  at  an  inclination  of  about  45°  to  the  horizon, 
and  about  6  feet  deep  ;  at  the  bottom  place  a  charge  of 
55  Ibs.  of  powder,  then  a  strong  shield  of  wood  (at  least 
6  inches  thick)  in  front  of  the  charge  ;  and  over  the  shield 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  127 

throw  in  3  or  4  cubic  yards  of  pebbles  of  not  less  than 
half  a  pound  weight  each  ;  a  sufficient  body  of  earth  must 
be  heaped  vertically  above  the  charge,  and  retained  over 
the  upper  part  of  the  shaft  (near  the  edge)  by  a  revetment 
of  sods,  to  ensure  its  effect  taking  place  in  the  direction 
required. 

Twelve  men  can  make  a  stone  fougass  in  three  hours, 
which,  being  charged  as  before  described,  will,  when  ex- 
ploded, disperse  the  materials  over  a  circle  of  30  or  40 
yards  radius,  at  about  60  yards  from  the  mouth  of  the 
shaft. 

The  usual  and  most  effective  position  for  fougasses  is 
beyond  the  ditch  and  over  the  salients  or  other  weak 
points  of  the  work ;  they  must  be  removed  in  advance  of 
the  ditch  so  far  as  not  to  injure  the  counterscarp  by  their 
explosion. 

A  good  method  of  discharging  fougasses  at  the  mo- 
ment required,  is  to  place  a  loaded  musket  with  the  muz- 
zle in  the  priming  and  a  wire  attached  to  the  trigger ;  the 
wire  can  be  led  in  any  direction,  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  hose,  and  being  pulled  at  the  proper  moment,  the  ex- 
plosion will  take  place. 

INUNDATIONS. 

It  frequently  occurs  in  the  field  that  small  streams  or 
rivulets  are  met  with,  which  of  themselves  offer  no  im- 
pediment to  the  advance  of  an  enemy,  but  which,  by  ju- 
dicious management,  may  be  made  effectually  to  check 
his  attack  on  certain  points  where  the  water  may  be  col- 
lected. 

An  inundation,  or  collection  of  water,  is  produced  by 
forming  across  a  stream  one  or  more  dams,  which  must 
extend  to  a  certain  distance  from  thence,  according  to  the 


128  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

inclination  (or  slope)  of  the  ground  contiguous  to  the 
stream,  and  to  the  required  breadth  of  the  inundation. 

A  dam  may  be  formed  in  the  following  manner  :  after 
constructing  an  embankment  of  earth  on  each  side  of  the 
stream  perpendicularly  to  its  length,  as  far  as  the  bank, 
stones  and  gravel  should  be  thrown  into  the  water  to  di- 
minish its  depth  ;  then  two  heaps  of  earth  are  prepared, 
one  on  each  bank,  and  as  many  workmen  being  set  on  as 
can  be  employed  without  impeding  each  other,  the  earth 
from  those  heaps  is  thrown  into  the  stream  over  the  stones 
and  gravel  as  rapidly  as  possible,  until  the  embankments 
previously  formed  are  connected  together  across  the 
stream. 

It  rarely  occurs  that  sufficient  means  are  to  be  found 
in  the  field  to  allow  of  a  dam  being  made  more  than  ten 
feet  high  ;  and  supposing  this  height  to  be  given,  the  dif- 
ference of  level  between  any  two  dams  should  be  five  feet, 
in  order  that  the  shallowest  part  of  the  inundation  may 
be  five  feet  deep,  and,  therefore,  not  fordable. 

The  distance  at  which  the  dams  should  be  placed  from 
one  another  will  depend  upon  the  fall  of  the  bed  of  the 
stream,  and  must  be  determined  by  levelling.  The  thick- 
ness of  the  dam  at  top  may  be  made  equal  to  the 
depth  of  the  water  intended  to  be  retained,  but  if  it  is 
liable  to  be  battered  by  artillery,  it  should  be  ten  feet 
thick  at  top.  The  exterior  slope  of  the  dam  may  be  left 
at  the  natural  slope  of  the  earth,  while  to  that  opposed  to 
the  stream  a  base  of  not  less  than  double  its  height  should 
be  given. 

A  sluice  or  w^ste  weir  should  be  provided  at  the 
height  to  which  it  is  desired  the  water  should  rise ;  other- 
wise, the  water  being  allowed  to  flow  over  every  part, 
the  dam  would  be  destroyed.  These  openings,  or  waste 
weirs,  must  be  revetted  with  fascines  or  timber,  and  ought 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  129 

to  be  completed  before  the  dam  is  carried  up  to  its  full 
height. 

Sometimes  the  inclination  of  the  ground  contiguous  to 
the  stream  prevents  the  inundation  from  attaining  a  depth 
greater  than  two  or  three  feet ;  it  may,  notwithstanding, 
be  rendered  impassable,  by  digging  pits  and  ditches  in 
different  parts  before  the  water  is  allowed  to  cover  the 
ground. 

The  end  of  the  dam  on  the  enemy's  side  must  be  pro- 
tected by  field  works  to  prevent  him  from  destroying  it, 
or  using  it  as  a  bridge.  When  no  work  can  be  placed 
immediately  to  cover  the  head  of  the  dam,  the  approaches  ' 
to  it  should  be  defended ;  or  if  the  opposite  bank  be  within 
short  musket  range,  the  end  of  the  dam  may  be  covered 
by  abatis.  The  works  thrown  up  to  cover  the  head  of  a 
dam  are  traced  precisely  on  the  same  principles  as  those 
which  are  to  protect  a  bridge.  The  best  condition,  there- 
fore, when  a  choice  is  possible,  is,  that  the  inundations 
should  be  concave  to  the  enemy. 

Small  islands  may  exist  in  the  midst  of  an  inundation, 
and  on  these  batteries  or  breastworks  for  musketry  may 
be  advantageously  formed,  either  to  protect  the  dams,  or 
for  the  general  defence  of  the  position. 

TETES    DE    PONT. 

Tetes  de  pont  are  works  thrown  up  to  cover  a  com- 
munication across  a  river,  to  hinder  the  destruction  of  the 
bridge,  and  to  defend  it  until  an  army  or  detachment  has 
crossed  over  it. 

They  should  be  of  sufficient  strength  to  be  defended 

until  the  whole  of  the  troops  have  crossed  and  the  bridge 

has  been  taken  up.    The  works  employed  for  this  purpose 

vary  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground  to  be  occupied, 

6* 


130  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

the  shape  and  width  of  the  river,  the  importance  of  the 
communication,  &c.  :  they  consist  of  redans,  lunettes, 
hornworks,  or  portions  of  any  kind  of  field  work. 

If  the  bridge  is  seen  from  any  point  on  the  Bank,  the 
tete  de  pont  should  have  at  least  one  face,  whose  fire  may 
sweep  that  point.  Islands  should  be  made  to  contribute 
to  the  defence  by  works  erected  on  them ;  these  should 
be  breastworks  for  infantry,  if  the  work  is  within  the 
range  of  that  arm,  or  batteries  for  field  guns.  Advantage 
should  also  be  taken  of  the  opposite  bank  to  fortify  it  in 
a  similar  manner.  If  these  measures  cannot  be  taken, 
auxiliary  flanks  may  be  added  to  the  faces  of  such  a  work 
as  a  redan  for  the  defence  of  the  salients. 

A  reduit  is  frequently  constructed  within  a  tete  de 
pont,  to  cover  the  bridge  from  the  neighboring  heights, 
and  also  to  enable  a  small  party  of  the  troops  to  keep  the 
enemy  in  check  until  the  main  body  has  crossed,  and  the 
bridge  has  been  taken  up ;  this  rear  guard  then  crosses 
the  river  in  boats  or  rafts,  protected  by  the  fire  from  the 
opposite  side. 

A  battery  should  be  constructed  so  as  to  enfilade  the 
bridge,  and  to  destroy  it,  should  the  enemy  force  the 
reduit. 

The  faces  or  flanks  of  a  tete  de  pont  should  have  such 
directions  given  to  them  that  their  fire  may  range  directly 
along  the  banks. 

The  best  position  for  a  (temporary)  military  bridge 
and  tete  is  at  a  re-entering  bend  of  a  river ;  viz.,  at  a  part 
which  is  concave  towards  the  enemy's  side,  because  then 
the  bank  which  is  in  possession  of  the  force  about  to  lay 
down  the  bridge,  in  part,  envelope  both  that  and  the  tete. 
Thus,  while  the  bridge  is  covered  from  the  view  of  the 
enemy,  breastworks  or  batteries  may  be  advantageously 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  131 

placed  to  assist  in  its  defence,  and  at  the  same  time  to 
give  an  effective  cross  fire  in  its  front. 

When,  however,  the  bridge  is  to  remain  a  considerable 
time,  these  advantages  must  be  given  up,  and  a  straight 
part  of  the  river  chosen,  because  there  the  current  acts 
directly  against  the  heads  of  the  boats  or  pontoons,  whereas 
at  a  bend  it  acts  obliquely  against  the  sides,  and  thus 
tends  constantly  to  derange  their  positions.  Again,  at  a 
bend  the  current  is  constantly  wearing  av\ray  the  concave 
side,  (or  bank,)  and  depositing  the  earth  thus  removed  at 
the  next  convex  bend,  thus  causing  a  shallow  bank  to  be 
formed  on  one  side  of  the  river  and  a  deep  part  at  the 
opposite  side ;  consequently  at  every  fall  of  the  water, 
in  such  a  place,  one  end  of  the  bridge  is  left  aground  on 
the  shallow  part,  while  the  other  end  descends  with  the 
water,  and  thus  the  bridge  is  in  danger  of  being  broken. 

It  is  evident  that  the  bed  of  a  river  will  be  less  irregu- 
lar, and  that  fords  will  be  most  usually  found  where  the 
course  is  straight :  fords  are,  however,  occasionally  found 
at  the  bends  of  a  river  in  directions  obliquely  across,  from 
one  convex  part  to  the  next  on  the  opposite  side. 

A  ford  should  not  be  more  than  four  feet  deep  for 
cavalry,  three  feet  for  infantry,  and  two  feet  four  inches 
for  artillery. 

LINES. 

Lines  are  a  series  of  works  and  trenches,  or  of  inde- 
pendent works,  arranged  so  as  to  defend  each  other,  and 
the  ground  in  front  of  and  between  them. 

Lines  are  used  to  cover  the  front  of  a  position,  or  to 
connect  important  redoubts  or  forts  together. 

Lines  are  of  two  kinds,  such  as  are  continuous,  and 
such  as  have  intervals  between  the  works. 


132  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

The  former  are  principally  applicable  to  situations 
where  it  is  proposed  to  act  on  the  defensive  only,  and 
where  they  are  of  such  limited  extent  that  the  whole  line 
of  parapet  can  be  occupied  with  troops  exclusive  of  the 
reserves  ;  as,  for  instance,  to  close  a  pass  between  scarped 
mountains,  or  on  the  sea  shore,  or  on  the  banks  of  large 
rivers  ;  thus  resting  on  natural  obstacles,  which  will  pre- 
vent their  flanks  being  turned.  They  are  often  introduced 
as  portions  of  an  extended  line  with  intervals. 

Extensive  continued  lines  can  make  but  slight  resist- 
ance, while  the  labor  necessarily  expended  in  executing 
them  is  considerable ;  and  as  the  enemy  may  menace 
several  points  at  once,  it  follows  that  nearly  as  many 
troops  would  be  required  for  the  defence  as  are  employed 
in  the  attack,  in  which  case  the  first  principle  of  fortification 
is  violated.  Even  if  the  defenders  have  a  sufficient  num- 
ber of  disposable  troops,  they  act,  when  within  lines, 
under  a  disadvantage,  for  they  must  watch  and  follow 
every  movement  of  the  enemy,  so  as  to  be  equally  pre- 
pared to  resist  a  false  and  a  real  attack.  It  has  often 
happened  that  while  the  defenders  within  lines  were  con- 
centrating their  forces  to  oppose  a  false  attack,  the  enemy 
has  penetrated  at  a  point  where  he  was  not  expected ;  and 
a  continued  line  once  entered  may  generally  be  deemed 
lost. 

Continuous  lines  of  redans  connected  by  curtains  are 
constructed  in  three  ways  :  in  the  first,  as  described  by 
Vauban,  the  salients  of  the  redans  are  at  240  yards  asun- 
der, and  consequently  the  musketry  fire  of  one  redan 
does  not,  effectively,  defend  the  salient  of  the  next.  To 
remedy  this  defect,  it  was  subsequently  recommended  that 
the  salients  of  the  redans  should  be  brought  within  musket 
range  of  each  other,  or  within  160  yards. 

In  both   of  these   constructions   the  flanking  angles 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  133 

formed  by  the  faces  of  the  redans  and  the  curtains  joining 
them  much  exceed  105°,  and  consequently  the  flanking 
defence  is  very  imperfect. 

In  the  third  construction  the  salients  are  removed  to 
240  yards  from  each  other,  (the  original  distance,)  but  the 
curtain  is  broken  into  two  parts,  forming  a  salient  angle, 
and  thus  the  re-entering  or  flanking  angles  are  reduced  to 
but  little  more  than  90°,  by  which  means  the  flanking  de- 
fence is  greatly  improved. 

This  tracing  is,  however,  still  defective,  inasmuch  as 
it  presents  double  the  number  of  salients  to  the  enemy's 
attacks,  and  the  branches  of  the  broken  curtains  are  ex- 
posed to  be  enfiladed,  which  is  not  the  case  in  Vauban's 
construction. 

Lines  of  tenailles  consist  of  parapets  forming  a  series 
of  salient  and  re-entering  angles,  and  are,  in  fact,  like  the 
improved  redan  lines,  except  that,  in  this  tracing,  the  re- 
dans are  all  of  the  same  size,  and  have  obtuse  angles. 

They  are  traced  by  setting  ofF  distances  of  about  200 
yards  along  the  front  of  the  intended  lines,  to  mark  the 
position  of  the  salient  angles ;  these  intervals  are  then 
bisected,  and  perpendiculars  drawn  towards  the  interior 
to  give  the  places  of  the  re-entering  angles.  The  perpen- 
diculars should  not  exceed  half  the  distance  between  the 
salients,  otherwise  the  re-entering  angles  would  be  less 
than  right  angles. 

Cremaillere  lines  are  composed  of  alternate  short  and 
long  faces  at  right  angles  (or  nearly  so)  to  each  other ; 
the  short  faces,  called  crotchets,  are  made  about  30  yards 
long,  and  the  long  faces,  called  branches,  about  100  yards 
long. 

These  lines  possess  the  following  advantages  : — 

1st.  The  branches  are  but  little  exposed  to  be  enfiladed, 
owing  to  the  small  projection  of  the  salients. 


134  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

2dly.  Each  branch  is  defended  not  only  by  the  fire  of 
the  adjoining  crotchet,  but  by  several  others. 

3dly.  Their  outline  is  very  easily  adapted  to  all  varie- 
ties of  ground  ;  and  on  slopes,  in  particular,  they  are  very 
advantageous,  because  a  small  additional  height  given  to 
the  crotchets  will  defilade  a  long  extent  of  branch  from 
the  fire  of  an  enemy  on  the  height. 

Their  defects  are  : — 

1st.  The  crotchets  being  short,  very  little  of  the  ditch 
of  each  is  defended  by  the  adjacent  branch. 

2dly.  A  battery  which  can  enfilade  one  branch  is 
equally  able  to  enfilade  several. 

CrSmaillere  lines  may  be  much  strengthened  by  plac- 
ing along  their  front  bastions  or  double  redans,  at  inter- 
vals varying  from  690  to  800  yards,  in  order  that  a  cross 
fire  of  artillery  may  be  brought  from  them  in  front  of  the 
other  parts  of  the  line. 

The  crotchets  should  face  towards  the  bastions,  or  re- 
dans, in  order  that  the  fire  from  the  crotchets  may  defend 
the  salients  of  those  works,  and  that  the  branches  may 
be  defiladed  by  being  directed  on  the  bastions  or  double 
redans.  When  the  line  crosses  a  valley,  the  branches 
may  be  most  effectually  defiladed  by  giving  the  whole  a 
bend  concave  towards  the  exterior,  and  placing  the  bas- 
tions, or  redans,  on  the  high  ground ;  these  works  will 
thus  form  the  more  advanced  parts  of  the  line. 

The  flanks  of  the  bastions  must  be  connected  with  the 
next  crotchets  on  both  sides  by  broken  curtains,  taking 
care  that  the  re-entering  angles  are  not  less  than  right 
angles. 

Bastioned  lines  are  made  precisely  in  the  manner  al- 
ready pointed  out  for  the  fronts  of  bastioned  forts  ;  such 
lines  may  be  strengthened  by  lunettes,  constructed  at 
musket-shot  distances  in  their  front,  and  having  their  faces 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  135 

directed  upon  those  of  the  bastions,  in  order  that  the 
ditches  of  the  lunettes,  and  the  ground  in  front  of  them, 
may  be  defended  by  those  faces. 

The  flanks  of  the  lunettes  give  a  direct  and  close  fire 
in  front  of  the  salients  of  the  bastions  ;  but  care  must  be 
taken  in  their  construction  that  they  do  not  fire  into  each 
other ;  on  this  account,  when  the  fronts  are  in  one  straight 
line,  it  is  usual  either  to  suppress  the  flanks  of  the  lunettes, 
or  to  place  a  lunette  on  every  alternate  front  only. 

The  communication  from  the  lines  to  the  gorge  of 
each  lunette  is  by  a  caponniere,  which  is,  generally,  made 
broadest  at  the  inner  end,  in  order  to  enable  the  garrison 
to  meet  the  enemy  on  a  superior  front,  should  he  succeed 
in  getting  into  it ;  its  parapet  is  made  only  3  feet  above 
the  ground  that  it  may  not  mask  the  fire  of  the  lines,  and 
consequently  its  interior  must  be  sunk  4  or  5  feet  to 
afford  the  requisite  cover ;  its  breadth  must  be  sufficient 
to  allow  room  for  a  banquette.  A  traverse  is  placed  at 
its  inner  extremity,  and,  perhaps,  (according  to  the  nature 
of  the  ground  and  the  length  of  the  passage,)  at  intervals 
along  the  passage. 

Sometimes  the  line  changes  its  direction ;  in  such 
cases,  when  the  change  causes  the  parts  of  the  line  to 
form  with  each  other  a  re-entering  angle,  the  latter  is  one 
of  the  strongest  parts  of  the  line. 


LINES    WITH    INTERVALS,    OR    BROKEN    LINES. 

Broken  lines  should  always,  when  practicable,  be  dis- 
posed in  a  double  row,  and  in  such  a  manner  that  the 
inner  works  may  flank  the  outer ;  the  advantages  pos- 
sessed by  broken  lines  are  : — 

1st.  With  the  same  extent  as  continuous  lines,  they 


136  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

require  less  labor  in  the  construction,  and  fewer  troops  to 
occupy  them,  consequently  large  reserves  may  be  formed. 

2dly.  The  defenders  may  advance  in  force  and  in  a 
regular  formation  through  the  intervals,  and  attack  the 
enemy,  should  he  have  been  thrown  into  confusion. 

3dly.  They  oblige  the  enemy  to  overpower  each  sep- 
arate work  before  he  can  become  possessed  of  the  whole  ; 
whereas  if  a  continuous  line  be  forced  in  one  part,  it  is 
generally  lost  to  the  defenders. 

4thly.  If  the  enemy  has  gained  one  work  he  will  then 
be  exposed  to  the  flanking  fire  of  the  adjacent  works,  and 
to  a  fire  from  the  works  in  the  second  line. 

To  profit  fully  by  this  advantage,  when  the  front  line 
consists  of  closed  works,  their  rear  faces  ought  to  be  of 
slight  construction,  that  the  artillery  of  the  second  line 
may  easily  demolish  those  faces,  if  the  enemy  should  gain 
possession  of  the  works. 

When  there  are  two  lines  of  works,  the  heaviest  ar- 
tillery should  be  placed  in  the  inner  line,  or  else  the  en- 
emy, obtaining  possession  of  the  exterior  line,  would  turn 
the  guns  against  the  other,  and  have  a  superiority  over 
the  defenders. 

When  lines  are  on  sloping  ground  descending  towards 
the  front,  the  slope  should,  if  possible,  be  cut  very  steep, 
so  as  to  form  an  escarpment  before  the  works. 

A  single  row  of  redans  or  redoubts  is  comparatively 
weak,  for  the  fire  from  them  crosses  at  a  distance  in  front 
of  the  intervals,  and  but  feebly  defends  the  salients.  Lu- 
nettes are  better  in  such  a  situation  on  account  of  the  fire 
of  the  flanks,  which  may  be  brought  to  cross  the  capitals 
close  to  the  salient  angles. 

The  intervals  between  the  works  which  form  a  broken 
line  should  not  exceed  160  yards,  in  order  that  they  may 
be  defended  bv  an  effective  cross  fire  from  those  works. 


FIELD  FORTIFICATIONS.  137 

The  different  works  should  occupy  the  most  prominent 
and  the  highest  ground  ;  also  the  flanking  parts  ought  to 
be  perpendicular  to  their  lines  of  defence. 

The  intervals  between  the  works  may  be  strengthened 
by  artificial  obstacles,  or  by  a  trench,  for  troops,  with  a 
rough  parapet,  (like  the  first  parallel  in  a  siege,)  having 
a  broad  interior  slope  to  enable  the  men  tu  advance  over 
it  when  occasion  requires. 


DEFENCE    OF    FIELD    WORKS. 

A  spot  selected  for  a  military  post  should  not  be  com- 
manded, especially  on  the  flank  or  in  the  rear,  within  the 
ordinary  range  of  a  field  piece.  There  should  be  plenty 
of  materials  on  the  spot  to  aid  in  strengthening  the 
works,  or  in  forming  obstructions  in  front  of  them.  The 
soil  should  be  of  a  nature  to  be  easily  worked,  and  the 
position  should  be  difficult  of  access  ;  it  should,  however, 
offer  the  means  of  retreating  in  security,  and  with  facility. 

The  highest  ground  of  a  position  should  be  occupied 
by  the  salients  of  works,  for  then  the  adjoining  faces  will 
be,  in  some  measure,  secured  from  enfilade  fire  ;  it  follows 
that  the  re-entering  angles  should  be  placed  in  the  lowest 
spots. 

It  is  very  essential  to  create  obstructions  within  short 
range  of  musketry  in  front  of  all  works  of  a  temporary 
nature,  with  a  view  of  breaking  the  order  of  the  assail- 
ants, and  detaining  them  under  a  close  and  severe  fire,  if 
they  persist  in  forcing  their  way  through. 

In  fact,  all  the  movements  of  an  enemy,  whether  to 
the  front,  to  the  right  or  left,  should  be  as  much  cramped 
and  impeded  as  possible ;  it  is  important  to  break  his 
order  and  put  him  into  confusion  when  under  fire,  for  he 


138  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

can  seldom  re-form  under  such  circumstances ;  and  if  he 
attacks  in  disorder,  the  chances  are  against  his  success. 

To  save  time  in  making  palisades  or  stockade  work, 
the  whole  quantity  ought  to  be  divided  into  distinct  por- 
tions, say  10  or  12  feet  in  length,  to  one  carpenter  and 
two  laborers ;  and  to  prevent  confusion  in  obtaining  ma- 
terials for  constructing  obstacles,  it  is  well  to  divide  the 
men  into  parties  of  8  or  10  each,  prescribing  to  each 
party  the  nature  of  the  materials  required,  the  place 
where  they  are  to  be  obtained,  and  the  spot  at  which  they 
are  to  be  deposited. 

The  materials  are  obtained  by  felling  trees,  unroofing 
houses,  taking  up  floors,  and  the  like. 

The  guns  of  a  work  should  not,  generally,  reply  to  the 
cannonade  which  precedes  an  assault,  but  should  be  placed 
behind  traverses,  or  other  places  of  shelter  previously 
prepared  for  them  ;  they  should  only  fire  at  the  enemy's 
artillery,  while  the  latter  is  changing  its  position. 

Bound  shot  or  shells  are  fired  against  guns ;  grape, 
canister,  spherical  case,  and  rockets  against  troops. 

As  soon  as  the  enemy's  light  troops  advance,  the  par- 
apets are  to  be  manned ;  sand-bags  previously  filled  are 
placed  along  the  parapet,  leaving  loopholes  between 
them  ;  they  are  musket-shot  proof,  and  give  the  men 
the  necessary  confidence  to  enable  them  to  take  a 
steady  aim.  One  rank  of  men  is  sufficient  on  the  ban- 
quette, others  being  placed  behind  them  to  load.  A  re- 
serve is  to  be  stationed  under  cover,  who  fall  upon  the 
assailants  with  the  bayonet,  should  they  succeed  in  getting 
into  the  work.  For  a  good  defence  there  ought  to  be  a 
file  per  yard  to  man  the  parapet,  with  a  reserve  of  one- 
fourth  or  one-sixth  of  the  whole,  in  addition. 

As  soon  as  the  assaulting  columns  begin  to  mask  the 


FIELD  FORTIFICATIONS.  139 

fire  of  their  own  artillery,  the  guns  of  the  work  will  be 
brought  up,  and  open  their  fire  on  them. 

A  sortie  (very  rarely)  may  be  made,  should  the  en- 
emy be  thrown  into  disorder ;  but  this  step  requires  great 
caution,  for  should  the  sortie  be  repelled,  the  enemy  may 
enter  the  work  with  the  retiring  troops. 

Fougasses,  having  been  previously  prepared,  will  be 
fired  the  instant  the  enemy  is  above  them,  by  means  of  a 
piece  of  safety  fuze,  or  a  musket  with  its  muzzle  in  the 
powder  and  a  wire  to  the  trigger. 

If  the  assailants  at  length  descend  into  the  ditch,  shells, 
grenades,  and  every  sort  of  missile  are  to  be  thrown  upon 
them.  The  shells  are  rolled  down  by  being  placed  in 
troughs  laid  on  the  superior  slope  of  the  parapet. 

If  the  enemy  has  to  cross  a  river  before  he  arrives  at 
the  work,  the  fords  may  be  rendered  impassable  for  ar- 
tillery and  cavalry,  by  digging  pits,  planting  stakes,  throw- 
ing in  felled  trees  and  harrows,  or  by  driving  wagons  or 
carts  full  of  stones  into  the  middle,  and  taking  off  the 
wheels. 

Should  the  ford  be  beyond  musket  range  from  the 
work,  a  parapet  may  be  raised  opposite  to  it,  at  such  a 
distance  from  it  as  to  permit  the  defenders  to  issue  forth 
and  charge  the  party  crossing  it,  at  the  moment  they  land 
in  disorder  on  the  bank. 

To  prevent  surprise,  outposts  are  stationed  round  the 
work  at  night,  and  heaps  of  dried  brushwood,  or  tarred 
fascines,  should  be  placed  along  the  post  at  intervals ;  at 
the  approach  of  the  enemy,  the  outposts  retire  into  the 
work,  having  set  fire  to  the  piles  of  brushwood  ;  this  will, 
in  a  great  measure,  prevent  an  enemy  from  concealing 
himself  near  the  work. 


140  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 


LOOPHOLING    WALLS. 

Walls  are  made  available  for  the  purposes  of  defence 
by  loopholing  them  ;  if  a  ditch  cannot,  for  want  of  time, 
be  dug  at  the  foot  of  the  wall  outside,  the  loopholes  ought 
to  be,  at  least,  7  feet  above  the  ground,  to  prevent  the 
assailants  from  making  use  of  them ;  in  the  former  case 
a  temporary  stage  might  be  made  of  casks,  ladders,  &c., 
within  4  feet  or  4  feet  6  inches  of  the  loopholes,  to  enable 
the  men  to  fire  through  them. 

The  quickest  way  of  loopholing  a  wall  is  to  break  it 
down  from  the  top  in  the  form  of  narrow  fissures  about 
3  feet  asunder ;  but  if  the  wall  is  very  low,  or  there  is 
not  time  to  make  loopholes,  a  piece  of  timber,  or  the 
trunk  of  a  tree,  supported  on  the  top  of  it  by  a  couple  of 
stones,  would  be  a  ready  expedient,  and  men  could  fire 
from  the  opening  under  it ;  or  sand-bags,  or  large  stones 
or  sods,  might  be  placed  on  the  wall  at  intervals.  The 
loopholes  made  in  walls  or  buildings  can  seldom  be  of 
any  regular  form  ;  the  width  outside  should  not  exceed  3 
inches,  but  inside  it  may  be  equal  to  the  thickness  of  the 
wall.  The  best  tools  (of  such  as  are  usually  found  about 
buildings)  to  break  loopholes  through  a  wall,  are  crow- 
bars, pickaxes,  and  large  hammers. 

Barricades  for  roads  and  streets  are  made,  if  time  per- 
mits, by  sinking  a  ditch  7  or  8  feet  deep,  and  forming  the 
earth  into  a  breastwork,  adding  palisades,  &c. ;  but  if 
time  presses,  casks,  boxes,  or  cart  bodies  filled  with  earth, 
stones,  manure,  or  cinders,  sacks  of  flour,  bales  of  mer- 
chandise, and  the  like,  must  be  arranged  across ;  paving 
stones  may  be  taken  up  and  disposed  in  a  similar  manner. 

The  mass  should  be  raised  6  or  7  feet  high,  and  a  ban- 
quette formed  for  firing  over  it ;  the  neighboring  houses 


FIELD  FORTIFICATIONS. 

should  also  be  loopholed,  so  as  to  give  a  good  flanking 
fire  over  the  ground  in  front  of  the  barricade,  and  stones 
may  be  collected  to  throw  down  on  the  assailants  from 
the  contiguous  houses. 

FORTIFYING   HOUSES. 

The  great  art  of  converting  buildings,  and  the  out- 
houses and  walls  that  usually  surround  them,  into  defen- 
sible posts,  consists  in  selecting  from  the  mass  of  objects 
at  hand  such  as  will  answer  the  purpose,  and  in  sacrificing 
every  thing  else ;  making  use  of  the  materials  to  strengthen 
the  part  which  is  to  be  fortified. 

The  building  chosen  should  possess  some  of,  or  all  the 
following  requisites  : — 

1st.  It  should  command  all  that  surrounds  it. 

2dly.  It  should  be  substantial,  (not  thatched,)  and  of 
a  nature  to  furnish  materials  useful  for  placing  it  in  a 
state  of  defence. 

8dly.  It  should  be  of  an  extent  not  too  great  for  the 
number  of  the  defenders,  and  should  only  require  for  the 
completion  of  the  proposed  object  the  time  and  means 
which  can  be  spared. 

4thly.  It  should  have  projections  flanking  the  walls 
and  angles. 

5thly.  It  should  be  difficult  of  access  on  the  side  ex- 
posed to  attack,  and  yet  have  a  safe  retreat  for  the  defend- 
ers ;  and,  of  course,  it  must  be  in  such  a  position  as  to 
answer  the  purpose  for  which  the  detachment  is  posted. 

As  a  rough  guide  to  judge  of  the  third  requisite,  there 
ought  to  be  a  man  for  every  4  feet  of  wall  round  the  in- 
terior of  the  lower  story,  one  man  to  6  feet  for  the  second 
story,  one  to  S  feet  for  an  attic,  with  a  reserve  of  about 
one-sixth  of  the  whole. 


FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

Should  there  exist  any  doubt  about  having  sufficient 
time  to  execute  all  that  might  be  wished,  it  would  be  nec- 
essary to  decide  on  the  best  points  to  be  secured,  in  order 
to  repel  an  immediate  attack  ;  in  such  a  case  it  might  be 
well  to  employ  as  many  men  as  could  work  without  hin- 
dering each  other  by  being  too  crowded,  to  collect  mate- 
rials, and  barricade  the  doors  and  windows  on  the  ground 
floor,  to  make  loopholes  in  them,  and  to  level  any  ob- 
struction outside  that  would  give  cover  to  the  enemy,  or; 
facilitate  the  attack ;  to  sink  ditches  opposite  the  doors 
on  the  outside,  and  arrange  loopholes  in  the  windows  of 
the  upper  story ;  to  make  loopholes  through  the  walls 
generally,  attending  first  to  the  most  exposed  parts,  and 
to  break  communications  through  all  the  party  walls  and 
partitions ;  to  place  abatis  or  any  feasible  obstruction  on 
the  outside,  and  to  improve  the  defence  of  the  post  by 
the  construction  of  tambours  ;  to  place  outbuildings  and 
garden  walls  in  a  state  of  defence,  and  establish  communi- 
cations between  them  ;  to  make  arrangements  (in  the 
lower  story  particularly)  for  defending  one  room  after 
another,  so  that  a  partial  possession  only  could  be  ob- 
tained on  a  sudden  attack  being  made. 

These  different  works  should  be  undertaken  in  the 
order  of  their  relative  importance,  according  to  circum- 
stances ;  and  after  securing  the  immediate  object  for  which 
they  were  designed,  they  might  remain  to  be  improved  on, 
if  an  opportunity  should  offer. 

Houses  are  fortified  by  piercing  loopholes  through 
the  walls,  and  if  the  walls  are  high,  two,  or  even  three 
rows  of  loopholes  may  be  made,  and  a  temporary  scaf- 
folding of  furniture,  casks,  &c.,  erected  for  firing  from  the 
upper  ones :  one  row  may  be  made  close  to  the  ground, 
with  pits  dug  in  the  rear,  or  the  floor  may  be  cut  through, 
if  there  is  a  basement,  for  the  convenience  of  making  use 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  143 

of  them.  The  loopholes  may  have  the  dimensions  before 
prescribed,  and  they  ought  not  to  be  made  at  a  less  dis- 
tance than  three  feet  from  each  other,  lest  the  wall  should 
be  too  much  weakened,  or  the  defenders  inconveniently 
crowded. 

The  staircases  are  to  be  cut  away,  the  communication 
being  kept  up  by  ladders  ;  and  the  floors,  as  well  as  the 
partition  walls,  should  be  loopholed. 

Thatched  roofs  and  all  combustible  materials  are  to  be 
removed,  and  barrels  of  water  should  be  placed  in  every 
room  in  readiness  to  extinguish  fire. 

A  communication  ought  to  be  opened  on  the  side  fur- 
thest from  the  enemy,  through  which  ammunition  and 
reinforcements  may  enter. 

The  door  or  barrier  closing  this  communication  may 
be  made  musket-proof  by  nailing  strong  planks  to  it,  and 
if  there  is  a  basement  to  the  house,  the  floor  should  be 
cut  away  within  the  door,  so  as  to  form  a  sort  of  ditch. 

All  the  doors  and  windows  are  to  be  barricaded  and 
loopholed.  The  best  barricade  for  a  door  is  made  by 
strong  palisades,  which  are  secured  to  a  thick  cross  beam 
let  into  the  wall  on  each  side  ;  a  bank  of  earth  may  also 
be  formed  on  the  exterior. 

A  flanking  defence  can  always  be  obtained  by  con- 
structing a  tambour  in  front  of  a  side,  or  at  the  angles  of 
a  house. 

All  enclosures  which  may  afford  the  enemy  cover 
must  be  removed,  if  not  included  in  the  defence. 

If  artillery  is  likely  to  be  employed  against  the  house, 
it  will  be  necessary,  unless  the  walls  are  very  strong,  to 
support  the  timbers  of  the  roof  by  means  of  props. 

If  there  is  time,  the  house  may  be  formed  into  a 
blockhouse  by  pulling  down  the  upper  stories,  and  laying 


144:  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

the  materials  over  the  lower  rooms  to  make  the  covering 
shell-proof. 

A  ditch  may  be  dug  on  the  outside  of  the  house,  and 
the  earth  placed  against  the  walls  :  some  protection  may 
be  obtained  for  the  doors,  by  placing  strong  beams  against 
the  walls  on  the  outside  in  an  inclined  position,  and  heap- 
ing earth  or  rubbish  over  them. 

INTRENCHING   A   VILLAGE. 

In  intrenching  a  village,  the  buildings,  walls,  and 
hedges  on  its  circuit  are  to  be  considered  as  part  of  its 
enclosure,  and  are  to  be  made  fit  for  the  purposes  of  de- 
fence ;  all  the  intervals  between  them  are  to  be  occupied 
by  breastworks  or  palisades,  and  strengthened  by  abatis. 

The  streets  are  to  be  barricaded  at  intervals  with  carts 
or  wagons  having  one  or  two  wheels  taken  off,  with  barrels 
of  earth,  bales  of  merchandise,  &c.  A  passage  should  be 
made  through  the  adjoining  houses,  which  should  be  loop- 
holed,  and  care  must  be  taken  that  the  barricade  be  not 
turned  by  an  enemy  passing  down  the  neighboring  streets. 

Some  strong  building,  such  as  a  church,  court-house, 
or  jail,  should  be  selected,  and  fortified  with  particular 
care,  to  serve  as  a  citadel  or  reduit,  to  which  the  defenders 
may  retire  when  driven  in  from  the  exterior  part  of  the 
village. 

Advantage  must  be  taken  of  any  walls  or  outbuildings 
surrounding  whatever  has  been  selected  as  the  reduit  or 
keep ;  and  they  should  be  converted  into  outworks  for 
strengthening  it  as  an  independent  post.  Should  the  vil- 
lage be  of  too  great  an  extent  for  the  force  thrown  into  it, 
a  portion  of  it  only  might  be  strengthened,  and  the  re- 
mainder separated  or  destroyed  ;  or  the  defence  might  be 
confined  to  some  separate  building. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  145 

The  roads  by  which  an  enemy  would  advance  should 
be  cut  up,  and  obstructed  with  felled  trees,  ploughs,  har- 
rows, &c. ;  bridges  should  be  broken,  and  the  passage 
disputed  under  cover  of  some  simple  field  work  placed 
favorably  to  command  the  road. 

The  resolute  defence  of  villages  situated  on  the  front 
of  an  army  has  often  decided  the  fate  of  a  battle ;  in  this 
position,  they  may  be  regarded  as  bastions  connected  by 
movable  curtains. 


ATTACK    ON   FIELD    WORKS. 

The  attack  on  field  works  may  be  executed  by  sur- 
prise, or  by  open  force ;  the  former  can  only  take  place 
when  the  advance  of  the  assailants  is  concealed  by  fog  or 
darkness,  or  by  the  nature  of  the  ground,  as  in  mountain- 
ous countries. 

In  the  attack  of  field  works  by  open  force,  it  is  ad- 
visable to  advance  against  several  points  at  the  same  mo- 
ment, when  circumstances  permit ;  of  these  some  may  be 
false  attacks,  and  may  be  converted  into  real  ones  if  the 
enemy  appears  weak  or  hesitating  on  the  points  threat- 
ened. One  attack  ought,  generally,  to  be  directed  upon 
the  rear  of  the  work,  (if  open  at  the  gorge,)  which  will 
always  lessen  the  confidence  of  the  defenders. 

As  many  assaulting  columns  should  be  formed  as 
there  are  points  to  be  attacked,  and  before  the  works  arc 
stormed,  pits  and  trenches  should  (when  time  permits, 
and  there  is  no  natural  cover  for  skirmishers)  be  dug  to 
conceal  riflemen  :  these  pits  are  about  four  feet  wide,  and, 
with  the  excavated  earth  raised  before  them,  four  feet  in 
depth,  in  order  that  they  may  serve  to  cover  a  file  of  men 
to  that  height. 
7 


146  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

The  artillery  should  be  posted  on  the  prolongations 
of  the  faces  to  enfilade  them,  weaken  the  parapets,  and 
ruin  the  interior  defences  of  the  work  and  its  ditch  •,  for 
the  latter  purpose  howitzers  are  best  adapted.  As  soon 
as  the  artillery  has  produced  some  effect,  the  signal  for 
the  assault  should  be  given ;  light  troops  will  gradually 
advance  towards  the  counterscarp,  in  skirmishing  order, 
firing  at  the  gunners  through  the  embrasures ;  they  will 
conceal  themselves  in  the  pits  and  trenches  prepared  for 
them,  or  seek  shelter  in  the  inequalities  of  the  ground. 
They  should  be  followed  by  storming  parties,  and  these 
should  be  accompanied  by  a  detachment  of  sappers,  (or  a 
squad  of  soldiers  told  off  for  that  purpose,)  carrying  axes, 
crowbars,  bags  of  powder,  &c.,  to  force  obstacles,  Lastly, 
the  reserve  will  follow,  at  some  distance,  to  act  as  cir- 
cumstances may  require ;  it  may  repel  attempts  to  aid 
the  defenders,  reinforce  the  storming  parties  if  they  suc- 
ceed in  entering  the  work,  or  it  may  afford  them  a  rally- 
ing point,  and  cover  their  retreat  if  they  fail. 

The  troops  descend  into  the  ditch  with  unfixed  bayo- 
nets, in  order  to  avoid  accidents  ;  and  they  fix  them  when 
on  the  berme. 

Should  the  ditches  have  a  great  depth,  it  will  be  neces- 
sary to  lessen  it  by  means  of  bags  with  heather  or  grass, 
or  by  bundles  of  hay  or  straw,  or  fascines,  &c. 

A  bridge  formed  of  a  gun  limber  and  a  ladder  may 
be  run  up  to  the  counterscarp  and  thrown  across. 

To  avoid  mistakes  in  inarching  by  night  to  attack, 
each  soldier  should  bear  some  visible  mark  by  which  he 
may  be  distinguished  from  an  enemy.  If  a  breach  or  any 
particular  point  is  to  be  attacked  by  night,  the  way  to  it 
should  be  marked  by  distinguishable  pickets  or  other  ob- 
jects, placed  or  re-marked  on  the  ground  at  the  time  of  the 
previous  reconnoissance. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  14:7 

The  columns  march  to  the  assault  in  the  direction  of 
the  capitals  ;  but  after  passing  the  ditch,  the  troops  should 
enter  the  works  by  the  faces,  on  each  side  of  the  salient 
angle,  that  they  may  present  a  front  in  the  work  equal 
or  superior  to  that  of  the  enemy.  When  it  may  be  ad- 
visable to  force  an  entrance  at  the  gate  of  a  fortified  post, 
that  gate  may  be  destroyed  by  a  piece  of  artillery  brought 
close  up  to  it,  or  by  a  bag  of  powder  attached  to  the  wood 
by  a  gimlet,  or  propped  against  it  by  a  forked  stick. 

In  assaulting  a  place  whose  scarps  and  counterscarps 
are  revetted  with  masonry,  scaling  ladders  must  be  em- 
ployed. The  first  division  of  each  column  of  assault  car- 
ries the  longest  ladders  ;  they  descend  into  the  ditch  with 
them,  and  afterwards  carry  the  ladders  across  and  raise 
them  against  the  scarp. 

The  next  division  carries  other  ladders,  which  they 
place  and  leave  against  the  counterscarp.  The  ladders 
are  carried  and  planted  with  arms  slung.  Ladders  plant- 
ed against  a  wall  are  not  to  slope  above  one-fourth  of 
their  height,  lest  they  should  break  under  the  weight  of 
the  men. 

A  strong  firing  party  is  drawn  up  on  the  glacis  to 
keep  down  the  fire  of  the  defenders,  if  the  latter  should 
appear  on  the  parapets  to  oppose  the  assault. 


ATTACKING    HOUSES. 

In  the  attack  of  houses,  artillery  should  be  employed 
to  form  a  breach  before  giving  the  assault,  and  also  to 
throw  hot  shot,  shells,  and  carcasses. 

If  the  detachment  is  unprovided  with  artillery,  at- 
tempts must  be  made  to  force  passages  through  doors, 
windows,  or  unflanked  parts  of  the  walls :  the  attack 


148  FIELD   FOETIFICATIOXS. 

should  be  made  on  different  parts  of  the  building,  to  dis- 
tract the  attention  of  the  defenders ;  in  the  mean  time, 
and  for  the  same  purpose,  parties  of  men  keep  up  a  fire 
on  any  points  where  there  is  a  chance  of  disabling  them. 
Attempts  may  also  be  made  to  effect  an  entrance  through 
the  roof,  by  means  of  ladders. 

If  the  assailants  have  neither  powder  nor  crowbars  for 
forcing  doors,  a  heavy  beam  or  tree  may,  if  at  hand,  be 
used  as  a  battering  ram  ;  a  fire  of  straw  or  brushwood 
may  be  made  near  the  walls  further  to  distract  and  alarm 
the  defenders,  and  to  cover  the  operations  of  the  assailants. 


ATTACKING    BARRICADES. 

Artillery  will  soon  clear  a  passage  through  ordinary 
barricades  ;  if  not,  the  assaulting  party  must  endeavor  to 
turn  the  barricade,  either  by  passing  down  some  other 
street,  or  by  forcing  a  passage  from  one  house  to  another, 
until  they  arrive  in  rear  of  it :  a  few  loaded  muskets  ap- 
plied to  the  locks  and  bolts  of  the  strongest  door  will 
force  it  open,  and  the  partition  walls  may  be  destroyed 
by  bags  of  powder,  &c.  After  having  taken  possession 
of  a  house,  troops  must  be  left  in  it  for  the  purpose  of 
firing  from  it  upon  the  barricade. 


CHAPTER  X. 

ARTILLERY. 

THE  pieces  of  artillery  in  ordinary  use  are:  guns, 
howitzers,  and  mortars.  They  are  made  either  of  iron  or 
brass,  (gun  metal.) 

Brass  guns  are  made  of  a  metal  composed  of  8  parts 
of  tin  to  100  of  copper,  and  cost  about  $900  per  ton ; 
iron  guns  cost  $100  per  ton. 

Brass  guns  are  used  for  field  batteries,  as  they  can 
be  made  with  a  less  quantity  of  metal  than  iron  guns  of 
the  same  calibre,  without  danger  of  bursting.  Therefore, 
though  brass  is  heavier  than  iron,  guns  of  the  former 
metal  are  lighter  than  those  of  the  latter.  Brass  guns 
are,  however,  soon  rendered  unserviceable  by  repeated 
and  quick  firing. 

Iron  guns  are  better  adapted  for  the  attack  or  defence 
of  fortresses,  and  for  service  on  board  of  ship,  being  less 
expensive  than  those  of  brass,  and  better  able  to  sustain 
long  continued  and  rapid  firing. 

At  the  siege  of  St.  Sebastian,  each  piece  fired  350 
rounds  in  15£  hours  without  becoming  unserviceable : 
brass  guns  could  not  have  fired  120  rounds  in  the  same 
time,  without  drooping  at  the  muzzle  and  running  at  the 
vent  so  much  as  to  become  useless. 

The  length  of  a  gun  is  measured  from  the  rear  of  the 
base  or  breech-ring  to  the  face  of  the  muzzle. 


150  v  ARTILLERY. 

The  CALIBRE  is  the  diameter  of  the  bore. 

The  DISPART  is  the  excess  of  half  the  diameter  of  the 
base  ring  (or  thickest  part  of  the  gun)  above  half  the  di- 
ameter of  the  muzzle.  Guns  are  made  thicker  at  the 
breech  than  at  the  muzzle,  the  better  to  resist  the  expan- 
sive force  of  the  powder. 

The  TRUNNIONS  are  projections  or  arms  one  on  each 
side  of  the  gun,  by  which  it  is  secured  and  supported  in 
the  carriage. 

The  WINDAGE  is  the  excess  of  the  diameter  of  the  bore 
over  the  diameter  of  the  shot,  and  is,  in  field  guns,  about 
T^-  the  diameter  of  the  shot ;  in  iron  guns  it  is  about  £ 
inch.* 

Guns  are  named  according  to  the  number  of  pounds 
contained  in  the  round  shot  they  carry  ;  thus  a  6-pounder 
carries  a  C  Ib.  shot ;  a  12-pounder  carries  a  12  Ib. 
shot,  etc. 

The  service  charge  of  powder  for  battering  is  one- 
third  of  the  weight  of  the  shot. 

The  charge  for  field  guns  is  from  £  to  J  of  the  weight 
of  the  shot,  as  a  greater  charge  is  found  to  injure  the  car- 
riages without  producing  an  equivalent  effect. 

For  ricochet  firing,  the  charge  varies  from  -Jg-  to  -^  the 
weight  of  the  shot ;  and  the  elevation  of  the  gun  from  5° 
to  9°. 

To  increase  the  range  of  the  gun,  an  increase  of  eleva- 
tion above  a  horizontal  line  must  be  given  to  the  axis  of 
the  gun. 

In  pointing  a  gun,  the  line  of  direction  is  given  from 
the  trail,  and  the  elevation  from  the  breech. 


*  12,  9,  and  6  pounders  have  a/10  inch  \vindage  ;  a  3  pounder  has  9/ioo  incn » 
32  pounder  from  1/5  inch  to  Va  inch,  according  to  the  length ;  24  pounder 
about  VB  inch ;  18  pounder  about  J/7  inch.  Carronades  have  a  windage  of  1/64 
the  diameter  of  the  shot. 


ARTILLEKY.  151 

Point-blank  position  of  the  gun  denotes  that  the  piece 
is  laid,  directly,  at  the  object  without  elevation  :  to  effect 
this,  the  lowest  notch  on  the  side  of  the  base  ring,  the 
notch  on  the  side  of  the  muzzle,  and  the  object  to  be  fired 
at,  are  brought  into  one  line ;  the  two  notches  are  in  a 
plane  passing  through  the  axis  of  the  bore,  and  that  plane 
may  be  parallel  or  oblique  to  the  horizon. 

Point-blank  range  is  the  distance  from  the  muzzle  of 
the  gun  to  the  first  point  at  which  the  shot  strikes  the 
ground ;  it  being  supposed  that  the  latter  is  parallel  to 
the  axis  of  the  bore. 

If  the  gun  is  pointed  at  an  object,  by  looking  along 
the  upper  surface  of  it,  (for  which  purpose  there  is  a  notch 
behind  the  vent,  and  one  on  the  top  of  the  muzzle,)  it  is 
said  to  be  laid  by  the  line  of  metal,  and  it  gives  the  gun 
an  elevation  of  about  one  degree ;  the  breech  being  wider 
than  the  muzzle. 

The  upper  right  hand  quadrant  of  the  base  ring  has  12 
quarter  degrees  (called  quarter  sights)  notched  on  it ;  by 
bringing  the  object,  the  notch  on  the  side  of  the  muzzle, 
and  any  quarter  sight  into  one  line,  a  corresponding  ele- 
vation or  depression  is  given  to  the  gun. 

The  tangent-scale  is  raised  from  a  groove  behind  the 
vent,  and  can  be  fixed  at  any  point  of  its  length  by  a 
screw  ;  it  is  divided  into  quarter  degrees  from  one  degree 
upwards  :  by  means  of  this  scale  the  requisite  elevation, 
as  far  as  6  or  8  degrees,  may  be  given  with  great  accu- 
racy, the  object  being  seen  in  a  line  with  the  top  of  the 
tangent-scale,  and  the  notch  on  the  top  of  the  muzzle. 

The  point-blank  range  of  light  (brass)  12,  6,  and  3- 
pounders,  is  200  yards  ;  medium  12  and  9-pound ers  and 
heavy  6-pounders,  300  yards  ;  iron  (long)  24-pounders, 
360  yards. 

Every  quarter  of  a  degree  of  elevation  increases  the 


152  ABTILLEEY. 

range  of  each  class  by  100  yards  until  there  are  attained, 
respectively,  the  ranges  of  600,  700,  and  1200  yards, 
after  which  each  quarter  of  a  degree  increases  the  range 
by  a  less  amount  than  100  yards. 

Howitzers  *  are  a  short  description  of  ordnance  with 
chambers,  and  are  used,  principally,  for  projecting  shells 
horizontally  or  nearly  so. 

Their  principal  advantages  are,  that  they  can  be  more 
easily  loaded,  and  are  considerably  lighter,  in  proportion 
to  their  calibre  than  guns ;  they  may,  also,  be  used  as 
mortars  :  they  have  no  dispart,  the  diameter  of  the  base 
ring  and  swell  of  the  muzzle  being  equal,  or  the  difference 
being  made  up  by  a  patch  on  the  muzzle. 

Howitzers  are  intended  for  enfilade  and  ricochet  firing, 
to  reach  troops  behind  heights  and  parapets,  and  to  breach 
earthen  works  by  firing  shell  into  them :  for  these  puf- 
poses  heavy  charges  are  not  necessary,  although  the  bores 
may  be  large ;  the  chamber  is  formed  so  as  to  confine 
the  powder  as  much  as  possible,  and  so  that  the  shell 
may  rest  on  its  mouth. 

Mortars  differ  from  guns  in  the  construction  of  their 
i  bore,  their  chamber  being  in  the  shape  of  a  frustum  of  a 
cone,  by  which  means  the  powder  is  confined,  and  the 
shell  fits  close  to  the  sides ;  they  are  also  much  shorter 
and  thicker  than  guns :  they  have  trunnions  at  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  breech,  and  are  usually  placed  on  their 
beds  so  as  to  project  shells,  carcasses,  or  fire  balls  at  an 
angle  of  45°,  the  range  being  increased  by  augmenting 
the  charge  of  powder. 

The  shells  discharged  from  mortars  describe  a  high 
curve  in  their  flight,  and  fall  with  their  full  weight  almost 
vertically  upon  the  object  to  be  struck ;  they  thus  frac- 

*  The  charges  for  certain  howitzers  are  as  follows :— 10-inch,  7  Ibs. ;  8-inch, 
4  Ibs. ;  5i-inch,  (24-pounder,)  2  toZilbs. ;  42/6-mch,  (12ipounder,)  £  to  i  Ib. 


ARTILLERY.  153 

ture  the  strongest  buildings,  and  bursting  at  the  same 
time,  they  set  fire  to  every  thing  combustible  about 
them. 

Their  splinters  are  also  very  destructive,  and  fiy  in 
all  directions,  sometimes  as  far  as  400  yards.  As  mor- 
tars fire  over  the  parapet,  and  not  through  embrasures, 
it  is  necessary  that  they  should  be  placed  at  a  distance 
of  12  feet  behind  the  crest  of  the  parapet,  supposing  it  to 
be  of  the  ordinary  height. 

Kockets  are  cylindrical  cases  of  pasteboard  *  or  iron, 
attached  to  one  end  of  a  rod  of  wood,  and  containing  a 
composition,  which  being  ignited,  they  are  projected 
through  the  air  by  a  force  arising  from  the  combustion. 

Military  rockets  terminate  either  in  a  cone  or  a  par- 
abolid,  and  may  serve  either  as  shells  or  carcasses  :  their 
weight  is  from  3  to  32  Ibs.  They  are,  in  general,  fired 
from  tubes,  and  the  proper  elevation  is  about  a  degree 
for  each  hundred  yards  in  the  intended  range.  Fired 
against  troops  they  create  much  disorder,  and  falling  on 
buildings,  they  destroy  them  or  set  them  on  fire. 

The  length  of  the  rod  is  about  60  diameters  of  the 
rocket,  and  the  composition  with  which  the  cylinder  is 
filled  consists  generally  of  saltpetre,  sulphur,  and  charcoal 
or  gunpowder.  The  composition  is  rammed  into  the  case, 
but  a  void  space  is  left  about  the  axis,  in  order  that  a 
considerable  surface  may  be  at  once  in  a  state  of  combus* 
tion.  At  the  choke  or  neck  of  the  rocket  there  are  several 
apertures,  at  one  of  which  the  fire  is  communicated  to  the. 
composition. 

The  cause  of  the  rocket's  motion  is,  the  excess  of  the 
pressure  produced  by  the  burning  material  at  the  head  of 
the  rocket  above  the  pressure  at  the  neck,  when  part  of 

*  Tho  former  arc  for  signals,  and  tho  latter  aro  for  military  service. 


AJRTILLERY. 

the  flame  escapes  through  the  apertures  ;  the  stick  serves 
to  guide  the  rocket  in  its  flight. 

Shells  are  hollow  shot  with  a  hole  to  receive  the  fuse ; 
they  are  discharged,  usually,  from  mortars  and  howitzers, 
and  are  charged  with  a  quantity  of  powder  sufficient  to 
burst  them  when  at  the  end  of  their  range  ;  the  fuze  being 
cut  of  such  a  length  that  the  charge  may  be  ignited  at  the 
proper  moment. 

To  breach  earthen  works,  the  shells  are  fired  horizon- 
tally, from  howitzers,  with  reduced  charges,  that  the  fuze 
may  not  be  extinguished  before  igniting  the  powder  in 
the  shell :  this  powder  is  a  bursting  charge. 

Carcasses  are  shells  with  three  fuze  holes ;  they  are 
filled  with  a  peculiar  composition,  which  flames  out  of  the 
holes  with  great  power  and  fury  for  about  ten  minutes  : 
they  are  thrown  from  mortars,  howitzers,  and  guns,  to 
set  fire  to  buildings,  and  sometimes  to  serve  as  light 
balls. 

Shrapnell  shells,  or  spherical-case  shot,  are  shells  filled 
with  musket  balls,  having  a  bursting  charge  of  powder 
mixed  with  them.  They  are  discharged  from  guns  and 
howitzers,  and  have  a  fuze  like  that  of  a  common  shell, 
but  shorter,  in  order  that  the  shell  may  burst  in  the  air 
before  the  completion  of  its  range  ;  in  this  manner  mus- 
ket balls  and  the  splinters  of  the  shell  can  be  poured  into 
a  column  of  troops  at  1,200  yards  distance. 

Common  case,  or  canister  shot,  are  cylindrical  tin 
canisters  with  wooden  or  iron  bottoms,  containing  from 
\  12  to  70  shot,  which  vary  in  weight  from  1 J  oz.  to  8  oz. 
each,  according  to  the  calibre  of  the  gun.  As  they  burst 
nearly  at  the  mouth  of  the  gun,  their  effect  cannot  be  de- 
pended on  beyond  200  yards,  although  they  are  used  at 
a  greater  distance. 

Grape  shot  are  of  two  patterns ;  either  the  balls  are 


ARTILLERY.  155 

quilted  round  an  iron  pin  with  a  circular  plate  at  the 
bottom,  or  a  pin  runs  through  a  succession  of  plates,  be- 
tween every  two  of  which  is  a  tier  of  balls  ;  in  the  latter 
case  they  are  also  called  "  tier  shot." 

In  the  first  pattern,  the  shot  soon  corrode  the  canvas 
quilting,  therefore  the  second  is  preferred :  there  are  9 
shot  in  each  round,  each  shot  varying  in  weight  from  8 
oz.  to  4  Ibs.  according  to  the  calibre  of  the  gun  ;  the  most 
effective  range  is  about  200  yards. 

Hand  grenades  are  shells  of  about  1  Ib.  13  oz.  weight,  \ 
with  a  fuze  and  bursting  charge  ;  they  can  be  thrown,  by  j 
the  hand,  about  25  or  30  yards ;  they  are  useful  for  the  / 
defence  of  breaches  and  unflanked  works. 

Gunpowder  is  composed  of  75  parts  saltpetre,  15 
charcoal,  and  10  sulphur  in  every  hundred  parts :  a  cubic 
foot  of  it  weighs  about  55  Ibs. 

A  shell  fuze  is  a  funnel-shaped  tube  of  well-seasoned  \ 
beech,  filled  with   a   composition   of  saltpetre,  sulphur,    r" 
and  mealed  gunpowder. 

Portfire  is  a  composition  of  saltpetre,  charcoal,  arict\ 
sulphur,  pressed  closely  into  a  cylinder  of  white  brown   l/x 
paper :  they  are  made  in  lengths  of  16  inches,  and  are/^ 
used  to  discharge  guns,  to  ignite  bags  of  powder,  &c. 

Portfire  and  shell  fuzes  burn  at  the  rate  of  one  inch 
in  five  seconds  :  Bickford's  fuze  (which  will  burn  under 
water)  burns  6  inches  in  5  seconds,  or  2  yards  in  a 
minute. 

To  fire  shot  or  shells  a  ricochet,  or  in  such  a  manner 
that  they  make  several  bounds  during  their  course,  it  is 
necessary  to  give  the  gun  or  howitzer  a  charge,  and  an 
elevation  depending  on  the  extent  of  the  range  required. 
In  enfilading  a  work  ricochet,  the  gun  should  be  placed 
nearly  in  the  direction  of  the  interior  slope  of  the  parapet 


156  AKTILLEBY. 

produced ;  and  its  elevation  should  be  such  that  the  shot 
may  just  clear  the  crest  of  the  parapet  in  front. 

Ricochet  firing  against  guns  in  a  work,  is  useless  if 
carried  on  at  a  greater  distance  than  650  yards ;  the  best 
range  is  about  400  yards. 

Round  shot  are  sometimes  fired  red  hot  from  heavy 
guns,  to  set  on  fire  buildings,  blockhouses,  shipping,  and 
any  defences  in  the  construction  of  which  timber  has  been 
employed. 

It  requires  about  three-quarters  of  an  hour  to  heat  a 
24  pound  shot  when  the  furnace  has  been  previously  pre- 
pared ;  double  that  time  if  not.  In  loading,  a  tight  dry 
wad  is  placed  over  the  powder,  and  afterwards  a  wet  wad, 
first  soaked,  and  then  well  wrung ;  next,  the  gun  being 
slightly  elevated,  the  shot  is  brought  up,  by  means  of  an 
instrument  called  the  carrier,  and  rolled  home ;  if  it  is 
required  to  depress  the  gun,  another  wet  wad  must  be 
placed  over  the  shot. 

A  gun  platform  is  a  flooring  of  wood  or  stone,  to  pre- 
vent the  wheels  or  trucks  of  a  gun  carriage  from  sinking 
into  the  ground :  the  garrison  and  siege  platforms  are 
10  feet  wide  at  the  head,  15  feet  long,  and  14  feet  wide  at 
the  splay  or  tail. 


CHAPTER  XL 

MANUAL   FOR    LIGHT  ARTILLERY. 

1.  FOR  instruction  in  the  manual  of  light  artillery, 
the  piece  selected  is  the  light  12-pdr.  howitzer,  used  for 
mountain  service,  on  account  of  its  simplicity,  and  as  em- 
bracing all  the  principles  required  for  serving  a  light  field 
piece.     It  is  generally  transported  by  mules.     The  piece 
and  the  shafts  may  be  packed  upon  one  mule,  the  carriage 
upon  another,  and  the'  ammunition  chest  upon  a  third. 
The  carriage  is  adapted  for  draught. 

In  case  the  pieces  are  served  by  a  fully  organized 
company,  a  jumper  or  short  light  pole,  with  a  cross-piece 
of  iron  at  the  end,  is  substituted  for  the  shafts.  A  rope, 
attached  to  the  axle-tree  and  running  through  rings  in  the 
cross-piece,  enables  the  detachments  to  draw  the  pieces. 
In  coming  into  battery,  the  rope  is  detached  and  held  in 
a  coil  ready  for  use. 

2.  The  mule  that  draws  the  piece,  or  carries  it  when 
packed,  is  called  the  shaft  mule ;  the  mule  that  carries 
the  carriage,  when  packed,  the  carriage  mule ;   and  the 
mule  on  which  the  ammunition  chests  are  packed,  the  am- 
munition mule. 

3.  The  piece  is  in  battery  when  the  shafts  are  detached 
and  it  is  in  a  proper  position  to  be  fired.     The  front  in 
this  case  is  the  direction  towards  which  the  muzzle  points. 


X 

158  MANUAL   FOE   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 

The  front,  when  the  shafts  are  attached,  is  the  direction 
towards  which  the  shafts  point.  The  right  of  the  piece, 
in  both  cases,  is  the  right  of  the  cannoneer  when  facing 
to  the  front. 

The  position  of  the  mules,  when  the  piece  is  in  bat- 
tery, is  as  follows : 

The  ammunition  mule  fifteen  yards  in  rear  of  the 
piece,  the  shaft  mule  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  ammunition 
mule,  and  the  carriage  mule  two  yards  in  rear  of  the 
shaft  mule,  all  facing  towards  the  piece. 

4.  In  the  order  of  march)  with  the  howitzer  mounted 
on  its  carriage,  the  shaft  mule  is  hitched  in,  and  the  car- 
riage and  ammunition  mules  follow ;  the  first  two  yards 
from  the  piece,  and  the  second  two  yards  from  the  first. 

5.  In  the  order  of  march,  with  the  piece  and  carriage 
packed  upon  the  mules,  the  shaft  mule  leads,  and  the  other 
two  follow ;  the  distance  between  each  being  two  yards. 

FORMING    THE    DETACHMENT. 

6.  Six  men  are  required  for  the  service  of  the  piece. 
They  are  formed  in  two  ranks,  and  told  off  from  the  right 
by  the  chief  of  piece ;  Nos.  1  and  2  being  on  the  right, 
No.  3  and  the  gunner  being  in  the  centre,  and  Nos.  4 
and  5  on  their  left ;  the  even  numbers  and  the  gunner 
being  in  the  front,  and  the  odd  numbers  in  the  rear  rank. 

The  detachment  is  marched  to  the  piece,  and  posted 
as  follows : 

POSTS     OF    THE    DETACHMENT. 

7.  In  battery.     Nos.  1  and  2  about  one  yard  outside 
of  the  wheels,  and  in  line  with  the  axle-tree,  No.  1  being 
on  the  right,  and  No.  2  on  the  left ;  the  gunner  at  the 


MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   AETILLEKY.  159 

end  of  the  trail ;  No.  3  opposite  the  knob  of  the  cascable, 
covering  No.  1  ;  No.  4  on  the  right,  and  No.  5  on  the 
left  of  the  ammunition  mule ;  all  facing  to  the  front. 
The  chief  of  piece  is  opposite  to  the  trail,  outside  of  and 
near  the  left  cannoneers. 

8.  In  battery,  without  mules.  Nos.  4  and  5  are  on  the 
right  and  left  of  the  ammunition  chests,  facing  to  the 
front. 

0.  In  the  order  of  march,  shaft  mules  hitched  in.   Nos. 

1  and  2  opposite  to  the  muzzle ;  the  gunner  and  No.  3 
opposite  to  the  trail ;  and  Nos.  4  and  5  opposite  to  the 
saddle  of  the  ammunition  mule ;  the  gunner   and  even 
numbers  on  the  right,  and  the  odd  numbers  on  the  left ; 
all  facing  to  the  front,  and  covering  each  other  in  lines 
one  yard  from  the  wheels.     The  chief  of  piece  is  on  the 
left  of  the  driver  of  the  shaft  mule. 

10.  In  the  order  of  march,  mules  packed.     Nos.  1  and 

2  at  the  shaft  mule ;  the  gunner  and  No.  3  at  the  car- 
riage mule ;  and  Nos.  4  and  5  at  the  ammunition  mule ; 
the  gunner  and  even  numbers  on  the  right,  and  odd  num- 
bers on  the  left ;  all  opposite  to  the  saddles,  one   yard 
from  the  mules,  and  facing  to  the  fronk     The  chief  of 
piece  is  on  the  left  of  the  driver  of  the  shaft  mule. 

11.  There  is  one  driver  to  each  mule.     He  is  on  the 
left  of  the  mule,  and  holds  the  reins  with  the  right  hand, 
six  inches  from  the  mouth,  the  hand  high  and  firm. 


SERVICE     OF    THE    PIECE. 

12.  The  piece  is  in  battery,  the  men  at  their  posts. 
(No.  7.) 

The  shafts  are  placed  on  the  ground,  one  yard  and  a 
half  from  the  line  of  the  right  wheel,  and  parallel  to  it, 


160  MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   AKTILLEKY. 

the  cross-bar  opposite  to  the  trail,  the  shafts  pointing  to 
the  rear. 

The  chests,  when  the  ammunition  mule  is  absent,  are 
on  the  ground,  fifteen  yards  in  rear  of  the  trail,  their  sides 
parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece,  backs  together,  the  turn- 
buckles  outside. 

13.  At  the  command  TAKE  EQUIPMENTS,  the  gunner 
distributes  the  equipments.  No.  1,  with  the  assistance 
of  No.  3,  takes  out  the  sponge.  The  gunner  equips  him- 
self with  the  belt  containing  the  hausse  and  priming  wire, 
and  with  the  knee-guard  and  the  finger-stall,  wearing  the 
last  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand.  No.  3  wears 
the  tube  pouch  containing  friction  tubes  and  the  lanyard. 
Nos.  1  and  2  wear  bricoles  hung  from  the  left  shoulder 
to  the  right  side.  Nos.  2  and  5  wear  haversacks  hung 
from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 


THE    COMMANDS. 

14.  In  loading  by  detail,  the  instructor  gives  all  the 
commands. 

The  commands  are  :  Load  by  detail,  LOAD,  2,  3,  4  ; 
SPONGE,  2,  3,  4 ;  RAM,  2,  3  ;  READY  ;  FIRE  ;  and  CEASE 
FIRING. 

When  the  service  of  the  piece  is  not  executed  by  de- 
tail, the  commands  of  the  instructor  are,  either  LOAD, 
COMMENCE  FIRING,  and  CEASE  FIRING  ;  or,  COMMENCE 
FIRING  and  CEASE  FIRING.  After  the  command  COMMENCE 
FIRING,  the  action  is  continued  without  further  commands 
from  the  instructor  until  the  command  CEASE  FIRING. 

The  last  command  is  repeated  by  the  chief  of  piece 
and  the  gunner. 


I 
1 

•  H 

A 


0 

s 

-p 

I 

B 
g 

'S 

-M 
P 


MANUAL  FOB  LIGHT  AKTILLEKY.  161 


DUTIES    OF    THE    CANNONEERS. 

15.  Duties  of  the   Gunner. — In  action,  the  gunner 
gives  or  repeats  the  commands  of  execution.     At  the 
command  or  signal   to  commence  firing,  he   gives   the 
word  LOAD  ;  plants  the  left  foot  opposite  to  the  knob  of 
the  cascable  ;  places  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  near, 
and  on  the  left  of  the  trail ;  places  the  hausse,  when  it  is 
used ;  seizes  the  lunette  with  the  right  hand,  to  give  the 
direction,  and  at  the  same  time  tends  vent  with  the  second 
finger  of  the  left  hand,  the  thumb  on  the  base  of  the 
breech. 

As  soon  as  the  piece  is  loaded  and  aimed,  he  removes 
the  hausse ;  then  rising  pricks  the  cartridge ;  gives  the 
word  BEADY,  and  stepping  clear  of  the  wheel  to  the  side 
whence  he  can  best  observe  the  effect  of  the  shot,  gives 
the  command,  FIRE.  He  continues  the  action  in  the  same 
manner,  without  farther  commands  from  the  instructor, 
until  the  firing  is  ordered  to  cease. 

When  the  instructor,  instead  of  giving  the  command 
COMMENCE  FIRING,  gives  that  of  LOAD,  the  gunner  repeats 
it,  and  performs  the  same  duties  as  just  described,  except 
that  he  does  not  command  FIRE,  until  the  firing  is  ordered 
to  commence. 

When  the  instructor  gives  all  the  commands,  the 
gunner  performs  the  same  duties,  but  without  repeating 
the  commands. 

16.  Duties  of  No.  1. — Until  the  command  LOAD,  he 
stands  square  to  the  front,  in  line  with  the  axle-tree,  hold- 
ing the  sponge  staff  about  the  middle  in  the  right  hand, 
and  trailing  it  at  an  angle  of  45°. 

For  the  convenience  of  instruction,  the  duties  of  No. 
1  are  divided  into  motions. 


162  MANUAL   FOK   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 

First  motion. — At  the  command  LOAD,  No.  1  faces  to 
his  left,  steps  obliquely  to  his  right  with  the  right  foot, 
and  brings  the  sponge  into  a  perpendicular  position  over 
the  right  toe,  the  elbow  close  to  the  side,  the  right  hand 
at  the  height  of  the  elbow. 

Second  motion. — He  plants  the  left  foot  near,  and  in 
line  with  the  wheel,  and  inclines  the  sponge  across  the 
body  to  the  left,  the  right  opposite  to  the  middle  of  the 
body. 

Third  motion. — He  places  the  right  foot  twelve  inches 
to  the  right  of  the  left,  heels  on  the  same  line ;  brings 
the  sponge  into  a  horizontal  position,  and  extending  the 
hands  towards  the  ends  of  the  staff,  back  of  the  right  hand 
up,  that  of  the  left  down,  rests  the  sponge-head  against 
the  face  of  the  piece ;  the  knees  straight,  the  feet  turned 
out  equally,  and  the  body  inclined  forward. 

Fourth  motion. — He  introduces  the  sponge,  drops  the 
left  hand  by  the  side  of  his  thigh,  and  shoves  the  sponge 
to  the  bottom  of  the  chamber. 

17.  At  the  command  SPONGE,  he  carefully  sponges 
out  the  chamber. 

Second  motion. — He  draws  out  the  sponge,  pressing 
it  upon  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  seizes  the  staff  near  the 
sponge-head  with  the  left  hand,  back  down,  and  rests  it 
against  the  face  of  the  piece. 

Third  motion. — He  turns  the  sponge  over  by  bringing 
the  hands  together  at  the  middle  of  the  staff,  and  giving 
it  a  cant  with  each,  throws  the  sponge  over ;  at  the  same 
time  turning  the  wrists  so  as  to  bring  the  staff  horizon- 
tal. Ha  then  extends  the  hands  towards  the  ends  of  the 
staff,  back  of  the  left  up,  that  of  the  right  down. 

Fourth  motion. — As  soon  as  the  charge  is  inserted  he 
introduces  the  rammer-head  into  the  muzzle,  and  joins  the 
left  hand  to  the  right. 


MANUAL   FOR  LIGHT   AKTILLERY.  163 

18.  At  the  command  RAM,  he  sends  the  charge  care- 
fully home,  throwing  the  left  hand  over  the  piece. 

Second  motion. — He  draws  out  the  sponge  with  the 
right  hand,  letting  it  slide  through  the  hand  as  far  as  the 
middle  of  the  staff,  when  he  grasps  it  firmly,  and  seizing 
it  close  to  the  rammer-head  with  the  left  hand,  back  up, 
rests  it  against  the  face  of  the  piece. 

Third  motion. — He  raises  the  sponge  to  the  height  of 
his  breast,  and  steps  back,  right  foot  first,  to  his  position 
opposite  to  the  axle-tree ;  quits  the  staff  with  the  lefb 
hand,  and  throwing  the  sponge  uppermost,  holds  it  at  a 
trail  in  the  right.  He  remains  facing  the  piece  until  the 
command  LOAD,  when  he  steps  up  and  performs  the  duties 
just  described. 

When  the  loading  is  not  by  detail,  No.  1  goes  through 
all  his  duties  at  the  command  LOAD. 

At  the  flash  of  the  gun,  or  command  LOAD,  he  steps 
up  and  again  performs  his  duties  as  before,  and  so  on, 
until  the  command  CEASE  FIRING  is  given.  At  this  com- 
mand he  resumes  his  post,  faces  to  the  front,  first  spong- 
ing out  the  piece  if  it  has  been  commenced. 

19.  Duties  of  Nos.  2  and  5. — Until  the  command 
LOAD,  Nos.  2  and  5  stand  square  to  the  front,  the  former 
in  line  with  the  axle-tree,  the  latter  on  the  left  of  the  am- 
munition mule,  or  chests. 

At  this  command,  No.  2  faces  about  and  goes  to  the 
ammunition  chest ;  and  No.  5,  having  received  a  round 
of  ammunition  from  No.  4,  carries  it  to  the  piece ;  placing 
himself  opposite  to  No.  1,  and  in  line  with  the  wheel, 
inserts  the  charge  as  soon  as  No.  1  has  sponged,  then 
steps  back  to  the  post  of  No.  2,  opposite  to  the  axle-tree, 
and  there  remains  facing  the  piece  until  it  is  fired,  when 
he  returns  to  the  ammunition  chest,  No.  2 ;  having  re- 
ceived a  round  of  ammunition,  carries  it  to  within  five 


164:  MANUAL   FOE   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 

yards  of  the  wheel,  where  he  remains  until  the  piece  is 
fired  ;  he  then  moves  forward  and  executes  the  remainder 
of  the  service  as  just  described  for  No.  5. 

Nos.  2  and  5,  in  moving  to  and  from  the  piece,  go  at 
a  run  and  pass  each  other  by  the  right. 

In  inserting  the  charge  they  should  be  careful  to  keep 
the  seam  down,  and  to  place  the  fuze  in  the  axis  of  the 
bore. 

At  the  command  CEASE  FIRING,  they  resume  their 
posts,  facing  to  the  front. 

20.  Duties  of  No.  3. — No.  3  holds  the  handle  of  the 
lanyard  in  the  right  hand,  the  cord  passing  between  the 
fingers,  the  hook  between  the  forefinger  and  thumb.     At 
the  command  LOAD,  he  takes  a  friction  tube  in  the  left 
hand,  and  passes  the  hook  of  the  lanyard  through  the  eye 
of  the  tube  from  right  to  left,  continuing  to  hold  the  hook 
between  the  thumb  and  forefinger.     At  the  word  EEADY, 
he  faces  the  piece,  and  steps  up,  keeping  outside  of  the 
wheel ;  inserts  the  tube,  steps  back  with  the  right  foot, 
breaks  to  his  rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  and  holds 
the  lanyard  slightly  stretched,  the  handle  at  the  height  of 
the  knee,  back  of  the  hand  up,  the  left  hand  against  the 
thigh.     At  the  command  FIRE,  he  gives  a  smart  pull 
upon  the  lanyard,  being  careful  to  keep  the  hand  low, 
and  then  resumes  his  post. 

At  the  command  CEASE  FIRING,  he  winds  the  lanyard 
upon  its  handle,  and  if  dry,  puts  it  in  the  tube  pouch. 

21.  Duties  of  No.  4. — No.  4  attends  at  the  ammu- 
nition chest,  serves  out  ammunition,  and  prepares  and 
inserts  fuzes. 

CHANGING   POSTS. 

22.  In  order  to  instruct  the  men  in  all  the  duties  at 


MANUAL  FOR  LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  165 

the  piece,  the  instructor  causes  them  to  change  posts  by 
the  following  commands  : 

1.   Change  Posts.     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  on  the  right  of 
the  piece  face  about,  take  off  their  equipments,  and  place 
them  on  the  piece  or  ammunition  chests.  At  the  second 
command,  all  step  off,  each  taking  the  post  and  equip- 
ments of  the  one  in  his  front ;  No.  2  passing  around  the 
muzzle  to  gain  the  post  of  No.  1,  and  No.  4  around  the 
ammunition  chest  to  take  that  of  No.  5. 

23.  During  the  intervals  of  rest,  the  instructor  will 
explain  to  the  men  the  nomenclatures  of  the  piece  and 
carriage,  and  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements  and 
equipments. 

SERVICE    OF   THE    PIECE  WITH    DETACHMENTS    OF   DIFFERENT 
STRENGTHS. 

24.  Two  men.     The  gunner  commands,  tends  vent, 
points,  pricks,  primes,  and  fires.     No.  1  sponges,  serves 
ammunition,  and  loads. 

Three  men.  The  gunner  commands,  tends  vent,  points, 
pricks,  primes,  and  fires.  No.  1  sponges.  No.  2  serves 
ammunition,  and  loads. 

Four  men.  The  gunner  commands,  tends  vent,  points, 
and  pricks.  No.  1  sponges.  No.  2  serves  ammunition, 
and  loads.  No.  3  primes  and  fires. 

Five  men.  No.  4  attends  at  the  chests,  and  serves 
ammunition  to  No.  2,  occasionally  alternating  with  him. 
The  other  numbers  serve  as  with  four  men. 

Six  men.  No  5  alternates  habitually  with  No.  2. 
No.  4  remains  at  the  chests.  The  other  numbers  serve 
as  with  four  men. 


166  MANUAL   FOE   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 

THE   LOCKING   ROPE. 

25.  The  locking  rope  is  habitually  coiled  and  sus- 
pended from  the  front  arc  of  the  saddle  of  the  shaft  mule. 
When  it  becomes  necessary  to  use  it  in  order  to  prevent 
the  too  great  recoil  of  the  piece,  No.  2,  on  receiving  orders 
to  that  effect,  brings  it  up  from  the  mule,  and,  with  the 
assistance  of  No.  1,  locks  the  wheels.     No.  2  attaches  one^ 
end  of  it  by  a  timber  hitch  to  the  felly  of  the  left  wheel, 
near  the  ground,  and  No.  1  attaches  the  other  end  in  the 
same  manner  to  the  right  wheel,  the  rope  passing  over 
the  stock.     The  length  of  the  rope  should  be  regulated  by 
the  nature  of  the  ground. 

When  in  firing  it  becomes  necessary  to  run  the  piece 
forward,  the  locking  rope  is  detached ;  No.  2  carries  it ; 
and  it  is  reattached  as  soon  as  the  piece  is  in  battery. 
When  not  in  use  it  is  placed  on  the  ground,  outside  of 
and  near  No.  2. 

When  the  firing  is  to  be  discontinued,  No.  2  returns 
it  to  its  place  on  the  saddle.  The  locking  rope  should  not 
be  used  when  it  can  be  avoided  ;  since  on  rough  ground 
it  is  liable  to  break  the  wheels,  and  on  soft  ground  to 
upset  the  carriage. 

ATTACHING  AND  DETACHING  THE  SHAFTS. 

26.  To  attach  the  shafts,  the  instructor  commands  : 

ATTACH  SHAFTS. 

The  gunner  raises  the  trail ;  No.  3  springs  in  between 
the  shafts,  seizes  them  about  twelve  inches  from  the  cross- 
bar, and  places  the  supporting  bar  upon  the  trail ;'  the 
gunner  then  puts  in  the  key  and  lowers  the  trail  to  the 
ground.  No.  1,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  3,  puts  up 


MANUAL  FOR   LIGHT   AETILLEEY.  167 

the  sponge ;  and  the  cannoneers  about  the  piece  assume 
their  posts  as  in  the  order  of  march,  shaft  mule  hitched  in. 

27.  To  detach  the  shafts,  the  instructor  commands  : 

DETACH  SHAFTS. 

The  gunner  raises  the  trail,  and  unkeys  the  shafts ; 
No.  3  springs  in  between  them,  seizes  them  about  twelve 
inches  from  the  cross-bar,  (the  gunner  at  the  same  time 
lowering  the  trail  to  the  ground,)  detaches,  and  places 
them  as  prescribed  in  No.  12. 

No.  1,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  3,  takes  out  the 
sponge ;  and  the  cannoneers  about  the  piece  take  their 
posts  as  in  battery. 

MOVING   THE    PIECE    BY   MEANS    OF   THE    CANNONEERS. 

28.  The  shafts  detached.     The  instructor  commands  : 
1.  By  hand  to  the  front  (or  rear.)     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command  Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  to  the  front, 
(or  rear,)  apply  themselves  to  the  wheels  with  the  hand 
nearest  to  the  piece,  the  former  carrying  the  sponge,  and 
the  latter  the  locking  rope  in  the  hand  farthest  from  the 
piece ;  the  gunner  raises  the  trail. 

At  the  second  command,  all  step  off.  At  the  com- 
mand, HALT,  they  resume  their  posts. 

29.  When  bricoles  are  to  be  used,  the  shafts  attached. 
The  instructor  commands : 

1.  By  bricoles  to  the  front  (or  rear.)     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  1  and  2  attach  the  hooks 
of  their  bricoles  to  the  washerhooks,  and  hold  the  rope 
with  the  hand  nearest  to  the  piece ;  the  gunner  and  No. 
3  apply  themselves  to  the  shafts ;  all  facing  in  the  direc- 
tion they  are  to  move. 


168  MANUAL   FOB  LIGHT  ARTTLLEKY. 

At  the  second  command,  all  step  off. 

At  the  command,  HALT,  they  resume  their  posts ;  Nos. 
1  and  2  unhooking  their  bricoles  with  the  hand  nearest  to 
the  piece. 

30.  Without  bricoles,  the  shafts  attached.  The  in- 
structor commands  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  gunner  and  No.  3  apply 
themselves  to  the  shafts ;  Nos.  1  and  2  at  the  wheels,  as 
in  No.  28. 

At  the  second  command,  all  step  off.  At  the  com- 
mand, HALT,  they  resume  their  posts. 

When  the  movement  requires  it,  Nos.  4  and  5  carry 
the  ammunition  chests  to  their  new  position. 

No.  3  carries  the  shafts  when  they  are  detached. 


SERVICE    OF    SEVERAL    PIECES. 

31.     Forming,  and  marching  the  detachments  to  and 
from  the  pieces,  are  executed  as  in  field  artillery. 


POSTING   AND    CHANGING    THE    POSITION    OF    DETACHMENTS. 

32.  To  form  the  order  of  march,  the  detachments 
being  in  line  in  front.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Detachments,  to  your  posts.     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  pieces  face  the  de- 
tachments to  the  right.  At  the  second,  the  detachments, 
Nos.  1  and  2  opening  out,  file  to  their  posts,  each  member 
halting  at  his  place.  The  chiefs  of  pieces  face  them  to  the 
front  by  the  command,  ABOUT  FACE. 


MANUAL   FOK   LIGHT   AKTILLEKY.  169 

To  form  the  order  of  march,  the  detachments  being  in 
line,  in  rear,  the  instructor  gives  the  same  commands. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  pieces  face  the  de- 
tachments to  the  left;  at  the  second,  the  detachments 
march  to  their  posts  ;  each  number  halting  as  before. 

33.  From  the  order  of  march,  to  the  front  (or  rear.) 
The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Detachments  front  (or  rear.)     2.  MARCH. 

To  the  front.  At  the  second  command,  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  pieces,  the  detachments,  No.  3  and  the  gunner 
closing  to  the  centre  when  clear  of  the  mule,  march  to  the 
front,  file  to  the  left,  and  are  halted,  and  faced  to  the  front 
by  the  chiefs  of  pieces. 

To  the  rear.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of 
pieces  face  the  detachments  about,  Nos.  4  and  5  standing 
fast.  At  the  second  command,  the  detachments,  Nos.  1 
and  2  closing  to  the  centre  as  they  advance,  march  to  the 
rear,  file  to  the  left,  are  halted  and  faced  to  the  front  by 
the  chiefs  of  pieces.  In  both  cases  Nos.  4  and  5  take 
their  places  on  the  left,  when  the  detachment  is  in  the 
position  ordered. 


HITCHING    AND    UNHITCHING.     , 

34.  To  the  front.     The  instructor  commands  : 
Hitch  to  the  front. 

At  this  command,  the  shafts  are  attached,  (No.  26,) 
and  the  gunner  and  No.  3  bring  the  piece  about,  each  by 
means  of  the  shaft  on  his  own  side. 

The  mule,  passing  on  the  right  of  the  piece,  is  led  by 
its  driver  to  the  front  and  hitched  in,  the  driver  backing 
the  mule  and  buckling  the  breast  straps  to  the  staples ; 
8 


170  MANUAL   FOB   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 

the  gunner  and  No.  3  buckling  the  thill  straps  around  the 
shafts  through  the  staples,  and  the  breech  straps  to  the 
staples. 

35.  To  the  right  (or  left.)    The  instructor  commands : 

Hitch  to  the  right  (or  left.) 

At  this  command  the  shafts  are  attached,  and  turned 
in  the  proper  direction,  and  the  mule,  inclining  to  the  right 
or  left,  is  led  to  its  place,  and  hitched  in  as  before. 

36.  To  the  rear.     The  instructor  commands : 

Hitch  to  the  rear. 

At  this  command,  the  shafts  are  attached,  the  mule 
brought  up,  faced  about,  and  hitched  in  as  before. 

37.  In  hitching  in  to  the  front,  the  carriage  and  am- 
munition mules,  the  former  first  passing  the  latter,  are  led 
up  to  their  proper  positions. 

In  hitching  in  to  the  right,  (or  left,)  the  mules  are,  in 
like  manner,  led  up  and  wheeled  to  the  right  or  left,  at 
the  proper  intervals. 

In  hitching  in  to  the  rear,  the  carriage  and  ammuni- 
tion mules,  following  the  shaft  mule  in  the  order  named, 
are  led  past  the  piece  to  their  position  in  the  rear. 

For  the  position  of  the  mules,  see  No.  3. 

UNHITCHING   AND    COM.TNG   INTO   ACTION. 

38.  To  the  front.     The  instructor  commands  : 

Action  Front. 

At  this  command,  the  mule  is  unhitched,  the  driver 
unbuckling  the  breast  straps,  and  the  gunner  and  No.  3 
the  breech  and  thill  straps.  The  driver  then  leads  the 
mule  to  its  place  in  rear,  and  the  gunner  and  No.  3,  sup- 


MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  171 

porting  the  shafts  till  the  mule  is  taken  out,  bring  the 
piece  about.  This  done,  the  shafts  are  detached  and 
placed  as  above. 

The  carriage  and  ammunition  mules  are  led  at  once 
to  their  positions,  (see  No.  3.) 

39.  To  the  right,  left,  or  rear.     The  instructor  com- 
mands : 

Action  right,  (left,  or  rear.) 

At  this  command,  the  mule  is  unhitched ;  the  piece 
placed  in  the  required  direction  ;  the  shafts  detached,  and 
each  mule  led  to  its  proper  position. 

In  action  rear,  the  carriage  and  ammunition  mules 
pass  by  the  right  of  the  piece  to  their  places  in  rear.  The 
mules  face  towards  the  piece  as  in  action  front. 

PACKING    AND    UNPACKING. 

40.  The  mule  unhitched,  and  shafts  detached.     The 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Prepare  to  pack  the  Piece.     2.  PACK  THE  PIECE. 

At  the  first  command,  the  driver  leads  the  shaft  mule 
three  yards  in  rear  of  the  piece,  the  crupper  towards  the 
trail ;  No.  1,  after  removing  the  right  cap  square,  takes 
the  sponge  and  inserts  the  rammer  head  to  the  bottom  of 
the  bore ;  and  No.  2,  after  removing  the  left  cap  square, 
takes  the  handspike,  and  passing  one  end  to  No.  3,  places 
it  under  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  the  loop  around  the 
neck.  All  face  towards  the  mule  and  prepare  to  raise 
the  piece. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  piece,  No.  1 
inclining  slightly  to  his  left  to  clear  the  wheel,  and  place 
it  upon  the  saddle,  the  trunnions  in  their  beds,  the  vent 
up,  and  the  cascable  towards  the  head  of  the  mule.  No.  1, 


172  MANUAL   FOB   LIGHT   AETILLEKY. 

then  withdrawing  the  sponge,  places  it,  and  the  handspike 
which  he  receives  from  No.  2,  upon  the  carriage,  and  goes 
to  the  shafts.  No.  3,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  2,  secures 
the  piece  firmly  to  the  saddle  by  means  of  the  lashing 
rope. 

For  this  purpose  he  passes  one  end  of  the  rope  (the 
other  being  fastened  to  the  near  hook  of  the  lashing  girth) 
over  the  piece  to  No.  2,  who  passes  it  back  beneath  the 
transoms,  receives  it  again  over  the  piece,  and  then  fastens 
it,  drawing  the  rope  tightly  to  the  off  hook  of  the  lashing 
girth.  This  done,  No.  1  turns  the  shafts  round  and  car- 
ries them  near  the  mule,  and  Nos.  2  and  3  seizing  them 
near  the  cross-bar,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  1  acting  at 
the  ends,  raise  and  place  them  upon  the  mule,  resting  the 
cross-bar  upon  the  cascable,  and  the  shafts  upon  the  arcs ; 
Nos.  2  and  3,  the  latter  first  putting  the  key  in  its  place, 
then  secure  t-he  shafts  firmly  by  means  of  the  lashing 
straps. 


PACKING  THE  CARRIAGE  UPON  THE  MULE. 

41.  The  instructor  commands  : 
1.  Prepare  to  pack  the  Carriage.    2.  PACK  THE  CARRIAGE. 

At  the  first  command,  the  driver  leads  the  carriage 
mule  in  front  of  the  carriage,  and  three  yards  from  it,  the 
crupper  towards  the  head  of  the  carriage ;  the  gunner, 
first  replacing  the  cap  squares,  raises  the  head  of  the  car- 
riage, and  Nos.  4  and  5,  at  the  right  and  left  wheels  re- 
spectively, remove  the  linchpins  and  washers,  take  off  the 
wheels,  and  lay  them  on  the  ground  behind  them,  the 
larger  end  of  the  nave  uppermost.  This  done,  Nos.  4  and 
5  replace  the  linchpins  and  washers,  and  seize  the  arms  of 
the  axle-tree ;  and  the  gunner,  quitting  the  head  of  the 


MANUAL    1<"01£   LIGI1T   AKTILLEKY.  173 


carriage,  seizes  the  trail  ;  all  face  towards  the  mule,  and 
prepare  to  raise  the  carriage. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  carriage  and 
place  it  upon  the  saddle,  between  the  transoms  ;  the  axle- 
tree  just  in  front  of  the  forward  arc,  the  understraps  upon 
the  arc,  and  the  nuts  of  the  trunnion  plate  bolts  just  in 
rear  of  it.  The  carriage  having  been  placed,  No.  4,  with 
the  assistance  of  No.  5,  secures  it  with  the  lashing  cord, 
taking  two  turns  with  the  cord  round  the  stock  and  tran- 
soms, and  then  tying  it.  This  done,  they  suspend  the 
wheels  by  the  fellies,  from  the  arms  of  the  axle-trees  ;  the 
large  end  of  the  nave  between  the  arcs,  and  resting  against 
the  leather  of  the  outside  bar,  and  secure  them  firmly  by 
means  of  the  lashing  straps. 

The  whole  is  then  strongly  bound  by  the  lashing  rope. 
For  this  purpose,  No.  5,  having  fastened  one  end  to  the 
near  hook  of  the  lashing  girth,  passes  the  rope  up  from 
the  inside  between  the  nearest  convenient  felly  and  spoke, 
and  continues  it  on,  pressing  it  in  front  of  and  against  the 
outside  part  of  the  nave,  embracing  one  or  more  spokes, 
to  the  top  felly,  under  which,  and  over  the  stock,  he  passes 
it  to  No.  4,  who,  after  passing  it  round  a  spoke  of  the  off 
wheel,  returns  it  under  the  transoms  of  the  saddle  to  No. 
5,  by  whom  it  is  passed  round  a  spoke  and  again  handed 
over  the  stock  to  No.  4.  The  latter  then  carries  it  down 
under  the  top  felly,  around  the  spokes,  and  against  the 
nave,  as  with  the  near  wheel,  to  the  off  hook  of  the  lash- 
ing girth,  and  then  fastens  it. 

For  greater  security,  the  gunner  may  tie  the  fellies  of 
the  two  wheels  together,  behind  the  elevating  screw,  with 
the  locking  rope. 


174:  MANUAL   FOK   LIGHT   AETILLERY. 

PACKING    THE    AMMUNITION    CHESTS    UPON    THE    MULE. 

42.  The   instructor  commands  : 
1.  Prepare  to  pack  the  Chests.     2.  PACK  THE  CHESTS. 

At  the  first  command,  the  driver  leads  the  mule  from 
the  rear  to  the  distance  of  one  yard  from  the  chests,  its 
head  still  facing  them  ;  Nos.  2  and  4  hasten  to  the  chest 
on  the  right,  and  Nos.  1  and  5  to  that  on  the  left,  and 
seize  them  by  the  handles ;  Nos.  I  and  2  by  those  in 
front,  and  Nos.  4  and  5  by  those  in  rear. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  chests,  carry 
them  to  the  saddle,  and  attach  the  chains  to  the  hooks,  the 
chests  inclining  slightly  towards  the  rear  of  the  mule ; 
Nos.  4  and.  5  then  secure  them  with  the  lashing  straps 
and  lashing  rope. 

This  duty  might  be  done  with  three  men,  by  first  hook- 
ing on  one  chest,  and  letting  one  man  support  it  until  the 
other  is  hooked  on. 


PACKING  THE  MULES  AT  ONE  COMMAND. 

43.  The  instructor  commands  : 
Pack  the  mules. 

At  this  command,  the  driver  leads  the  mules  to  their 
proper  positions ;  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  proceed  to  pack  the 
piece,  arid  Nos.  4,  5,  and  the  gunner  the  carriage,  as  soon 
as  the  piece  is  removed.  This  done,  Nos.  1,  2,  4,  and  5 
pack  the  ammunition  chests. 

Each  cannoneer  performs  his  duty  as  directed  in  Nos. 
40,  41,  42. 


MANUAL   FO14   LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  175 


UNPACKING   THE    CARRIAGE. 

44.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Prepare  to  unpack  the  Carriage.     2.  UNPACK  THE  CAR- 
RIAGE. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  4  and  5  unbuckle  the  lash- 
ing straps,  detach  the  lashing  rope,  take  off  the  wheels, 
and  lay  them  upon  the  ground,  the  large  end  of  the  nave 
uppermost.  If  the  locking  rope  has  been  used,  the  gun- 
ner unties  and  detaches  it.  Nos.  4  and  5  then  untie  and 
remove  the  lashing  cord,  and  facing  to  the  rear,  seize 
the  arms  of  the  axle-tree ;  the  gunner  facing  to  the  front 
seizes  the  trail.  All  prepare  to  raise  the  carriage. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  carriage,  and 
carry  it  three  yards  in  rear  of  the  mule ;  the  gunner  then, 
placing  the  trail  upon  the  ground,  seizes  the  head  of  the 
carriage  and  holds  it  up ;  Nos.  4  and  5,  removing  the 
linchpins  and  washers,  retain  them  in  their  hands,  put 
on  the  wheels,  and  then  replace  the  linchpins  and  washers. 
The  gunner  puts  up  the  locking  rope,  and  Nos,  4  and  5 
the  lashing  rope. 

UNPACKING   THE   PIECE. 

45.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Prepare  to  unpack  the  Piece.     2.  UNPACK  THE  PIECE. 

At  the  first  command,  the  driver  leads  the  mule  in 
rear  of  and  three  yards  from  the  carriage,  the  crupper 
towards  the  trail ;  Nos.  2  and  3  unbuckle  the  lashing 
straps,  and,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  1  acting  at  the 
ends,  disengage  the  shafts  from  the  saddle ;  No.  1  then 
takes  hold  of  them  near  the  cross-bar,  turns  them  round, 


176  MANUAL    FOli   LIGHT   ABTILLHUY. 

and  lays  them  on  the  ground,  in  the  position  described  in 
No.  12.  This  done,  Nos.  2  and  3  detach  the  lashing  rope ; 
and  No.  1,  having  taken  the  sponge  and  handspike,  hands 
the  latter  to  No.  2,  and  inserts  the  former  into  the  bore  of 
the  piece.  No.  2  then  applies  his  handspike  as  in  No. 
40  ;  when  all,  facing  towards  the  carriage,  prepare  to  raise 
the  piece. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  piece,  No.  1 
inclining  slightly  to  his  right  to  clear  the  wheel,  and  place 
it  upon  its  carriage.  No.  1  puts  up  the  sponge,  No.  2 
the  handspike,  and  No.  3  secures  the  cap  squares. 


UNPACKING    THE    AMMUNITION    CHESTS. 

46.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Prepare  to  unpack  the  Chests.     2.  UNPACK  THE  CHESTS. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  2  and  4  seize  the  handles 
of  the  right  chest,  and  Nos.  1  and  5  those  of  the  left ; 
Nos.  4  and  5  having  first  unbuckled  the  lashing  straps, 
and  detached  the  lashing  rope. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  chests,  unhook 
them,  and  lay  them  on  the  ground  one  yard  from  the 
mule. 

UNPACKING   THE    MULES    AT    ONE    COMMAND. 

47.  The  instructor  commands  : 

Unpack  the  mules. 

At  this  command,  the  drivers  place  the  shaft  and  car- 
riage mules  eight  yards  apart,  the  crupper  towards  the 
place  the  piece  is  to  occupy  ;  the  gunner,  and  Nos.  4  and 
5  proceed  to  unpack  the  carriage,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3 


MANUAL   FOK   LIGHT   AKTILLEKY.  177 

the  piece.  The  sponge  and  handspike  are  not  taken  from 
the  carriage  until  it  is  on  the  ground,  nor  is  the  piece 
taken  from  the  saddle  until  the  carriage  is  mounted  on  its 
wheels.  Each  cannoneer  performs  his  duty  as  directed 
in  Nos.  44  and  45. 

If  the  ammunition  chests  are  to  be  unpacked,  it  is 
done  as  soon  as  the  piece  is  mounted,  as  prescribed  in 
No.  46. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 

SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE. 

1.  The  manner  of  serving  heavy  artillery  varies  with 
the  kind  of  piece,  and   the   carriage  upon  which  it   is 
mounted. 

2.  There  are  four  kinds  of  heavy  pieces  in  the  land 
service,  viz. :  the  GUN,  the  HOWITZER,  the  MORTAR,  and 
the  COLUMBIAD. 

They  are  distinguished  according  to  their  use,  as  siege, 
garrison,  and  sea-coast  artillery. 

For  their  service  six  distinct  kinds  of  carriages  are 
necessary,  viz. :  the  siege,  the  barbette,  the  casemate,  the 
flank-casemate,  the  columbiad,  and  the  carriage  upon 
which  the  MORTAR  is  mounted,  which  is  technically  called 
its  bed. 

Siege  artillery  is  used  in  the  attack  of  places  ;  and  as 
it  follows  armies  in  their  operations,  is  mounted  upon  car- 
riages which  serve  for  its  transportation. 

Garrison  artillery  is  employed  in  the  defence  of  forts, 
more  especially  those  of  the  interior ;  and  sea-coast  artil- 
lery, consisting  of  the  heaviest  calibres,  is  used  for  the 
defence  of  the  sea-coast.  Their  carriages  do  not  subserve 
the  purpose  of  transportation  ;  the  barbette  carriage  may, 


MANUAL   FOE   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


179 


however,  be  used  for  moving  its  piece  for  short  distances, 
as  from  one  front  of  a  work  to  another. 

The  following  are  the  kinds  and  calibres  of  HEAVY 
ARTILLERY  used  in  the  land  service  of  the  United  States : 


Kind  of  Ordnance. 

Calibre. 

Material. 

' 

12-pdr. 

^ 

Siege  and  Garrison.  - 

18-pdr. 

GUNS. 

24-pdr. 

. 

Sea-coast. 

32-pdr. 
42-pdr. 

HOWITZERS.       !•  Siege  and  Garrison.  • 

8-inch. 
24-pdr. 

COLUMBIADS. 

•  Sea-coast. 

8-inch. 
10-inch. 

•  Iron. 

8-inch. 

10-inch. 

MORTARS. 

Siege. 
Sea-coast. 

8-inch. 
10-inch. 
10-inch. 
13-inch. 

Stone. 
j  Coehorn. 

16-inch. 
24-pdr. 

!•  Bronze. 

3.  The  detachment  for  serving  a  piece  is  formed  in 
two  ranks,  and  numbered  from  right  to  left.  The  odd 
numbers  form  the  rear  rank,  and  serve  on  the  right  of 
the  piece ;  the  even  numbers  and  the  gunner  form  the 
front  rank,  and  serve  on  its  left.  The  right  file  is  num- 
bered 1  and  2 ;  the  next  file  3  and  4 ;  the  gunner  is  un- 
covered, and  generally  on  the  left  of  No.  4 ;  and  on  his 
left  are  as  many  files  as  are  deemed  necessary,  numbered 
5  and  6,  7  and  8,  etc. 

4»  A  piece  is  in  battery  when  it  is  in  the  proper  po- 
sition to  be  fired. 

The  right  of  a  piece,  when  in  battery,  is  the  right  of 
the  cannoneer  when  facing  to  the  object  to  be  fired  at ; 


180  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

the  front  is  tho  direction  towards  which  the  muzzle 
points. 

The  term  "battery  is  applied  to  one  or  more  pieces,  or 
to  the  places  where  the  pieces  are  fired. 

A  platform  is  the  support  upon  which  a  piece  is  ma- 
noeuvred when  in  battery. 

5.  The  detachment  is  marched  to  the  battery  by  a 
flank.  It  is  halted,  and  faced  to  the  front,  when  its  centre 
is  opposite  to  the  middle  of  the  platform,  and  (if  there  be 
room)  four  yards  from  it. 

C.  To  cause  the  cannoneers  to  take  their  posts,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Detachment,  to  your  posts.     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  detachment  is  faced  to  the 
right  by  the  chief  of  piece. 

At  the  second  command,  it  files  to  the  left,  and  the 
two  flanks  separate ;  the  rear  rank  marching  to  the  right 
of  the  piece,  and  the  front  rank  to  the  left,  in  lines  parallel 
to  its  axis.  As  each  man  arrives  at  his  post,  he  halts 
and  faces  to  the  piece  ;  Nos.  1  and  2  one  yard  from  the 
epaulment,  parapet,  or  scarp,  their  breasts  eighteen  inches 
outside  of  the  wheels  of  the  carriage  or  cheeks  of  the 
mortar  bed,  as  the  case  may  be ;  and  the  other  numbers 
and  the  gunner,  dressing  on  Nos.  1  and  2  respectively  at 
intervals  of  one  yard,  except  that  between  Nos.  3  and  5 
there  is  an  interval  of  two  yards.  With  the  mortar, 
Nos.  1  and  2  are  opposite  to  the  front  manoeuvring  bolts, 
and  Nos.  3  and  4  opposite  to  those  in  the  rear. 

Under  the  fire  of  the  enemy,  the  men  will  be  directed 
to  cover  themselves  by  the  parapet  as  much  as  may  be 
consistent  with  the  execution  of  their  duties. 

7.  The  chief  of  piece  (a  non-commissioned  officer) 
assists  the  instructor  in  effecting  a  correct  execution  of 


MANUAL   FOB   HEAVY    AKTILLEIiT.  181 

the  movements.  While  at  the  battery,  he  will  generally 
be  one  yard  outside  of  the  cannoneers  of  the  left,  facing 
the  piece,  and  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  platform  or  rear- 
most part  of  the  carriage.  He  communicates  and  attends 
to  the  execution  of  all  orders  he  may  receive  in  relation 
to  the  service  of  his  piece ;  as,  for  instance,  the  kind  of 
ammunition  to  be  used,  the  weight  of  charge,  the  kind 
and  length  of  fuze,  etc. 

8.  The  movements  of  the  cannoneers  at  the  battery 
are  in  double-quick  time. 

9.  Posts  are  changed   at   the  discretion   of  the   in- 
structor. 

10.  To  allow  the  detachment  to  rest,  the  instructor^ 
commands  : 

In  place.     BEST  ;  or,  REST. 

The  cannoneers  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

In  the  first  case,  the  men  remain  at  their  posts ;  in 
the  second  case,  they  may  leave  their  posts,  but  will  re- 
main near  the  piece. 

To  resume  the  exercise,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Attention — DETACHMENT. 

At  which  command,  all  resume  their  posts  and  hand- 
spikes. 

11.  Until  the  cannoneer  becomes  well  versed  in  his 
duties  at  the  piece,  the  instructor  will  himself,  by  way  of 
example,  occasionally  execute  the  movements  which  he 
orders.     In  the  intervals  of  rest  he  will  minutely  instruct 
the  men  in  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements,  and  in 
the  nomenclatures  of  the  piece,  its  carriage  or  bed,  and 
of  the  parts  of  the  fortification  near  the  battery.     In  the 
course  of  the  instruction,  he  will  require  every  man  to 
point  out  and  designate  by  name  all  the  parts  enumerated 
in  these  nomenclatures,  and  to  answer  questions  relative 


182  MANUAL   FOB   HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

to  the  service  of  the  piece  ;  such  as  the  weight  of  charge, 
the  manner  of  making  cartridges  and  wads,  of  heating 
shot  and  throwing  hot  shot,  of  laying  platforms,  pointing, 
etc.  And  although  he  is  to  consider  precision  of  move- 
ment as  highly  essential,  yet  he  is  to  inculcate  that  some- 
thing more  is  necessary  than  a  merely  mechanical  per- 
formance of  duty.  He  will,  therefore,  endeavor  to  im- 
press upon  the  cannoneer  not  only  the  habit  of  a  soldier- 
like manner  of  working  his  gun,  but  an  accurate  under- 
standing of  all  the  elements  necessary  to  the  efficiency  of 
its  fire. 

12.  To  leave  the  battery,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Detachment,  rear.     2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  detachment  is  faced  from 
the  epaulment  by  the  chief  of  piece. 

At  the  second  command,  it  marches  to  the  rear — the 
cannoneers  of  the  left  closing  upon  those  of  the  right — 
files  to  the  right,  and  is  halted  and  faced  to  the  front  by 
the  chief  of  piece,  so  as  to  bring  its  centre  opposite  to 
the  middle  of  the  platform,  and  four  yards  from  it.  The 
chief  of  piece  places  himself  upon  the  right. 

The  detachment  is  marched  from  the  battery  by  a 
flank. 


LESSON    I. 

Service  of  a  Gun  mounted  on  a  siege  carriage. 

Seven  men  are  necessary  ;  one  gunner  and  six  other 
cannoneers. 

13.  The  piece  is  in  battery  upon  its  platform. 


MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 


183 


SPONGE  KAMMER, 


PASS-BOX, 


TUBE-POUCH, 


GUNNER'S-POUCH, 


The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows : 

r  Three  on  each  side  of  the  carriage  lean- 
HANDSPIKES,     .   1      ing  against  the  epaulment,  in  line 
I     with  the  cannoneers. 
One  yard  behind  and  parallel  to  the 
line  of  cannoneers  of  the  right,  the 
sponge  uppermost,  the  sponge  and 
rammer-heads  turned  from  the  epaul- 
ment, and  supported  upon  a  prop, 
j  Against  the  epaulment,  outside  of  the 
(      pile  of  balls. 

Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the  lan- 
yard, which  is  habitually  wound  in 
the  form  of  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon 
its  handle.  Suspended  from  the 
knob  of  the  cascable. 
Containing  the  gunner's  level,  breech 
sight,  fingerstall,  priming  wire,  gim- 
let, vent-punch,  and  chalk.  Sus- 
pended from  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 


CHOCKS,  .     . 

VENT-COVER, 
TOMPION, 

BROOM,    . 


One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  near 


the  ends  of  the  hurter. 
Covering  the  vent. 
In  the  muzzle. 

j  Leaning  against  the  epaulment,  out- 
(      side  of  the  pile  of  balls. 
When  several  guns  are  served  together,  there  will  be 
only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to  each 
battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.     To  the  same  battery 
there  will  be  one  worm,  one  ladle,  and  one  wrench. 

The  balls  are  regularly  piled  on  the  left  of  the  piece, 
near  the  epaulment,  and  close  to  the  edge  of  the  plat- 
form. 


18i  MANUAL   FOB   HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

The  wads  ar'e  placed  between  the  epaulment  and  the 
balls,  partly  resting  on  them. 

14.  The   cannoneers  having   been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  directs  them  to  place  their  muskets 
against  the  epaulment,  and  then  explains  to  them  the 
names  and  uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures 
of  the  gun,  its  carriage  and  the  battery. 

15.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the  in- 
structor commands  : 

Take  Implements. 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable ;  takes 
off  the  vent-cover,  handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the 
epaulment,  outside  of  the  pass-box  ;  gives  the  tube-pouch 
to  No.  3 ;  equips  himself  with  his  own  pouch  and  the 
fingerstall,  wearing  the  latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the 
left  hand;  levels  the  piece  by  the  elevating  screw  ;  ap- 
plies his  level  to  ascertain  the  highest  points  of  the  base- 
ring  and  swell  of  the  muzzle,  which  he  marks  with  chalk, 
and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  after  passing  two  handspikes  each  to 
Nos.  3  and  4,  take  each  one  for  himself.  Nos.  5  and  6 
receive  theirs  from  Nos.  3  and  4 

16.  The  handspike  is  held  in  both  hands ;  the  hand 
nearest  to  the  epaulment  grasping  it  near  the  small  end 
and  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  back  of  the  hand  down, 
the  arm  extended  naturally ;  the  butt  of  the  handspike 
upon  the  platform  on  the  side  farthest  from  the  epaul- 
ment, and  six  inches  in  advance  of  the  alignment. 

17.  When  the  cannoneer  lays  down  his  handspike,  he 
places  it  directly  before  him,  about  six  inches  in  ad- 
vance of  and  parallel  to  the  alignment,  the  small  end 
towards  the  epaulment;  and  whenever  he  thus  lays  it 


MANUAL   FOK   HEAVY   APwTILLEKY.  185 

down  for  the  discharge  of  any  particular  duty,  he  will  re- 
sume it  on  returning  to  his  post  after  the  completion  of 
that  duty. 

18.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands : 

1.  FROM  BATTERY. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  his  right. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5  and  6,  facing  from  the  epaulment, 
unbar ;  Nos.  1  and  2  under  the  front  of  the  wheels ; 
Nos .  3  and  4  through  the  rear  spokes  of  the  wheels  near 
the  felly,  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the  cheeks ;  and 
Nos.  5  and  6  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command 
HEAVE,  which  will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  neces- 
sary. He  sees  Nos.  5  and  6  guide  the  trail  in  prolonga- 
tion of  the  directrix  of  the  embrasure,  and  as  soon  as  the 
face  of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the  epaulment, 
commands  HALT.  .All  unbar,  and  resume ^their  posts, 
Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  wheels. 

2.  Load  by  Detail.     LOAD. 

19.  Nos.  1,  2  and  4  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  out  the  tompion,  and  places  it  near  the 
vent-cover. 

No.  1  faces  once  and  a  half  to  his  left ;  steps  over  the 
sponge  and  rammer  ;  faces  to  the  piece  ;  takes  the  sponge 
with  both  hands,  the  back  down,  the  right  hand  three  feet 
from  the  sponge  head,  the  left  hand  eighteen  inches  nearer 
to  it,  returns  to  the  piece,  entering  the  staff  in  the  em- 
brasure ;  places  the  left  foot  in  line  with  the  face  of  the 
piece,  half  way  between  it  and  the  wheels ;  breaks  to  the 
right  with  the  right  foot,  the  heels  on  a  line  parallel  to 
the  direction  of  the  piece,  the  left  leg  straightened,  the 


186  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

right  knee  bent,  the  body  erect  upon  the  haunches ;  and 
rests  the  end  of  the  sponge  in  the  muzzle,  the  staff  in  the 
prolongation  of  the  bore,  supported  by  the  right  hand,  the 
right  arm  extended,  the  left  hand  flat  against  the  side  of 
the  thigh. 

No.  3  steps  to  the  muzzle,  and  occupies  a  position  on 
the  left  of  the  piece  corresponding  to  that  of  No.  1  on  its 
right.  He  seizes  the  staff  with  the  left  hand,  back  down, 
near  to  and  outside  of  the  hand  of  No.  1. 

No.  2,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embars  under 
the  breech,  and  maintains  the  piece  in  a  convenient  po- 
sition for  inserting  the  sponge,  until  he  receives  a  signal 
from  the  gunner  to  unbar.  He  then  lays  down  his  hand- 
spike ;  steps  over  the  rammer,  and  seizes  the  staff  with 
both  hands,  as  prescribed  for  the  sponge;  and  stands 
ready  to  exchange  with  No.  1. 

No.  4  takes  the  pass-box  and  goes  to  the  rear  for  a 
cartridge ;  returns  with  it,  and  p.!aces  himself,  facing  the 
piece,  about  eighteen  inches  to  the  rear  and  right  of 
No.  2. 

The  gunner  places  himself  near  the  stock,  the  left  foot 
advanced,  closes  the  vent  with  the  second  finger  of  the 
left  hand,  bending  well  forward  to  cover  himself  by  the 
breech  ;  turns  the  elevating  screw  with  the  right  hand,  so 
as  to  adjust  the  piece  conveniently  for  loading :  and 
makes  a  signal  for  No.  3  to  unbar. 

20.  In  the  mean  time  Nos.  1  and  2  insert  the  sponge 
by  the  following  motions  : 

First  motion. — They  insert  the  sponge  as  far  as  the 
hand  of  No.  1,  bodies  erect,  shoulders  square. 

Second  motion. — They  slide  the  hand  along  the  staff, 
and  seize  it  at  arm's  length. 

Third  motion. — They  force  the  sponge  down  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  first  motion. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  187 

Fourth  motion. — They  repeat  the  second  motion. 

Fifth  motion. — They  push  the  sponge  to  the  bottom 
of  the  bore.  No.  1  replaces  the  left  hand  on  the  staff, 
back  up,  six  inches  nearer  to  the  muzzle  than  the  right. 
No.  2  places  the  right  hand,  back  up,  between  the  hands 
of  No.  1. 

If  in  executing  these  motions,  or  the  corresponding 
ones  with  the  rammer,  it  be  found  that  the  sponge  or 
rammer  is  at  home  at  the  third  or  fourth  motion,  then 
what  is  prescribed  for  the  fifth  motion  will  be  performed 
at  the  third  or  fourth.  The  knee  on  the  side  towards 
which  the  body  is  to  be  inclined  is  always  bent,  the  other 
straightened ;  and  the  weight  of  the  body  added,  as  much 
as  possible,  to  the  effort  exerted  by  the  arms. 

3.  SPONGE. 

21.  Nos.  1  and  2,  pressing  the  sponge  firmly  against 
the  bottom  of  the  bore,  turn  it  three  times  from  right  to 
left,  and  three  times  from  left  to  right ;  replace  the  hands 
on  the  thighs  ;  and  withdraw  the  sponge  by  motions  con- 
trary to  those  prescribed  for  inserting  it. 

Remark. — To  handle  the  sponge  when  it  is  new  and  fits  tight, 
it  may  become  necessary  for  Nos.  1  and  2  to  use  both  hands.  In 
this  case  it  will  be  inserted  and  withdrawn  "by  short  and  quick 
motions. 

No.  2  quits  the  staff,  and  turning  towards  No  4,  re- 
ceives from  him  the  cartridge,  which  he  takes  in  both 
hands,  back  down,  and  introduces  into  the  bore  bottom 
foremost,  seams  to  the  sides ;  he  then  grasps  the  rammer 
in  the  way  prescribed  for  the  sponge. 

No.  1,  rising  upon  the  right  leg  and  turning  towards 
his  left,  passes  the  sponge  above  the  rammer  with  the  left 
hand  to  No.  3,  and  receiving  the  rammer  with  the  right, 
presents  it  as  prescribed  for  the  sponge,  except  that  he 


188  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

rests  the  rammer-head  against  the  right  side  of  the  face 
of  the  piece. 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  sponge  is  withdrawn,  passing 
the  rammer  under  the  sponge  into  the  embrasure  with 
the  right  hand,  receives  the  sponge  from  No.  1  with  the 
left,  replaces  it  upon  the  prop,  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  4,  setting  down  the  pass-box,  takes  out  the  car- 
tridge and  presents  it  in  both  hands  to  No.  2,  the  choke 
to  the  front;  returns  the  pass-box  to  its  place;  and 
picks  up  a  ball,  and  afterwards  a  wad,  should  one  be  re- 
quired. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  cartridge  by  the  motions 
prescribed  for  forcing  down  the  sponge. 

4.  RAM. 

22.  Nos.  1  and  2,  drawing  the  rammer  out  to  the  full 
extent  of  their  arms,  ram  with  a  single  stroke.  No.  2 
quits  the  staff,  and  turning  towards  No.  4,  receives  from 
him  the  ball  and  wad,  whilst  No.  1  throws  out  the  ram- 
mer, and  holds  the  head  against  the  right  side  of  the  face 
of  the  piece.  No.  2,  receiving  successively  the  ball  and 
wad,  introduces  them  into  the  bore,  the  ball  first,  and 
seizes  the  staff  with  the  left  hand.  No.  4  then  resumes 
his  post. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  ball  and  wad  together 
by  the  same  motions,  and  ram  in  the  same  manner  as 
prescribed  for  the  cartridge.  No.  2  quits  the  rammer ; 
sweeps,  if  necessary,  the  platform  on  his  own  side ;  passes 
the  broom  to  No.  1  ;  and  resumes  his  post.  No.  1 
throws  out  the  rammer,  and  places  it  upon  the  prop  below 
the  sponge ;  finishes  the  sweeping,  and  resumes  his  post. 

The  gunner  pricks,  leaving  the  priming  wire  in  the 
vent ;  resumes  his  post ;  and,  if  firing  beyond  point-blank 
range,  adjusts  the  breech-sight  to  the  distance. 


MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY.  189 

5.  IN  BATTERY. 

23.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and  with  Nos. 
3,  4,  5,  and  6,  all  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embar ; 
Nos.  1  and  2  through  the  front  spokes  of  the  wheels  near 
the  felly,  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the  cheeks  ;  Nos. 
3  and  4  under  the  rear  of  the  wheels ;  and  Nos.  5  and  6 
under  the  manoeuvring  bolts  perpendicularly  to  the  stock. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  commands  HEAVE,  and 
the  piece  is  run  into  battery  ;  Nos.  5  and  6  being  careful 
to  guide  the  chase  into  the  middle  of  the  embrasure.  As 
soon  as  the  wheels  touch  the  hurter,  he  commands  HALT. 
All  unbar,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  resume  their  posts. 

6.  POINT. 

24.  No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike,  passes  the  hook 
of  the  lanyard  through  the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to 
rear,  and  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard  with  the  right 
hand,  the  hook  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger. 

Nos.  5  and  6  embar  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the 
trail,  near  the  manosuvring  bolts. 

The  gunner,  placing  himself  at  the  stock,  as  at  the 
command  LOAD,  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  aided 
by  Nos.  5  and  G,  gives  the  direction,  causing  the  trail  to 
be  moved  by  commanding  LEFT,  or  RIGHT,  tapping  at  the 
same  time  on  the  right  side  of  the  breech  for  No.  5  to 
move  the  trail  to  the  left,  or  on  the  left  side  for  No.  6  to 
move  it  to  the  right. 

He  then  places  the  centre  point  of  the  breech-sight  ac- 
curately upon  the  chalk  mark  on  the  base-ring,  and  by 
the  elevating  screw  gives  the  proper  elevation,  rectifying 
the  direction,  if  necessary. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises 
on  the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word  READY,  making  a  sig- 
nal with  both  hands,  at  which  Nos.  5  and  0  unbar,  and 


190  MANUAL   FOE,   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

resume  their  posts ;  takes  the  breech-sight  with  the  left 
hand,  and  goes  to  the  windward  to  observe  the  effect  of 
the  shot. 

No.  3  inserts  the  tube  in  the  vent,  drops  the  handle, 
allowing  the  lanyard  to  uncoil  as  he  steps  back  to  his 
post,  holding  it  slightly  stretched  with  the  right  hand,  the 
cord  passing  between  the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up ; 
and  breaks  to  the  rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  the 
left  hand  against  the  thigh.  ' 

At  the  word  KEADY,  Nos.  1  and  2  take  the  chocks, 
and  breaking  off  with  the  feet  furthest  from  the  epaul- 
ment,  stand  ready  to  chock  the  wheels. 

25.  In  directing  the  piece  to  be  fired,  the  instructor 
will  designate  it  by  its  number,  as,  for  example : 

7.  Number  one — FIRE. 

No.  3  gives  a  smart  pull  upon  the  lanyard. 

Immediately  after  the  discharge  of  the  piece,  Nos.  1 
and  2  chock  the  wheels,  and  resume  the  erect  position. 
No.  3  resumes  the  erect  position,  and  rewinds  the  lanyard 
in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its  handle,  returning  it  if  dry 
to  the  tube-pouch.  The  gunner,  having  observed  the  effect 
of  the  shot,  returns  to  his  post. 

26.  Whenever  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  by  a  lock,  port- 
fire, or  slow-match,  it  will  be  done  by  No.  3,  as  prescribed 
for  No.  4,  in  the  instruction  for  field  artillery. 

27.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands,  beginning  with  FROM  BATTERY. 


TO     CHANGE    POSTS. 

28.  To  change  posts  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  CHANGE  POSTS.     2.  MARCH.     3.  CALL  OFF. 
At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  lay  down  their 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  191 

handspikes ;  place  their  equipments  on  the  parts  of  the 
carriage  nearest  to  them ;  and  face  to  their  left. 

At  the  second  command,  they  step  off,  each  advancing 
one  post ;  No.  2  taking  that  of  No.  1.  Nos.  2  and  5  pass 
to  the  rear  of  the  trail ;  No.  2  on  the  outside  of  all  the 
cannoneers.  On  arriving  at  their  posts,  they  face  to  the 
piece,  and  equip  themselves. 

At  the  third  command,  they  call  off,  according  to  tho 
posts  they  are  to  occupy. 


TO    LOAD    FOR    ACTION. 

29.  The  cannoneers  having  been  sufficiently  instructed 
in  the   details   of  the  movements,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

Load  for  action — LOAD. 

The  piece  is  run  from  battery,  loaded,  run  into  bat- 
tery, pointed,  and  prepared  for  firing,  by  the  following 
commands  from  the  gunner  :  FROM  BATTERY — LOAD — IN 
BATTERY — POINT — BEADY. 

At  the  command  or  signal  from  the  instructor  to  com- 
mence firing,  the  gunner  gives  the  command  FIRE,  and 
continues  tho  action  until  the  instructor  directs  the  firing 
to  cease. 

TO    CEASE    FIRING. 

30.  To  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

CEASE  FIRING. 

Whether  the  cannoneers  are  loading  by  detail  or  for 
action,  the  piece  is  sponged  out,  and  all  resume  their 
posts.  If  the  cartridge  has  been  inserted,  the  loading  will 


192  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

be  completed,   unless   the   instructor   should   otherwise 
direct. 


TO  SECURE  PIECE,  AND  REPLACE  IMPLEMENTS.  - 

31.  To  discontinue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  having 
ordered  the  firing  to  cease,  and  caused  the  piece  to  be  run 
into  battery,  gives  the  following  commands  : 

1.  SECURE  PIECE. 

No.  2  returns  the  tompion  to  the  muzzle,  the  gunner 
puts  on  the  vent-cover,  which  he  receives  from  No.  2,  and 
depresses  the  piece. 

2.  REPLACE  IMPLEMENTS. 

Nos.  1  and  2  replace  the  handspikes  against  the  epaul- 
ment,  those  of  Nos.  3,  4,  5  and  6  being  passed  to  them 
by  Nos.  3  and  4  for  that  purpose.  The  gunner  hangs 
the  pouches  upon  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 


TO    LEAVE    THE    BATTERY. 

32.  The  instructor  causes  the  muskets  to  be  taken ; 
forms  the  detachment  in  rear  of  the  piece  ;  and  marches 
it  from  the  battery  as  prescribed  in  No.  12. 

33.  Remarks. — The  service  of  a  24-pdr.  siege  gun,  as 
it  respects  running  from  and  to  battery,  and  pointing,  is 
performed   by    five    men,  as    prescribed    for   the   siege 
howitzer.     Five  men  suffice  for  the  service  of  the  18  and 
12-pdrs.     To  perform,  however,  all  the  duties  incident  to 
a  battery  of  heavy  artillery  on  a  war  establishment,  in- 
cluding  transportation   and  the  mechanical  manoeuvres, 
the  details  for  its  daily  service,  at  three  reliefs,  should 
allow  at  least  twenty  privates  to  each  piece. 


MANUAL   FOK   HEAVY   AKTILLEEY.  193 


TO    SERVE    THE    PIECE    WITH    REDUCED    NUMBERS. 

34.  The  smallest  number  of  men  with  which  heavy 
pieces  can  be  served  with  facility,  has  been  given  as  five. 
It  may  be  necessary,  however,  from  the  men  being  dis- 
abled, or  from  other  circumstances,  to  serve  a  gun  with  a 
less  number. 

With  four  men. — They  will  be  told  off  as  gunner, 
and  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3.  In  this  case  No.  2  will,  in  addition 
to  his  own  duties,  perform  those  of  No.  4. 

With  three  men. — They  will  be  told  off  as  gunner,  and 
Nos.  1  and  2.  No.  1  performs  the  duties  prescribed  for 
No.  3,  as  well  as  his  own.  No.  2  performs  those  of  No. 
4,  as  in  the  preceding  case. 

When  No.  2  serves  ammunition,  he  goes  for  the  car- 
tridge, and  places  the  pass-box  behind  his  post,  before  as- 
sisting No.  1  to  sponge. 


TRANSPORTATION. 

35.  The  transportation  of  a  24-pdr.  gun  requires  ten 
horses  and  five  drivers ;  an  18-pdr.  eight  horses  and  four 
drivers ;  a  battery  wagon  six  horses  and  three  drivers ; 
and  spare  carriages — at  the  rate  of  one  for  every  five 
pieces — require  each  six  horses  and  three  drivers. 


CHARGES,   ETC. 

36.  The  ordinary  service  charge  of  powder  for  heavy 
guns  is  one-fourth  the  weight  of  the  shot.     For  firing 
double  shot  it  is  one-sixth  that  weight.     The   breaching 
charge  is  one-third  the  weight  of  the  shot. 
0 


MANUAL   FOE   HEAVY    AETILLEEY. 

Range  of  a  24-pdr.,  at  an  angle  of  1°  30',  (point  blank,) 

charge  6  Ibs 950  yards. 

Range  of  a  24-pdr.,  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  G  Ibs 1900     " 

Range  of  an  18-pdr.,  at  an  angle  of  1°  30',  charge  4£  Ibs.  800     " 

Range  of  an  18-pdr.,  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  4£  Ibs...  1600     " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300     " 

The  range  of  a  12-pdr.  is  about  the  same  as  that  of  an 
18-pdr. 

Greatest  elevation  that  a  24-pdr.  carriage  admits 12° 

Greatest  elevation  that  an  18-pdr.  carriage  admits 12° 

Greatest  elevation  that  a  12-pdr.  carriage  admits 13° 

Greatest  depression  that  a  24-pdr.  carriage  admits 4° 

Greatest  depression  that  an  18-pdr.  carriage  admits 4° 

Greatest  depression  that  a  12-pdr.  carriage  admits 4° 


37.  Wads  are  not  generally  necessary,  except  when 
firing  at  angles  of  depression ;  and  then  only  one  is  used, 
and  that  on  the  ball.     When,  however,  the  piece  has  been 
fired  so  often  that  the  ball  has  caused  a  lodgment  in  the 
bore,  it  is  well  to  use  wads  differing  in  length,  according 
to  the  position  and  extent  of  the  lodgment,  between  the 
shot  and  the  cartridge. 

Hay  wads  may  be  made  by  twisting  hay  into  a  rope 
of  about  one  inch  in  diameter,  folding  it  together  of  any 
desired  length,  and  then  winding  the  folds  from  one  end 
to  the  other,  leaving  the  wad  a  little  larger  than  the  bore. 

BREACHING    BATTERIES. 

38.  Breaching  latteries  established  against  walls  are, 
First.  To  make  a  horizontal  section  the  length  of  the 

desired  breach  along  the  scarp,  at  one-third  its  height  from 
the  bottom  of  the  ditch,  and  to  a  depth  equal  to  the  thick- 
ness of  the  wall. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   AETILLEEY.  195 

Secondly.  To  make  vertical  cuts  through  the  wall,  not 
further  than  ten  yards  apart,  and  not  exceeding  one  to 
each  piece ;  beginning  at  the  horizontal  section,  and  as- 
cending gradually  to  the  top  of  the  wall. 

Thirdly.  To  fire  at  the  most  prominent  points  of  the 
masonry  left  standing  ;  beginning  always  at  the  bottom, 
and  gradually  approaching  to  the  top. 

Fourthly.  To  fire  into  the  broken  mass  with  howitzers 
until  the  breach  is  practicable. 

Breaches  of  more  than  twenty  yards  in  length  have 
been  opened  by  way  of  experiment,  and  rendered  prac- 
ticable, in  less  than  ten  hours,  by  about  two  hundred  and 
thirty  24-pdr.  balls  and  forty  shells  in  one  case,  and  by 
three  hundred  18-pdr.  balls  and  forty  shells  in  another. 

RAPIDITY    OF    FIRING. 

39.  Iron  guns  sustain  long-continued  and  rapid  firing 
better  than  brass   guns.     An  iron   gun   should   sustain 
twelve  hundred  discharges,  at  the  rate  of  twelve  an  hour ; 
but  whatever  may  be  the  rate  of  fire,  it  is  deemed  unsafe 
after  that  number  of  discharges.     As  many  as  twenty  an 
hour  have  been  made  for  sixteen  consecutive  hours. 

PENETRATION    OF    SHOT. 

40.  The  penetration  of  balls  increases  to  a  certain  ex- 
tent with  their  calibre.     The  mean  result,  from  several 
experiments,  gives  the  penetration  of  a  24-pdr.  ball,  with 
the  charge  of  one- third  its  weight,  at  the  distance  of  one 
hundred  yards,  as  follows  : 

Feet.  Inches. 

In  earth  of  old  parapets 8  G 

In  earth  recently  thrown  up 15  0 

In  oak  wood,  sound  and  hard 4  6 

In  rubble  stone  and  masonry 1  10 

In  brick ,„.,, 3  0 


196 


MANUAL   FOE   HEAVY   ARTILLEEY. 


LESSON    II. 

Service  of  an  8-inch  Siege  Howitzer,  mounted  on  a 
Siege  Carriage. 


Five  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

41.  The  piece  is  in  battery  upon  its  platform. 
The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows  : 

Three  on  the  left  of  the  carriage,  and 

O     " 

two  on  the  right,  leaning  against  the 
epaulment,  in  line  with  the  cannon- 
eers. 


HANDSPIKES, 


SPONGE  &  RAM- 
MER,   .     . 


HAVERSACK, 


TUBE-POUCH,     . 


GUNNER'S-POUCH, 


On  props,  eighteen  inches  behind  ana 
parallel  to  the  cannoneers  of  the 
right,  the  sponge-head  turned  to- 
wards the  epaulment. 

Containing  fuzes,  a  pair  of  sleeves,  and 
a  priming-wire,  bent  at  right  angles 
at  the  point  for  withdrawing  the 
cartridge  used  in  instruction.  Sus- 
pended from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 

Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the  lan- 
yard, wound  in  St.  Andrew's  cross 
upon  its  handle.  Suspended  from 
the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

Containing  the  gunner's  level,  breech- 
sight,  finger-stall,  priming-wire,  gim- 
let, vent-punch,  and  chalk.  Sus* 
pended  from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 


MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY.        1D7 

LOADING-TONGS,    ") 

QUADRANT, 

TJ  In  a  basket  or  on  a  shelf,  against  the 

PLUMMET.     . 

0  >      epaulment,  outside  of  and  near  the 

SCRAPER, 

-rTT  handspikes  01  the  left. 

WIPER,   .     . 

SPLINTS,  .     .     .    J 

GRUMMET-WAD,  .       On  the  end  of  the  hurter,  near  No.  2. 

(  One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  near  the 
CHOCKS,  .     .     .    •< 

(      ends  of  the  hurter. 

VENT-COVER,     .       Covering  the  vent. 
TOMPION,      .     .       In  the  muzzle. 
QUOIN,     .     .     .       Under  the  breech. 
R  C  Leaning  against  the  epaulment,  outside 

1      of  the  basket  or  shelf. 

When  several  howitzers  are  served  together,  there 
will  be  only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to 
each  battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same  bat- 
tery there  will  be  one  wrench. 

One  shell  and  one  bombazine  cartridge  bag  for  in- 
struction— the  bag  filled  with  sawdust,  and  having  loops 
of  thread  at  the  choke  end — are  at  the  magazine,  or  other 
safe  place  in  rear  of  the  piece. 

42.  The  cannoneers   having  been   marched   to   their 
posts,  the  instructor  directs  them  to  place  their  muskets 
against  the  epaulment,  and  then  explains   to  them  the 
names  and  uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures 
of  the  howitzer,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

43.  To  cause  the  implements  to   be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands : 

TAKE  IMPLEMENTS. 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable ;  takes 
off  the  vent-cover,  handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the 
epaulment,  outside  of  the  basket ;  gives  the  tube-pouch  to 


198  MANUAL   FOB   HEAVY    AKTILLEKY. 

No.  3,  and  the  haversack  to  No.  4 ;  and  equips  himself 
with  his  own  pouch  and  the  finger-stall,  wearing  the  lat- 
ter on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand. 

No.  2  puts  on  the  sleeves. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  4  equips  himself  with  the  haversack,  which  he 
wears  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side ;  takes  out 
the  sleeves ;  and  assists  No.  2  to  put  them  on. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  after  passing  handspikes  to  Nos.  3  and 
4  and  the  gunner,  take  each  one  for  himself.  The  gunner, 
receiving  his  from  No.  4,  lays  it  in  the  allignment,  the 
small  end  towards  the  epaulment,  and  two  yards  to  his 
right.  The  other  handspikes  are  held,  laid  down,  and  re- 
sumed, as  prescribed  in  Nos.  15  and  16. 

The  gunner  directs  No.  3  to  raise  the  breech  to  enable 
hirn  to  level  the  piece ;  applies  his  level  to  ascertain  the 
highest  points  of  the  base-ring  and  muzzle-band,  which  he 
marks  with  chalk  ;  and  resumes  his  post. 

44.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands  ; 

1.  FROM  BATTERY. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  his  right. 

Nos.  1,2,  3,  and  4,  facing  from  the  epaulment,  embar : 
Nos.  1  and  2  through  the  rear  spokes  of  the  wheels,  near 
the  felly,  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the  cheeks ;  and 
Nos.  3  and  4  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command 
HEAVE,  which  will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  neces- 
sary. He  sees  that  Nos.  3  and  4  guide  the  trail  in  pro- 
longation of  the  directrix  of  the  embrasure,  and  as  soon 
as  the  wheels  are  about  one  yard  from  the  epaulment, 
commands  HALT.  All  unbar,  and  resume  their  posts. 
Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  wheels. 


MANUAL    FOFw   HEAVY    AKT1LLEEY.  199 

2.  Load  by  detail — LOAD. 

45.  Nos.  1,  2,  and  4  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  out  the  tompion,  and  places  it  near  the 
vent-cover  ;  sweeps,  if  necessary,  his  side  of  the  platform  ; 
passes  the  broom  to  the  right  side  of  the  piece ;  and  re- 
sumes his  post. 

No.  1  faces  to  his  right,  and  seizes  the  sponge-staff  at 
its  middle  with  the  right  hand,  back  up  ;  places  himself 
at  the  muzzle ;  forces  the  sponge  to  the  bottom  of  the 
chamber ;  and  grasps  the  staff  with  both  hands :  all  nearly 
as  in  field  artillery. 

No.  3,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embars  under 
the  breech  or  knob  of  the  cascable,  until  he  receives  a  sig- 
nal from  the  gunner  to  unbar,  when  he  resumes  his  post. 

No.  4  goes  to  the  rear  for  a  cartridge  and  shell ;  puts 
the  cartridge  in  his  haversack ;  takes  the  shell  in  both 
hands ;  returns  and  places  it  on  the  grummet-wad ;  and 
stands,  facing  the  piece,  about  eighteen  inches  to  the  rear 
and  left  of  No.  2. 

The  gunner  places  himself  near  the  stock,  as  in  No. 
18,  and  closes  the  vent  with  the  second  finger  of  the  left 
hand ;  adjusts  the  piece  with  the  quoin  to  about  one  de- 
gree's elevation ;  and  makes  a  sign  for  No.  3  to  unbar. 

3.  SPONGE. 

46.  No.  1,  pressing  the  sponge  firmly  against  the  bot- 
tom of  the  chamber,  turns  it  three  times  from  right  to 
left,  and  three  times  from  left  to  right ;  draws  it  out  to 
the  front  of  the  chamber ;  wipes  out  the  bore  ;  reinserts 
the  sponge  along  the  upper  side  of  the  bore  as  far  as  the 
chamber ;  draws  it   entirely  out,  pressing   it   upon   the 
lower  side  of  the  bore ;  turns  the  sponge  over  towards 
the  embrasure ;  and  presents  the   rammer-head   against 


200  MANUAL   FOR    HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

the  right  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece,  holding  the  staff  in 
both  hands. 

No.  2,  as  soon  as  the  sponging  is  completed,  takes  the 
tongs  and  occupies  a  position  at  the  muzzle  corresponding 
to  that  prescribed  for  No.  1  on  the  right ;  turns  to  his 
left  on  the  right  heel,  advancing  the  left  foot,  and  presents 
the  tongs  in  both  hands,  the  left  hand  nearest  him,  the 
tongs  opened,  their  legs  in  the  same  vertical  plane. 

No.  4  takes  out  the  cartridge  and  inserts  it  as  far  as 
its  middle  in  the  tongs,  choke  foremost,  the  seam  down- 
wards ;  removes  the  stopper  from,  and  inserts  the  fuze 
into,  the  fuze  plug ;  scrapes  its  end  ;  and  takes  the  wiper. 

No.  2,  having  received  the  cartridge  in  the  tongs, 
makes  a  face  and  a  half  to  his  right  on  the  right  heel,  and 
breaks  off  with  the  left  foot ;  places  the  right  hand  against 
the  head  of  the  left  cheek  of  the  carriage,  and  with  the 
left  hand  introduces  the  cartridge  into  the  chamber,  keep- 
ing the  legs  of  the  tongs  in  a  vertical  plane  ;  then  slightly 
withdrawing  and  closing  the  tongs,  he  presses  them  in  the 
direction  of  the  axis  of  the  piece  against  the  end  of  the 
cartridge,  and  shoves  it  home.  Withdrawing  the  tongs, 
he  makes  a  face  and  a  half  to  his  left  on  the  right  heel, 
and  puts  the  hooks  of  the  tongs  into  the  ears  of  the  shell, 
which  he  lifts  and  holds  about  two  feet  from  the  ground, 
wrhilst  No.  4  wipes  it. 

No.  1,  as  soon  as  the  tongs  are  withdrawn,  inserts  the 
rammer,  and  holds  it  with  the  head  against  the  cartridge, 
the  staff  in  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

4.  RAM. 

47.  No.  1  presses  firmly  upon  the  cartridge ;  throws 
out  the  rammer,  and  places  it  upon  the  props ;  sweeps, 
if  necessary,  his  side  of  the  platform  ;  passes  the  broom 
to  the  left  side  of  the  piece ;  and  resumes  his  post. 


MANUAL   FOlt   HEAVY    ARTILLERY.  201 

No.  2  introduces  the  shell,  and  shoves  it  home  in  a 
manner  similar  to  that  prescribed  for  the  cartridge  ;  with- 
draws the  hooks,  and  looks  to  see  that  the  fuze  is  in  the 
axis  of  the  piece. 

If  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  horizontally,  or  at  an  angle 
of  depression,  No.  4,  having  replaced  the  wiper,  hands  a 
splint  to  No.  2,  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  2  presses  the  splint  under  the  shell  with  the  left 
hand ;  replaces  the  tongs  and  broom ;  and  resumes  his 
post. 

The  gunner  pricks,  leaving  the  priming-wire  in  the 
vent,  and  resumes  his  post. 

5.  IN  BATTERY. 

48.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and  with  Nos. 
3  and  4,  all  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embar :  Nos.  1 
and  2  through  the  front  spokes  of  the  wheels,  near  the 
felly,  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the  cheeks  ;  and  Nos. 
3  and  4  under  the  rear  of  the  wheels. 

The  gunner,  seizing  his  handspike,  embars  under  the 
manoeuvring  bolts ;  gives  the  command  HEAVE  ;  and 
guides  the  piece  to  the  middle  of  the  embrasure  ;  as  soon 
as  the  wheels  touch  the  hurter,  he  commands  HALT.  All 
unbar,  and  resume  their  posts. 

G.  POINT. 

49.  Nos.  1  and  4  embar  under  and  perpendicularly  to 
the  trail,  near  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

No.  2,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embars  under 
the  breech  or  knob  of  the  cascable. 

No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike ;  passes  the  hook  of 
the  lanyard  through  the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to  rear ; 
and  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard  with  the  right  hand, 
the  hook  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger. 
9* 


202  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

The  gunner,  placing  himself  at  the  stock,  as  at  the 
command  LOAD,  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  aided 
by  Nos.  1  and  4,  gives  the  direction  ;  causing  the  trail  to 
be  moved  by  commanding  LEFT,  or  EIGHT,  tapping,  at  the 
same  time,  on  the  right  side  of  the  breech  for  No.  1  to 
move  the  trail  to  the  left,  or  on  the  left  side  of  No.  4  to 
move  it  to  the  right. 

He  then  places  the  centre  point  of  the  breech-sight  ac» 
curately  upon  the  chalk  mark  on  the  base-ring,  and  com-, 
mands  LOWER,  or  EAISE,  tapping,  at  the  same  time,  on 
the  upper  side  of  the  knob  of  the  cascable  with  the  left 
hand,  and  drawing  out  the  quoin  with  the  right,  in  order 
to  elevate,  or  tapping  upwards  on  the  lower  side,  and 
shoving  in  the  quoin,  in  order  to  depress  the  piece ;  rec- 
tifying the  direction,  if  necessary. 

If  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  point-blank,  horizontally,  or 
at  an  angle  of  depression,  he  does  not  apply  the  breech- 
sight. 

If  the  piece  is  masked  from  the  object  fired  at,  he 
places  himself  astride  the  stock,  or  in  rear  of  the  trail,  and 
gives  the  direction  by  the  plummet. 

To  give  the  elevation  when  the  piece  is  masked,  or 
when  the  desired  range  is  greater  than  the  breech-sight 
ranges,  he  applies  the  quadrant  to  the  upper  surface  of 
the  lock-piece,  making  the  allowance  due  to  its  inclination 
with  the  axis  of  the  piece,  which  ought  to  be  previously 
determined. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises 
on  the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word  KEADY,  making  a  sig- 
nal with  both  hands,  at  which  Nos.  1,  2,  and  4  unbar,  and 
resume  their  posts;  takes  the  breech-sight  with  the  left 
hand,  and  goes  to  the  windward  to  observe  the  effect  of 
the  shot. 

No.  3  inserts  the  tube  in  the  vent ;  drops  the  handle, 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY  ARTILLERY.  203 

allowing  the  lanyard  to  uncoil  as  he  steps  back  to  his 
post,  holding  it  slightly  stretched  with  the  right  hand,  the 
cord  passing  between  the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up ; 
and  breaks  to  the  rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  the 
left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  on  resuming  their  posts,  break  off  with 
the  feet  furthest  from  the  epaulment,  inclining  well  to 
that  side  in  order  to  avoid  the  blast. 

7.  Number  one  (or  the  like) — FIRE. 

50.  Executed  as  in  No.  25,  except  that  the  wheels  are 
not  chocked. 

What  is  prescribed  in  No.  26  will  apply  to  this 
piece. 

51.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands,  beginning  with  FROM  BATTERY. 


TO  UNLOAD. 

52.  The  piece  having  been  run  from  battery,  the  in- 
structor directs  No.  2  to  take  out  the  shell  and  cartridge ; 
No.  4  carrying  them  to  their  place  in  rear  of  the  piece. 
No.  3  assists  No.  2,  by  raising  the  breech  until  the  shell 
rolls  to  the  muzzle. 


TO    SCRAPE    THE    PIECE. 

53.  In  the  course  of  firing,  it  may  become  necessary 
to  scrape  the  piece.  To  cause  this  to  be  done,  the  in- 
structor directs  the  piece  to  be  moved  from  battery,  and 
then  commands : 

SCRAPE  THE  PIECE. 

Nos.  1  and  2  lay  down  their  handspikes. 


204:  MANUAL    FOIl    HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

No.  2  takes  the  scraper  and  wiper,  giving  the  lattf 
to  No.  1  ;  thoroughly  scrapes   the   chamber   and   bore 
draws  out  the  scrapings  with   the   spoon ;  returns   the 
scraper  to  its  place,  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  1,  enveloping  the  sponge-head  in  the  wiper,  wipes 
out  the  bore,  and  returns  the  wiper  to  N.  2,  who  replaces 
it;  puts  the  sponge  upon  the  props,  and  resumes  his 
post. 

To  change  posts. 

To  load  for  action. 

To  cease  firing. 

To  secure  piece,  and  replace  implements. 

To  leave  the  battery. 

Executed  as  in  Nos.  28,  29,  30,  31  and  32 ;  No.  4 
assisting  No.  2  to  take  off  the  sleeves. 


TO  SERVE  THE  PIECE  WITH  REDUCED  NUMBERS. 

Executed  as  in  No.  34. 

TRANSPORTATION. 

54.  The  transportation  of  an  8-inch  siege  howitzer  re- 
quires eight  horses  and  four  drivers. 


CHARGES,   ETC. 

55. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder 4  Ibs. 

Greatest  charge,  shell  filled  with  bullets 3  Ibs. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 2  Ibs.  9  oz. 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 1  Ib. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 4  oz. 

Greatest  elevation  the  carriage  admits 15° 

Greatest  depression  the  carriage  admits 10° 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  205 

Range  at  an  angle  of  1°,  charge  4  Ibs 430  yards. 

Range  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  4  Ibs 1150      " 

Range  at  an  angle  of  15°,  charge  4  Ibs 2300      " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300      " 

Weight  of  shell 45  Ibs. 

Weight  of  the  shell  filled  with  bullets C5  Ibs. 

The  black  fuze  burns  to  the  inch 2  Ibs. 

The  red  fuze  burns  to  the  inch 3  Ibs. 

The  green  fuze  burns  to  the  inch 4  Ibs. 

The  yellow  fuze  burns  to  the  inch 5  Ibs. 

At  2°  elevation,  black  fuze,  full  charge  ~]  (  500  to    600  yds. 

At  3°  25'  "        red  fuze,          "  I  The  shell  I    800  to    900yds. 

At  4°  25'   "        green  fuze,      "  j  bursts  at  j    900  to  1000  yds. 

At  5°  25'   "        yellow  fuze,     "  J  [lOOO  to  1100  yds. 

A  proper  charge  for  enfilading,  at  the  distance  of  600 
yards,  on  a  horizontal  plane,  relief  of  the  epaulment  seven 
feet,  elevation  2°. 75,  red  fuze,  is  three  pounds. 


TO    PREPARE    AMMUNITION. 

56.  If  the  ammunition  for  howitzers  is  to  be  prepared 
and  issued  by  the  artillery,  two  men,  numbered  5  and  6, 
are  added  to  each  detachment  for  that  purpose.  They 
are  sent  to  the  magazine,  where  they  are  provided  with 
the  following  implements  and  stores  : 

1  Set  of  Powder  Measures. 

1  Funnel* 

1  Fuze-mallet 

1  Fuze-setter. 

\  Fuze  plug-reamer. 

1  Rasp. 

1  Basket.     Containing  fuze-plugs. 

2  Grummet-wads,  or  )  On  which  to  place  the  shells 
2  Hollow-blocks     .     )      while  putting  in  the  charge 

1   Wiper. 


f 


206  MANUAL   FOB   HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

1  Budge-barrel. 

1  Dark  Lantern. 

Tow.     For  stoppers. 

Cartridge  bags.     Of  bombazine. 

Twine. 

Poivder. 

Musket  bullets. 

Incendiary  composition. 

They  first  fill  and  tie  a  number  of  cartridges,  accord- 
ing to  the  directions  received  from  the  battery,  and  then 
prepare  a  corresponding  number  of  shells. 

To  fill  the  cartridges.  One  holds  the  bag,  while  the 
other  (by  means  of  the  funnel)  pours  in  the  powder.  The 
cartridges  thus  filled  are  placed  upright  in  a  box  until 
tied,  when  they  are  transported  to  the  budge-barrel. 

Cartridges  of  reduced  charges  for  ricochet  firing  may 
be  made  thus :  The  charge  having  been  poured  into  the 
bag,  a  wad  of  hay  about  six  inches  in  length  is  placed  upon 
it.  This  wad  is  made  by  laying  wisps  of  hay  evenly  to- 
gether, so  as  to  form  a  cylinder  nearly  of  the  diameter  of 
the  cartridge  bag.  The  wad  is  tied  about  an  inch  from 
each  end,  and  the  ends  are  cut  squarely  off,  so  as  to  pre- 
sent an  even  surface  to  the  powder.  In  handling  these 
cartridges,  the  powder  end  of  the  bag  should  always  be 
kept  downwards. 

To  prepare  the  shells.  No.  5  places  one  upon  a  grum- 
met-wad ;  cleanses  it,  if  necessary,  with  a  rasp  ;  drives  in 
a  fuze-plug  until  it  does  not  project  more  than  the  tenth 
of  an  inch ;  and  reams  it  out  with  the  reamer.  No.  6, 
transferring  it  to  the  other  grummet- wad,  charges  it  with 
powder  ;  puts  in  a  stopper  of  tow  ;  marks  it  with  chalk  ; 
and  places  it  conveniently  for  No.  4. 

If  the  shell  is  to  be  loaded  with  bullets  or  incendiary 
composition,  it  is  charged  before  the  fuze-plug  is  driven. 


MANUAL  FOE  HEAVY  AETILLEKY. 


207 


It  should  contain  about  three  hundred  and  twenty  bullets 
and  one  pound  and  a  quarter  of  powder. 

If  filled  only  with  powder,  No.  6  marks  the  shell  with 
a  cross  ;  if  with  incendiary  composition,  he  makes  a  circle 
around  the  fuze-plug ;  and  if  with  bullets,  he  makes  two 
circles  on  one  side.  The  shells  thus  differently  charged 
are  kept  separate. 


LESSON    III. 
Service  of  a  10-inc7i  Siege  Mortar. 

Five  men  are  necessary ;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

57.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows  : 

'  Two  on  each  side  of  the  bed,  against 
the  cheeks,  leaning  upon  the  four 
manoeuvring  bolts,  the  small  ends 
towards  the  epaulment,  those  of  the 
front  handspikes  even  with  the  front 
of  the  cheeks. 

f  Containing  fuzes  and  a  pair  of  sleeves. 
Attached  to  the  tompion,  and  lying 
upon  the  mortar. 

Containing  the  priming-wire,  friction 
tubes,  and  the  lanyard,  wound  in 
St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its  handle. 
Attached  to  the  tompion,  and  lying 
upon  the  mortar. 

I  Containing  the  gunner's  level,  gimlet, 
vent-punch,  and  chalk.  Attached  to 
the  tompion,  and  lying  upon  the 
mortar. 


HANDSPIKES, 


HAVEUSACK, 


TUBE-POUCH, 


GUNNER'S-POUCH,  - 


208        MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 


QUADRANT,  . 
PLUMMET,     .     . 
POINTING-CORD, 
SCRAPER, 


In  a  basket  between  the  cheeks  of  the 
mortar  bed. 


WIPER,   .     .     . 

SHELL-HOOKS,    . 

TOMPION,      .     .       In  the  muzzle. 

Q  j  Under  the  mortar  upon  the  bolster, 

(      its  handle  to  the  left. 
POINTING-STAKES,  J 
MAUL,     .     .     .    V  With  the  basket. 
BROOM,    .     .     .    ) 

When  several  mortars  are  served  together,  there  will 
be  only  one  gunner's  level,  and  two  vent-punches  to  each 
battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same  battery 
there  will  be  one  hammer-wrench. 

One  shell  and  one  paper  cartridge  bag  for  instruction, 
are  at  the  magazine  or  other  safe  place  in  rear  of  the 
piece. 

58.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched   to   their 
posts,  the  instructor  directs  them  to  place  their  muskets 
against  the  epaulment,  and  then   explains   to  them  the 
names  and  uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures 
of  the  mortar,  its  bed,  and  the  battery. 

59.  To  cause  the  pointing-stakes  to  be  established  in 
position,  the  instructor  commands  : 

PLANT  THE  POINTING-STAKES. 

The  gunner,  assisted  by  Nos.  1  and  2,  plants  the  stakes. 

No.  1,  having  driven  the  pointing-stakes,  drives  an- 
other stake  one  yard  behind  his  post  for  holding  the 
wiper,  and  replaces  the  maul  near  the  basket. 

The  gunner  lays  the  slack  of  the  pointing-cord  at  the 


MANUAL  FOB  HEAVY  AKTILLEKY.        200 

foot  of  the  epaulment,  leaving  the  plummet  at  the  stake 
in  rear  of  the  piece. 

All  resume  their  posts. 

60.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the  in- 
structor commands : 

TAKE  IMPLEMENTS. 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  front  of  the  piece ;  gives  to 
No.  1  the  sleeves  and  the  wiper ;  to  No.  2  the  basket  and 
maul ;  to  No.  3  the  tube-pouch  and  broom ;  and  to  No. 
4  the  haversack  ;  equips  himself  with  the  gunner's 
pouch ;  applies  his  level  to  ascertain  the  line  of  metal, 
which  he  marks  with  chalk  ;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  1  places  the  wiper  upon  the  stake  behind  him, 
and,  assisted  by  No.  3,  puts  on  the  sleeves. 

No.  2  removes  the  tompion,  which  he  places  with  the 
basket  and  maul,  one  yard  behind  him,  and  lays  the  shell- 
hooks  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the  basket. 

No.  3  lays  the  broom  on  the  ground  behind  him,  and 
equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  4  equips  himself  with  the  haversack,  which  he 
wears  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

All  take  their  handspikes. 

61.  The  handspikes  are  held  as  in  No.  16.     When 
laid  down,  they  are  returned,  except  in  one  case,  to  their 
places  on  the  manoeuvring  bolt. 

62.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  IN  BATTERY. 

The  gunner,  making  a  half-face  to  his  right,  steps  off, 
left  foot  first,  and  places  himself  two  paces  in  rear  of  the 
platform,  facing  the  piece. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  em- 
bar  :  Nos.  1  and  2  under  the  front  manoeuvring  bolts, 


210  MANUAL   FOK   HEAVY   ARTILLKKY. 

and  Nos.  8  and  4  under  those  in  the  rear,  engaging  the 
butts  of  their  handspikes  about  three  inches. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command, 
HEAVE,  which  will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  neces- 
sary. As  soon  as  the  piece  is  on  the  middle  of  the  plat- 
form, he  commands  HALT.  All  unbar,  and  resume  their 
posts. 

2.  Load  by  detail — LOAD. 

63.  Nos.  1,  3,  and  4,  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

The  gunner  taking  the  scraper,  places  himself  in  front 
of  the  muzzle,  and  scrapes  the  bore  and  chamber ;  draws 
out  the  scrapings  with  the  spoon  ;  returns  the  scraper  to 
the  basket,  and  again  places  himself  at  the  muzzle,  one 
yard  in  its  front. 

No.  1,  turning  to  his  right,  takes  the  wiper  with  the 
right  hand  ;  faces  to  his  left,  and  places  the  left  foot  near 
the  manoeuvring  bolt,  the  right  in  front  of  the  muzzle, 
the  left  hand  upon  the  face  of  the  piece ;  thoroughly  wipes 
out  the  chamber  and  bore,  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  3,  as  soon,  as  the  piece  is  wiped,  clears  the  vent 
with  the  priming-wire  ;  sweeps  the  platform,  if  necessary, 
and  resumes  his  post  and  handspike. 

Nos.  2  and  4,  facing  to  their  right — No.  2  holding  his 
handspike  at  the  middle  under  the  left  arm,  butt  end 
foremost,  and  taking  the  shell-hooks  in  the  right — go  to 
the  rear  for  a  cartridge  and  shell.  "While  No.  4  is  getting 
the  cartridge,  No.  2  inserts  the  shell-hooks  in  the  ears  of 
the  shell,  and  passes  the  small  end  of  the  handspike 
through  the  ring.  In  carrying  the  shell  they  hold  the 
handspike  with  their  right  hands,  No.  4  at  the  small  end 
and  in  advance  of  No.  2.  Passing  by  the  left  of  the 
piece,  between  the  gunner  and  the  muzzle,  they  rest  the 
shell  upon  the  platform  against  the  middle  of  the  transom. 


MANUAL  FOK  HEAVY  ARTILLKBY.       211 

No.  1,  placing  the  wiper  upon  the  handspike,  receives 
the  small  end  of  the  handspike  from  No.  4,  who  gives  the 
cartridge  to  the  gunner. 

The  gunner  advances  the  left  foot,  and  places  the  left 
hand  upon  the  face  of  the  piece  ;  introduces  the  cartridge 
into  the  mouth  of  the  chamber  with  the  right  hand,  and 
carefully  pours  in  the  powder ;  returns  the  cartridge  bag 
to  No.  4,  and  distributes  the  powder  evenly  over  the 
bottom  of  the  chamber.  In  firing  with  paper  fuzes,  he 
receives  one  from  No.  4,  and  inserts  it  in  the  fuze-plug. 

No.  4,  returning  the  cartridge  bag  to  the  haversack, 
takes  the  wiper. 

Nos.  1  and  2  raise  the  shell  and  hold  it  about  a  foot 
from  the  ground,  while  No.  4  wipes  it ;  they  then  lift  it 
into  the  muzzle. 

The  gunner  steps  forward,  and  with  the  left  hand  over 
the  handspike,  the  right  hand  under  and  nearer  to  it, 
seizes  the  shell-hooks  and  assists  to  lower  the  shell  gently 
into  its  place.  No.  2  then  withdraws  his  handspike  from 
the  ring,  and  resumes  his  post.  No.  1  takes  his  hand- 
spike. The  gunner  adjusts  the  shell  so  that  the  fuze  is  in 
the  axis  of  the  piece ;  throws  the  shell-hooks  to  their 
place  behind  No.  2  ;  and,  if  firing  with  wooden  fuzes,  un- 
caps the  fuze. 

No.  4,  as  soon  as  he  wipes  the  shell,  returns  the  wiper 
to  its  place ;  takes  the  slack  of  the  pointing-cord,  which 
he  lays  over  the  left  manoeuvring  bolts,  leaving  its  end 
at  the  rear  pointing-stake  ;  and  resumes  his  post  and  hand- 
spike. 

3.  POINT. 

64.  Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  em- 
bar  upon  the  bolster,  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the 


212        MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 

The  gunner  taking  the  quadrant  from  the  basket,  ap- 
plies it  to  the  left  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand,  and  inserts  or  draws  out  the  quoin  with  the 
right,  giving  the  command  EAISE,  or  LOWER,  until  the 
piece  is  at  the  elevation  required — usually  45°.  Return- 
ing the  quadrant  to  the  basket — Nos.  1  and  2  at  the  same 
time  unbarring  and  resuming  their  posts — he  places  him- 
self in  rear  of  the  rear  pointing-stake,  and  holding  the 
pointing-cord  in  the  left  hand  and  the  plummet  in  the 
right,  gives  the  direction ;  commanding  MORTAR  LEFT, 
MORTAR  RIGHT  ;  MUZZLE  LEFT,  MUZZLE  RIGHT  ;  TRAIL 
LEFT,  TRAIL  RIGHT,  as  may  be  required. 

To  throio  the  mortar  to  the  left.  Nos.  2  and  4,  facing 
each  other,  embar  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts.  Nos.  1 
and  3,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embar  under  the 
notches  near  them.  When  all  are  ready,  the  gunner  gives 
the  command,  HEAVE  STEADY.  The  cannoneers  remain 
embarred  until  he  gives  some  other  command,  or  makes 
the  signal  to  unbar. 

To  throio  the  mortar  to  the  right.  Nos.  1  and  8  em- 
bar  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts.  Nos.  2  and  4  embar 
under  the  notches. 

To  throw  the  muzzle  to  the  left.  Nos.  1  and  3,  facing 
towards  the  epaulment,  embar  under  the  front  notches ; 
No.  1  under  the  inside  of  the  left  notch. 

To  throw  the  trail  to  the  left.  Nos.  1  and  3,  facing 
towards  the  epaulment,  embar  under  the  rear  notches ; 
No.  3  under  the  inside  of  the  left  notch. 

The  muzzle  or  trail  is  thrown  to  the  right,  in  a  sim- 
ilar manner  to  the  preceding,  by  Nos.  2  and  4. 

The  direction  having  been  given,  the  gunner  gives  the 
word,  READY,  and  makes  a  signal  with  both  hands  ;  leaves 
the  plummet  at  the  stake ;  returns  the  pointing-cord  to 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  213 

the  foot  of  the  epaulment ;  and  goes  to  the  windward  to 
observe  the  effect  of  the  shot. 

Nos.  1,  2,  and  4,  taking  their  handspikes  with  them,  go 
four  yards  in  rear  of  the  platform,  and  face  to  the  front ; 
No.  4  between  Nos.  1  and  2,  their  handspikes  held  erect 
by  the  right  side,  the  right  arm  extended  naturally. 

No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike  six  inches  in  his  front, 
parallel  to  the  edge  of  the  platform,  and  makes  ready  a 
friction  tube,  as  in  No.  24 ;  advancing  the  right  foot,  he 
puts  the  tube  in  the  vent ;  rises  on  the  left  leg,  and  moves 
three  paces  to  the  rear  in  prolongation  of  the  right  cheek ; 
faces  to  the  front ;  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard  with 
the  right  hand,  the  lanyard  slightly  stretched,  the  cord 
passing  between  the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up ;  and 
breaks  to  the  rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  the  left 
hand  against  the  thigh. 

Remark. — To  discharge  the  mortars  now  in  use  by 
means  of  a  friction  tube,  the  lanyard  should  be  passed 
under  a  rope  attached  to  and  tightly  drawn  between  the 
rear  manoeuvring  bolts,  or  through  a  loop  of  rope  at- 
tached to  the  rear  right  manoeuvring  bolt. 

4.  Number  one  (or  the  like) — FIRE. 

65.  Executed  as  in  No.  25. 

On  the  discharge  of  the  piece,  all  resume  their  posts 
except  the  gunner,  who  waits  to  observe  the  effect  of  the 
shot.  As  soon  as  the  shot  strikes  he  resumes  his  post. 

What  is  prescribed  in  No.  26  will  apply  to  this  piece, 
omitting  the  word  "  loclc" 

66.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  causes  the 
piece  to  be  moved  towards  the  rear  of  the  platform,  di- 
rects Nos.  2  and  4  to  take  out  the  shell  and  carry  it  to 
the  rear,  and  then  resumes  the  series  of  commands  begin- 
ning with  In  Battery. 


214:  MANUAL    FOB   HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

TO  CHANGE  POSTS.      TO  LOAD  FOR  ACTION.      TO  CEASE  FIRING. 

Executed  as  in  Nos.  28,  29,  and  30,  except  that  in 
changing  posts  No.  2  passes  by  the  front  of  the  piece. 

TO    SECURE    PIECE,    AND    REPLACE    IMPLEMENTS. 

67.  To  discontinue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  having 
ordered  the  firing  to  cease,  and  caused  the  piece  to  be 
placed  as  at  the  command,  IN  BATTERY,  gives  the  com- 
mand : 

REPLACE  IMPLEMENTS. 

All  lay  down  their  handspikes.  No.  2  puts  in  the 
tompion,  and  assists  No.  1  to  pull  up  the  pointing-stakes. 
The  gunner  receives  the  implements  from  the  cannoneers, 
and  replaces  them  between  the  cheeks. 

TO    LEAVE    THE    BATTERY, 

Executed  as  in  No.  32. 

TRANSPORTATION. 

68.  One  mortar  wagon  is  allowed  to  each    10-inch 
siege  mortar  and  bed ;  to  transport  which  requires  eight 
horses  and  four  drivers. 


CHARGES,    ETC. 

69. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder 4  Ibs* 

Ordinary  service  charge 3    " 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 5    " 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 2   " 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 6  oz. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  215 

Range,  charge  4  Ibs.,  time  of  flight  21" 2100  yards. 

Range,  charge  3  Ibs.,  time  of  flight  19" 1700     " 

Range,  charge  2  Ibs.,  time  of  flight  14" 1000     " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300     " 

Weight  of  the  shell 90  Ibs. 

Five  balls,  according  to  their  size,  are  fired  from  mor- 
tars of  corresponding  calibres.  With  a  charge  of  one- 
twenty-fifth  of  its  weight  the  ball  is  thrown  from  six  hun- 
dred to  seven  hundred  yards. 


TO    PREPARE    AMMUNITION. 

70.  If  the  ammunition  for  mortars  is  to  be  prepared 
and  issued  by  the  artillery,  two  men,  numbered  5  and  6, 
are  added  to  each  detachment  for  that  purpose.  Their 
duties  at  the  magazine  are  similar  to  those  prescribed  in 
No.  56. 

Should  wooden  fuzes  be  used,  in  addition  to  the  im- 
plements therein  mentioned,  a  fuze-saio  will  be  required 
for  reducing  the  fuzes  to  the  proper  lengths.  The  shell 
being  first  charged,  the  fuze,  cut  at  the  right  length,  is 
then  driven. 

The  paper  fuze  is  marked  with  the  number  of  seconds 
which  it  burns  per  inch.  It  may  be  cut  with  a  knife  to 
any  desired  length. 


TIME    OF   FLIGHT. 

71.  The  time  of  flight  for  siege  mortars,  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  45°,  with  ordinary  charges,  is  nearly  equal  to  the 
square  root  of  the  range  in  feet  divided  by  four. 

The  experimental  length  of  the  fuze  may  be  given  ac- 
cording to  this  rule. 


216  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLEEY. 


TO  ASCERTAIN  THE  DISTANCE   BY  THE  REPORT  OF  FIRE-ARMS. 

72.  Multiply  the  number  of  seconds  which  elapse  be- 
tween seeing  the  flash  and  hearing  the  report  by  1,100 ; 
the  product  will  be  nearly  the  distance  in  feet. 


RAPIDITY    OF    FIRING. 

73.  Siege  mortars  can  be  fired  conveniently  at  the 
rate  of  twelve  rounds  an  hour  continuously  ;  but  they 
may  in  case  of  need,  be  fired  with  greater  rapidity. 


LESSON   IV. 

Service  of  an  8-inch  Siege  Mortar. 

Three  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  two  other 
cannoneers. 

74.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  omitting  two  handspikes,  and 
adding  one  grummet-wad,  are  the  same  as  prescribed  for 
the  10-inch  siege  mortar  in  No.  57.  They  are  arranged 
as  prescribed  in  that  number.  The  wad  is  in  the  basket. 

75.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  is  the  same  as  that 
prescribed  in  Lesson  III.,  with  the  following  modifica- 
tions : 

At  the  command  TAKE  IMPLEMENTS,  No.  1  performs 
the  duties  enjoined  on  No,  3,  and  No.  2  those  of  No.  4, 
each  in  addition  to  his  own.  No.  2  assists  No.  1  to  put 
on  the  sleeves,  and  places  the  wad  on  the  platform  in 
front  of  the  transom. 

76.  At  the  command  IN  BATTERY,  No.  1  embars  under 
the  right  front  manoeuvring  bolts.    No.  2  embars  under 
the  left  rear  manoeuvring  bolts. 


- 

1 


a 


Jf 

3 

PQ 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   AUTILLEKY.  217 

77.  At  the  command  LOAD,  No.  1,  having  wiped  out 
the  mortar,  places  the  wiper  upon  the  stake  ;  pricks  ;  and, 
if  necessary,  sweeps  the  platform. 

No.  2,  laying  down  his  handspike,  goes  for  a  cartridge 
and  shell ;  carries  the  shell  in  the  right  arm  ;  passes  be- 
tween the  gunner  and  the  muzzle,  and  places  it  on  the 
wad ;  gives  to  the  gunner  the  cartridge,  and  if  firing  with 
paper  fuzes,  a  fuze ;  and  takes  the  wiper  from  the 
stake. 

The  gunner,  on  returning  the  scraper  to  the  basket, 
takes  the  shell-hooks  and  lays  them  on  the  ground  be- 
tween himself  and  the  muzzle.  Having  carefully  poured 
in  the  powder,  he  returns  the  cartridge-bag  to  No.  2, 
and  distributes  the  powder  evenly  over  the  bottom  of  the 
chamber ;  puts  the  fuze  in  the  fuze-plug ;  inserts  the 
hooks  in  the  ears  of  the  shell ;  raises  it  about  a  foot  from 
the  ground  and  holds  it,  while  No.  2  wipes  it ;  and  then 
places  it  in  the  bore. 

No.  2  replaces  the  wiper  upon  the  stake ;  lays  the 
slack  of  the  pointing-cord  over  the  left  manoeuvring  bolts ; 
and  resumes  his  post. 

78.  At  the  command  POINT,  Nos.  1   and  2  embar 
under  either  of  the  front  or  rear  notches,  as  required. 
At  the  signal  from  the  gunner,  No.  1  prepares  to  fire  the 
piece,  as  prescribed  for  No.  3,  in  No.  64. 


TRANSPORTATION. 

79.  One  mortar  wagon  will  carry  three  8-inch  siege 
mortars,  with  then  "beds;   to  transport  which  requires 
eight  horses  and  four  drivers. 
10 


218  MANUAL  FOB   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


CHARGES,  ETC. 
80. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder 2  Ibs. 

Ordinary  service  charge 1  Ib.  12  oz. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 2  Ibs.   9  oz. 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 1  Ib. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 4  oz. 

Range,  charge  2  Ibs.,  time  of  flight  20" 1,837  yards. 

Range,  charge  !£  Ib.,  time  of  flight  14" 943     " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300     " 

Weight  of  shell 45  Ibs. 


LESSON   V. 

Service  of  a  Coehorn  Mortar. 

Three  men  are  necessary :  one  gunner  and  two  other 
cannoneers. 

81.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  8-inch  siege  mortar  in  No.  74. 
A  24-pdr.  shell  is  used. 

82.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  is  the  same  as  that 
prescribed  in  Lesson  IV. 

To  prepare  its  ammunition,  and  to  transport  it  by 
hand  with  ease,  two  additional  men  are  required.  The 
gunner  carries  the  basket  and  implements. 

83.  It  is  fired  either  from  behind  intrenchments,  like 
other  mortars,  or  it  may  accompany  troops  in  effecting 
lodgments  in  towns  and  fortified  places. 

84.  As  the  shell  is  without  ears,  it  should  be  strapped 
with  tin,  having  loops  attached,  through  which  a  cord  is 
passed  for  the  purpose  of  lowering  it  into  the  bore.     The 
chamber  being  cylindrical,  a  sponge  is  used,  which  is 
handled  by  No.  1. 


MANUAL   FOB   HEAVY  ARTILLERY.  219 

CHARGES,  ETC. 

85. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder 8  OZ. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder *.-.. 1  Ib. 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 8  oz. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 2  oz. 

Range,  charge  8  oz 1,200  yards. 

Range,  charge  6  oz 900     u 

Range,  charge  4  oz 430     " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300     " 

Weight  of  shell 17  Ibs. 

LESSON   VI. 
Service  of  a  10-inch  Sea-coast  Mortar. 

Five  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

86.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  with  the  addition  of  one  sponge, 
are  the  same  as  prescribed  for  the  10-inch  siege  mortar 
in  No.  57.  They  are  arranged  as  prescribed  in  that 
number,  except  that  the  sponge  is  placed  upon  props  one 
yard  behind  No.  1,  the  sponge-head  turned  towards  the 
epaulment. 

87.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  is  the  same  as  that 
prescribed  in  Lesson  III.,  with  the  following  modifications  : 

No.  1,  after  wiping  the  bore,  sponges  out  the  cham- 
ber ;  for  this  purpose  mounting  upon  the  right  cheek  and 
bolster. 

To  scrape  the  bore,  and  to  put  in  the  cartridge  and 
shell,  the  gunner  mounts  upon  a  block  in  front  of  the 
muzzle. 

The  cartridge — its  bag  being  of  bombazine  or  flannel 
— is  put  directly  into  the  chamber  by  the  gunner,  and 
rammed  by  No.  1. 


220  MANUAL   FOK   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

To  lift  the  shell  into  the  muzzle,  Nos.  2  and  3  mount 
the  cheeks,  and  are  assisted  respectively  by  the  gunner 
and  No.  1. 

In  giving  the  elevation,  Nos.  1  and  2  are  assisted  by 
Nos.  3  and  4. 

Before  priming,  No.  3  pricks  a  second  time. 


CHARGES,  ETC. 

88. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder 10  Ibs. 

Charge  of  shell  filled  with  powder 5    " 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 2    " 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 5  oz. 

Range,  charge  10  Ibs.,  time  of  flight  36" 4,250  yards. 

Proof  range  of  powder 300     " 

Weight  of  shell 90  Ibs. 


LESSON   VII. 

Service  of  a  1%-incli  Sea-coast  Mortar. 

Five  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

89.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  10- inch  sea-coast  mortar  in 
No.  86. 

00.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  differs  in  no  respect 
from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  VI. 


CHARGES,  ETC. 

91. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder 20  Ibs. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 11    " 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 6    " 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   AKTILLEKY.  221 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 6  oz. 

Range,  charge  20  Ibs.,  time  of  flight  (about)  40" 4,325  yards. 

Proof  range  of  powder 300     " 

Weight  of  shell 200  Ibs. 


LESSON   VIII. 

Service  of  a  Stone  Mortar. 

Five  men  are  necessary :  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

92.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  10-inch  sea-coast  mortar  in 
No.  86. 

93.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  differs  in  no  respect 
from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  VI. 

A  wooden  bottom  is  placed  over  the  mouth  of  the 
chamber  to  receive  the  basket  which  contains  the  charge 
of  stones. 

CHARGES,   ETC. 

94.  With  a  charge  of  a  pound  and  a  half  of  powder, 
and  one  hundred  and  twenty  pounds  of  stones,  at  an  ele- 
vation of  60°,  the  stones  are  thrown  from  one  hundred 
and  fifty  to  two  hundred  and  fifty  yards. 

With  fifteen  6-pdr.  shells,  fuze  fifteen  seconds,  charge 
of  powder  one  pound,  elevation  33°,  the  shell  may  be 
thrown  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards. 

95.  As  the  shells  are  liable  to  burst  on  leaving  the 
bore,  the  piece  is  fired  by  a  slow  match  applied  to  a  train 
of  quick  match,  giving  the  men  time  to  place  themselves 
under  cover. 


222 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 


LESSON    IX. 
Service  of  a  Gun  mounted  on  a  Barbette  Carriage. 

Remark. — The  instruction  for  a  barbette  gun,  although  in  many 
respects  precisely  the  same  as  that  for  a  siege  gun,  is  given  in  full, 
because  the  siege  gun  is  seldom  found  in  the  forts  on  the  sea-board. 

Five  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

96.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows : 

r  Two  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  lean- 
HANDSPIKES,     .   <      ing  against  the  parapet,  in  line  with 
L.    the  cannoneers. 

One  yard  behind  the  cannoneers  of  the 
right,    the   sponge   uppermost,   the 
sponge   and    rammer-heads   turned 
from  the  parapet,  inclined  slightly 
from  the  piece,  and  supported  upon 
a  prop ;  or,  when  this  cannot  be  done 
conveniently,  placed  against  the  wall, 
.   the  sponge  and  rammer-heads  near- 
est the  piece. 
Against  the   parapet,  outside  of  the 

pile  of  balls. 

Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the  lan- 
yard, wound  in  St.  Andrew's  cross 
upon  its  handle.     Suspended  from 
the  knob  of  the  cascable. 
Containing  the  gunner's  level,  breech- 
sight,  finger-stall,  priming-wire,  gim- 
GUNNER'S-POUCH,  1      let,  vent-punch,  chalk-line,  and  chalk. 
Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 


SPONGE-RAMMER,  - 


PASS-BOX, 


TUBE-POUCH, 


w 

I 

hj 

0 


SB 

U 


n 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  223 

r  One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  at  the 
CHOCKS,  .     .     .   <      foot  of  the  parapet,  inside  the  hand- 

L     spikes. 

VENT-COVER,     .       Covering  the  vent. 
TOMPION,      .     .       In  the  muzzle. 

~  (  Leaning  against  the  parapet,  outside 

BROOM,    .     .     .    ]  b     °       fin 

(      of  the  pile  of  balls. 

f  Containing  cartridges,  at  the  safest  and 
BUDGE-BARREL,  <  most  convenient  place  in  rear  of  the 
I  piece. 

When  several  guns  are  served  together,  there  will  be 
only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to  each 
battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same  battery 
there  will  be  one  ivorm,  one  ladle,  and  one  wrench. 

The  balls  are  regularly  piled  on  the  banquette,  on  the 
left  of  the  piece. 

The  wads  aro  placed  between  the  parapet  and  the 
balls,  partly  resting  on  them. 

97.  The   cannoneers   having  been  marched   to  their 
posts,  the  instructor   explains  to  them   the  names  and 
uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures  of  the  gun, 
its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

98.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands : 

TAKE  IMPLEMENTS. 

The  gunner  mounts  upon  the  tongue ;  takes  off  the 
vent-cover,  handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the  para- 
pet, outside  of  the  pass-box  ;  gives  the  tube-pouch  to  No. 
3  ;  equips  himself  with  his  own  pouch  and  the  finger-stall, 
wearing  the  latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand  ; 
levels  the  piece  by  the  elevating  screw  ;  applies  his  level 
to  ascertain  the  line  of  metal,  which,  with  the  assistance 
of  No.  2,  he  marks  with  the  chalk-line ;  and  resumes  his 
post. 


224:  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 
Nos.  1  and  2,  after  passing  handspikes  to  Nos.  3  and 
4,  take  each  one  for  himself. 

99.  The  handspike  is  held  in  both  hands  ;  the  hand 
nearest  to  the  parapet  grasping  it  near  the  small  end  and 
at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  back  of  the  hand   down, 
elbow  touching  the  body ;  the  other  hand  back  up,  the 
arm  extended  naturally  ;  the  butt  of  the  handspike  upon 
the  ground  on  the  side  farthest  from  the  parapet,  and  six 
inches  in  advance  of  the  alignment. 

100.  When  the  cannoneer  lays  down  his  handspike,  he 
places  it  directly  before  him,  about  six  inches  in  advance 
of,  and  parallel  to  the  alignment,  the  small  end  towards 
the  parapet ;  and  whenever  he  thus  lays  it  down  for  the 
performance  of  any  particular  duty,  he  will  resume  it 
on  returning  to  his  post  after  the  completion  of  that 
duty. 

101.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands : 

1.  FROM  BATTERY. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  his  right. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  facing  from  the  parapet,  embar, 
near  the  tire ;  Nos.  1  and  2  first  facing  the  chocks  on  the 
rails  in  front  of  the  rollers  through  the  front  spokes  of 
the  wheels,  over  the  front  manoeuvring  bolts ;  and  Nos. 
3  and  4  through  the  rear  spokes,  under  the  rear  ma- 
noeuvring bolts. 

Should  there  be  no  rear  manoeuvring  bolts,  Nos.  3 
and  4  embar  under  the  braces,  near  the  manoeuvring 
staples. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command  HEAVE, 
which  will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  necessary.  As 
soon  as  the  face  of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the 


MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY.        225 

parapet,  ho  commands  HALT.     All  unbar,  and  resume 
their  posts.     Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  rollers. 

2.  Load  by  Detail — LOAD. 

102.  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  out  the  tompion,  and  places  it  near  the 
vent-cover. 

No.  1  faces  once  and  a  half  to  his  left ;  steps  over  the 
sponge  and  rammer ;  faces  the  piece ;  takes  the  sponge 
with  both  hands,  the  backs  down,  the  right  hand  three 
feet  from  the  sponge-head,  the  left  hand  eighteen  inches 
nearer  to  it ;  returns  to  the  piece,  placing  the  left  foot  on 
the  rail  of  the  chassis  in  line  with  the  face  of  the  piece, 
the  right  in  the  most  convenient  position  ;  and  rests  the 
end  of  the  sponge  in  the  muzzle,  the  staff  in  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  bore,  supported  by  the  right  hand,  the  right 
arm  extended,  the  left  hand  flat  against  the  side  of  the 
thigh. 

Remark. — In  order  that  Nos.  1  and  2  may  load  with  facility  with- 
out standing  on  the  chassis,  a  banquette  should  be  placed  between 
the  head  of  the  chassis  and  the  wall,  or  a  platform  attached  to  the 
head  of  the  chassis. 

No.  2  steps  upon  the  rail  on  his  side,  and  occupies  a 
position  on  the  left  of  the  piece  corresponding  to  that  of 
No.  1  on  its  right.  He  seizes  the  staff  with  the  left 
hand,  back  down,  near  to  and  outside  of  the  hand  of 
No.  1. 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  sponge  is  inserted  in  the  bore, 
steps  over  the  rammer  and  seizes  the  staff  with  both 
hands,  as  prescribed  for  the  sponge  ;  returns  to  his  post ; 
and  stands  ready  to  exchange  with  No.  1. 

No.  4  takes  the  pass-box  and  goes  to  the  rear  for  a 
cartridge ;  returns  with  it,  and  places  himself,  facing  the 
piece,  about  eighteen  inches  to  the  rear  and  right  of 
No.  2. 

10* 


226       MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 

The  gunner  mounts  upon  the  tongue  of  the  chassis, 
placing  the  left  foot  about  six  inches  from  the  rear  tran- 
som of  the  gun  carriage,  and  breaks  well  to  the  rear  with 
the  right  foot,  the  toe  to  the  right ;  closes  the  vent  with 
the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand,  bending  well  forward 
to  cover  himself  by  the  breech  ;  and  turns  the  elevating 
screw  with  the  right  hand,  so  as  to  adjust  the  piece  con- 
veniently for  loading. 

103.  In  the  mean  time,  Nos.  1  and  2  insert  the  sponge 
by  the  following  motions  : 

First  motion. — They  insert  the  sponge  as  far  as  the 
hand  of  No.  1,  bodies  erect,  shoulders  square. 

Second  motion. — They  slide  the  hands  along  the  staff 
and  seize  it  at  arm's  length. 

Third  motion. — They  force  the  sponge  down  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  first  motion. 

Fourth  motion. — They  repeat  the  second  motion. 

Fifth  motion. — They  push  the  sponge  to  the  bottom 
of  the  bore.  No.  1  replaces  the  left  hand  on  the  staff, 
back  up,  six  inches  nearer  to  the  muzzle  than  the  right. 
No.  2  places  the  Tight  hand,  back  up,  between  the  hands 
of  No.  1. 

If  in  executing  these  motions,  or  the  corresponding 
ones  with  the  rammer,  it  be  found  that  the  sponge  or 
rammer  is  at  home  at  the  third  or  fourth  motion,  then 
what  is  prescribed  for  the  fifth  motion,  will  be  performed 
at  the  third  or  fourth.  The  knee  on  the  side  towards 
which  the  body  is  to  be  inclined  is  always  bent,  the  other 
straightened ;  and  the  weight  of  the  body  added,  as  much 
as  possible,  to  the  effort  exerted  by  the  arms. 

3.  SPONGE. 

104.  Nos.  1  and  2,  pressing  the  sponge  firmly  against 
the  bottom  of  the  bore,  turn  it  three  times  from  right  to 


MANUAL   FOR  HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  227 

left,  and  three  times  from  left  to  right ;  replace  the  hands 
on  the  thighs  ;  and  withdraw  the  sponge  by  motions  con- 
trary to  those  prescribed  for  inserting  it. 

Remark. — To  handle  the  sponge  when  it  is  new  and  fits  tight, 
it  may  become  necessary  for  Nos.  1  and  2  to  use  both  hands.  In 
this  case  it  will  be  inserted  and  withdrawn  by  short  and  quick  mo- 
tions. 

No.  2  quits  the  staff,  and  turning  towards  No.  4,  re- 
ceives from  him  the  cartridge,  which  he  takes  in  both 
hands,  back  down,  and  introduces  into  the  bore  bottom 
foremost,  seams  to  the  sides ;  he  then  grasps  the  rammer 
in  the  way  prescribed  for  the  sponge. 

No.  1,  rising  upon  the  right  leg  and  turning  towards 
his  left,  passes  the  sponge  above  the  rammer  with  the  left 
hand  to  No.  3,  and  receiving  the  rammer  with  the  right, 
presents  it  as  prescribed  for  the  sponge,  except  that  he 
rests  the  rammer-head  against  the  right  side  of  the  face 
of  the  piece. 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  sponge  is  withdrawn,  passing 
the  rammer  under  the  sponge  with  the  right  hand,  re- 
ceives the  sponge  from  No.  1  with  the  left,  replaces  it 
upon  the  prop,  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  4,  setting  down  the  pass-box,  takes  out  the  car- 
tridge and  presents  it  in  both  hands  to  No.  2,  the  choke 
to  the  front ;  returns  the  pass-box  to  its  place ;  and 
picks  up  a  ball,  and  afterwards  a  wad,  should  one  be  re- 
quired. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  cartridge  by  the  motions 
prescribed  for  forcing  down  the  sponge. 

4.  RAM. 

105.  Nos.  1  and  2,  drawing  the  rammer  out  to  the 
full  extent  of  their  arms,  ram  with  a  single  stroke.  No. 
2  quits  the  staff,  and  turning  towards  No.  4,  receives  from 
him  the  ball  and  wad,  while  No.  1  throws  out  the  ram- 


228  MANUAL   FOE   HEAVY  AKTILLEKY. 

mer,  and  holds  the  head  against  the  right  side  of  the  face 
of  the  piece.  No.  2,  receiving  successively  the  ball  and 
wad,  introduces  them  into  the  bore,  the  ball  first,  and 
seizes  the  staff  with  the  left  hand.  No.  4  then  resumes 
his  post. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  ball  and  wad  together 
by  the  same  motions,  and  ram  in  the  same  manner  as 
prescribed  for  the  cartridge.  No.  2  quits  the  rammer ; 
sweeps,  if  necessary,  the  platform  on  his  own  side ;  passes 
the  broom  to  No.  1 ;  and  resumes  his  post.  No.  1  throws 
out  the  rammer,  and  places  it  upon  the  prop  below  the 
sponge ;  finishes  the  sweeping  ;  and  resumes  his  post. 

The  gunner  pricks,  leaving  the  priming-wire  in  the 
vent,  and,  if  firing  beyond  point-blank  range,  adjusts  the 
breech-sight  to  the  distance. 

5.  IN  BATTERY. 

106.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  rollers,  and  with  Nos. 
3  and  4,  all  facing  towards  the  parapet,  embar ;  Nos.  1 
and  2  through  the  front  spokes  of  the  wheels,  near  the 
tire,  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts  ;    and  Nos.  3  and  4 
under  the  braces,  near  the  manoeuvring  staples. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  commands  HEAVE,  and 
the  piece  is  run  into  battery ;  the  gunner  following  up 
the  movement.  As  soon  as  the  rollers  touch  the  hurters, 
he  commands  HALT.  All  unbar,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4 
resume  their  posts. 

6.  POINT. 

107.  No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike ;  passes  the  hook 
of  the  lanyard  through  the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to 
rear ;  and  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard  with  the  right 
hand,  the  hook  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger. 

Nos.  1  and  4  go  to  the  traverse  wheels,  and,  facing 
towards  the  parapet,  embar  under  the  fork-bolts  or  under 


MANUAL   FOK   HEAVY   AKTILLEKY.  229 

the  wheels.  No.  1,  in  passing  from  and  to  his  post, 
moves  on  the  outside  of  No.  3. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  aided 
by  Nos.  1  and  4,  gives  the  direction ;  causing  the  trail  to 
be  moved  by  commanding  LEFT,  or  RIGHT,  tapping,  at 
the  same  time,  on  the  right  side  of  the  breech  for  No.  1 
to  move  the  chassis  to  the  left,  or  on  the  left  side  for  No. 
4  to  move  it  to  the  right. 

He  then  places  the  centre  point  of  the  breech-sight 
accurately  upon  the  chalk  mark  on  the  base-ring,  and  by 
the  elevating  screw  gives  the  proper  elevation,  rectifying 
the  direction,  if  necessary. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises 
on  the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word  READY,  making  a 
signal  with  both  hands,  at  which  Nos.  1  and  4  unbar,  and 
resume  their  posts ;  takes  the  breech-sight  with  the  left 
hand,  and  receiving  the  tube  from  No.  3,  inserts  it  in  the 
vent ;  dismounts  from  the  tongue  ;  and  goes  to  the  wind- 
ward to  observe  the  effect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3  drops  the  handle,  allowing  the  lanyard  to  un- 
coil as  he  steps  back  to  his  post,  holding  it  slightly 
stretched  with  the  right  hand,  the  cord  passing  between 
the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up,  and  breaks  to  the  rear  a 
full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  the  left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

At  the  word,  READY,  Nos.  1  and  2  take  the  chocks, 
and,  breaking  off  with  the  feet  farthest  from  the  parapet, 
stand  ready  to  chock  the  rollers. 

108.  In  directing  the  piece  to  be  fired,  the  instructor 
will  designate  it  by  its  number,  as,  for  example  : 

7.  Number  one — FIRE. 

No.  3  gives  a  smart  pull  upon  the  lanyard. 
Immediately  after  the  discharge  of  the  piece,  Nos.  I 
and  2  chock  the  rollers,  and  resume  the  erect  position. 


230       MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  AKTILLEKY. 

No.  3  resumes  the  erect  position,  and  rewinds  the  lanyard 
in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its  handle,  returning  it,  if  dry, 
to  the  tube-pouch.  The  gunner,  having  observed  the  ef- 
fect of  the  shot,  returns  to  his  post. 

109.  Whenever  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  by  a  lock,  port- 
fire, or  slowmatch,  it  will  be  done  by  No.  3,  as  prescribed 
for  No.  4,  in  the  instruction  for  field  artillery. 

110.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands,  beginning  with  FROM  BATTERY. 

TO    CHANGE    POSTS. 

111.  To  change  posts,  the  instructor  commands: 
1.    Change  posts.     2.  March.     3.   Call  off . 

At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  lay  down  their 
handspikes  ;  place  their  equipments  on  the  parts  of  the 
carriage  nearest  to  them  ;  and  face  to  their  left. 

At  the  second  command,  they  step  off,  each  advancing 
one  post ;  No.  2  taking  that  of  No.  1.  Nos.  2  and  3  pass 
to  the  rear  of  the  chassis ;  No.  2  on  the  outside  of  all  the 
cannoneers.  On  arriving  at  their  posts,  they  face  to  the 
piece,  and  equip  themselves. 

At  the  third  command,  they  call  off,  according  to  the 
posts  they  are  to  occupy. 

TO    LOAD    FOR   ACTION. 

112.  The  cannoneers  having  been  sufficiently  instructed 
in  the  details  of  the  movements,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Load  for  action — LOAD. 

The  piece  is  run  from  battery,  loaded,  run  into  bat- 
tery, pointed,  and  prepared  for  firing,  by  the  following 
commands  from  the  gunner  :  FROM  BATTERY — LOAD — IN 
BATTERY — POINT — READY. 


MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY.        231 

At  tho  command,  or  signal,  from  the  instructor  to 
commence  firing,  the  gunner  gives  the  command,  FIRE, 
and  continues  the  action  until  the  instructor  directs  the 
firing  to  cease. 

TO    CEASE    FIRING. 

113.  To  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

CEASE  FIRING. 

Whether  the  cannoneers  are  loading  by  detail  or  for 
action,  the  piece  is  sponged  out,  and  all  resume  their  posts. 
If  the  cartridge  has  been  inserted  the  loading  will  be  com- 
pleted, unless  the  instructor  should  otherwise  direct. 

TO  SECURE  PIECE,  AND  REPLACE  IMPLEMENTS. 

114.  To  discontinue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  having 
ordered  the  firing  to  cease,  and  caused  the  piece  to  be  run 
into  battery,  gives  the  following  commands : 

1.  SECURE  PIECE. 

No.  2  returns  the  tompion  to  the  muzzle.  The  gunner 
puts  on  the  vent  cover,  which  he  receives  from  No.  2, 
and  depresses  the  piece. 

2.  REPLACE  IMPLEMENTS. 

Nos.  1  and  2  replace  the  handspikes  against  the  para- 
pet, Nos.  3  and  4  passing  theirs  to  them  for  that  purpose. 
The  gunner  hangs  the  pouches  upon  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 

TO    LEAVE    THE    BATTERY. 

115.  The  instructor  forms  the  detachment  in  rear  of 
the  piece,  and  marches  it  from  the  battery  as  prescribed 
in  No.  12. 


232  MANUAL   FOK   HEAVY   AKTILLERY. 

TO    SERVE    THE    PIECE    WITH    REDUCED    NUMBERS. 

Executed  as  in  No.  34. 

CHARGES,    ETC. 

Wads. 

Rapidity  of  firing* 
Penetration  of  shot. 
See  Nos.  37,  39,  and  40. 

LESSON    XII. 
Service  of  a  Gun  mounted  on  a  Casemate  Carriage. 

Five  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

120.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows  : 

f  One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  lean- 

iRUCK-HAND-  I          .  ingt  the  waU    in  ^  ^fa  ^Q 

SPIKES. 

L     cannoneers. 

f  One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  lean- 
.LLEVATING-HAND-  I       .  .        ,,          -,,   •,    ,  .    n  ,  AT       0 


SPIKES,        .      . 


.  .        ,,          -,,   •,    ,  .    n  ,  AT       0 

<      ing  against  the  wall,  behind  Nos.  3 

an(J4* 

r  One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  lean- 
IRAVERSING-          I       .      against  the  wall,  opposite  to  the 
HANDSPIKES,.    [     end  of  the  tongue. 

r  Leaning  against  the  wall,  behind  the 

KOLLER-HAND-          I         gunner>  Qr   kid    down    jn    the   align- 

SPIKE,.     .     .    ^     ment  on  his  right. 

*  These  are  manwuvrinff  handspikes.  With  two  pieces  in  one  casemate,  or 
"where  the  pieces  are  not  separated  by  piers,  they  may  be  placed  against  tho 
nearest  wall,  or  laid  down  in  the  most  convenient  position. 


MANUAL  FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


233 


SPONGE-RAMMER,  -\ 


PASS-BOX, 


TUBE-POUCH, 


GUNNER' S-POUCH, 


CHOCKS,  .     . 

VENT-COVER, 
TOMPION, 

BROOM,    .     . 


BUDGE-BARREL, 


f  About  one  yard  behind  the  cannoneers 
of  the  right,  the  sponge  uppermost, 
the  sponge  and  rammer-heads  turned 
from  the  embrasure,  inclined  slight- 
ly from  the  piece,  and  supported 
upon  a  proper  block. 
Behind  No.  4. 

Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the  lan- 
yard, wound  in  St.  Andrew's  cross 
upon  its  handle.  Suspended  from 
the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

Containing  the  gunner's  level,  breech- 
sight,  finger-stall,  priming-wire,  gim- 
let, vent-punch,  chalk-line,  and  chalk. 
Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 

{One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  on 
the  front   transom  of  the   chassis, 
handles  outwards. 
Covering  the  vent. 
In  the  muzzle. 

j  Leaning  against  the  scarp-wall,  on  the 
(      left  of  the  piece. 
r  Containing  cartridges,  at  the  safest  and 
•I      most  convenient   place  in  rear  of 
I     the  piece. 


When  several  guns  are  served  together,  there  will  be 
only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to  each  bat- 
tery, not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same  battery  there 
will  be  one  ivorm,  one  ladle,  and  one  wrench. 

The  balls  are  regularlv  piled  against  the  wall,  behind 
No.  2. 


231  MANUAL   FOE  HEAVY   AKTILLEPwY. 

The  wads  are  placed  between  the  wall  and  the*  balls, 
partly  resting  on  them. 

121.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  explains  to  them  the  names  and  uses 
of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures  of  the  gun,  its 
carriage,  and  the  battery. 

122.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands : 

TAKE  IMPLEMENTS. 

The  gunner  mounts  upon  the  tongue ;  takes  off  the 
vent-cover,  handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the 
scarp ;  gives  the  tube-pouch  to  No.  3 ;  and  equips  him- 
self with  his  own  pouch  and  the  finger-stall,  wearing  the 
latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand.  With  the  as- 
sistance of  No.  3  he  levels  the  piece,  and  applies  his  level 
to  ascertain  the  line  of  metal,  which,  with  the  assistance 
of  No.  2,  he  marks  with  the  chalk  line.  (If  the  gun  has 
permanent  sights,  this  is  only  necessary  for  instruction, 
ojr  for  verifying  the  sight.)  He  then  takes  the  roller- 
handspike,  and  resumes  his  post.  This  handspike  is  held 
vertically  with  the  right  hand,  the  lower  end  upon  the 
ground  in  line  with  the  toes,  the  arms  extended  naturally. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

Nos.  1  and  2  take  the  truck-handspikes  with  the  hand 
farthest  from  the  wall,  and  carry  them  to  that  side,  hold- 
ing them  vertically,  the  lower  end  upon  the  ground  in  line 
with  the  toes,  the  arms  extended  naturally. 

123.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  FROM  BATTERY. 

The  gunner  embars  in  the  left  mortise  of  the  roller. 
Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  from  the  scarp  wall,  embar  in 
the  most  convenient  front  mortises  of  the  truck-wheels, 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  235 

the  hand  farthest  from  the  carriage  at  the  top  of  the  hand- 
spike, the  other  hand  eight  inches  lower. 

Nos.  3  and  4  go  to  the  assistance  of  Nos.  1  and  2, 
and,  facing  towards  them,  seize  the  handspikes  with  both 
hands  between  those  of  Nos.  1  and  2. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  in  applying  themselves  to  the  car- 
riage either  to  run  it  from  or  to  battery,  break  to  the 
rear  with  the  foot  nearest  to  the  carriage. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  presses  the  roller  under 
the  rear  transom  of  the  gun  carriage,  by  bearing  down 
upon  his  handspike,  and  gives  the  command,  HEAVE. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3.  and  4  act  together,  and  bear  upon  the 
handspikes  until  they  are  nearly  down  to  the  rails.  The 
gunner  then  disengages  the  roller  from  under  the  transom 
by  raising  his  handspike,  and  commands,  UNBAR.  Nos.  1 
and  2  let  go  the  handspikes  with  the  hand  nearest  to  the 
the  carriage,  arid  chock  the  wheels.  Nos.  3  and  4  with- 
draw the  handspikes  and  pass  them  to  Nos.  1  and  2,  who 
re-insert  them  in  the  front  mortises. 

The  gunner  again  bearing  down  upon  his  handspike, 
gives  the  command,  HEAVE,  and  so  on,  until  the  face  of 
the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the  wall,  when,  raising 
his  handspike,  he  commands,  HALT,  and  shifts  it  into  the 
right  mortise  of  the  roller.  Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the 
wheels,  and  replace  their  handspikes  against  the  wall. 
All  resume  their  posts. 

2.  Load  by  detail — LOAD. 

124.  Executed  as  in  Nos.  103  and  104,  with  the  fol- 
lowing modification  :    No.  3,  facing   towards  the  scarp, 
embars  under  the  breech,  and  maintains  the  piece  in  a 
covenient  position  for  inserting  the  sponge,  until  he  re- 
ceives a  signal  from  the  gunner  to  unbar. 

3.  SPONGE. 

125.  Executed  as  in  No.  104. 


236  MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  AKTILLEKY. 

4.  EAM. 

126.  Executed  as  in  No.  105. 

5.  IN  BATTERY. 

127.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and,  facing 
from  the  scarp  wall  apply  their  hands  to  the  front  of  the 
cheeks. 

Nos.  3  and  4,  facing  towards  the  scarp  wall,  lay  hold 
of  the  handles. 

The  gunner  bears  down  carefully  upon  the  roller- 
handspike,  and  the  piece  is  run  into  battery.  As  soon  as 
the  wheels  touch  the  hurters,  he  commands,  HALT.  Nos. 
1,  2,  3,  and  4  resume  their  posts. 

6.  POINT. 

128.  Nos.  1  and  4  take  the  traversing  handspikes,  and, 
facing  towards  the  scarp  wall,  embar  under  the  ends  of 
the  rear  transom  of  the  chassis.     No.  1,  in  passing  to  and 
from  his  post,  moves  on  the  outside  of  No.  3. 

When  the  elevation  is  given  by  the  quoin,  No.  2  takes 
an  elevating  handspike  and  embars  upon  the  left  cheek 
under  the  re-inforce. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  aided  by 
Nos.  1  and  4,  gives  the  direction,  as  in  No.  107. 

He  then  applies  the  breech  sight,  if  necessary,  and 
points  the  piece ;  commanding  LOWER,  or  RAISE,  tapping 
at  the  same  time  on  the  upper  side  of  the  knob  of  the 
cascable  with  the  left  hand,  and  drawing  out  the  quoin 
with  the  right,  in  order  to  elevate,  or  tapping  upwards  on 
the  lower  side  and  shoving  in  the  quoin,  in  order  to  de- 
press the  piece. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises 
on  the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word,  READY,  making  a  sig- 
nal with  both  hands,  at  which  Nos.  1,  2,  and  4  unbar,  re- 
place their  handspikes,  and  resume  their  posts  ;  takes  the 


MANUAL  FOE  HEAVY   AETILLEEY.  237 

breech-sight  with  the  left  hand,  the  roller-handspike  with 
the  right,  and  disposes  himself  to  observe  the  effect  of  the 
shot. 

If  the  elevation  is  given  by  a  screw,  No.  3  turns  its 
handle  by  direction  of  the  gunner. 

No.  3,  having  passed  the  hook  of  the  lanyard  through 
the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to  rear,  inserts  it  in  the  vent, 
and  stretches  the  lanyard  as  in  No.  107. 

At  the  word,  EEADY,  Nos.  1  and  2  take  the  chocks, 
and  breaking  off  with  the  feet  farthest  from  the  wall, 
stand  ready  to  chock  the  wheels. 

7.  Number  one  (or  the  like) — FIRE. 

129.  Executed  as  in  No.  108. 

What  is  prescribed  in  No.  109  will  apply  to  this 
piece. 

130.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands,  beginning  with  FROM  BATTERY  : 

^  To  change  posts. 
To  load  for  action. 
To  cease  firing. 

To  secure  piece,  and  replace  implements. 
Executed  as  in  Nos.  Ill,  112,  113,  and  115. 

TO    LEAVE    THE    BATTERY. 

131.  The  instructor  forms  the  detachment  in  rear  of 
the  piece,  and  marches  it  from  the  battery  as  prescribed 
in  No.  12. 

132.  Remark — The  service  of  a  gun  mounted  on  a  case- 
mate carriage  of  the  old  pattern,  (which  is  without  the 
eccentric  roller,)  will  require  the  following  modification : 
The  roller-handspike  is  dispensed  with,  and  the  gunner,  at 
the  command,  FROM  BATTERY,  moves  two  paces  to  the 
right. 


238  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

TO   SERVE    THE   PIECE    WITH   REDUCED   NUMBERS. 

Executed  as  in  No.  34. 

CHARGES,   ETC. 

133.  The  ordinary  service  charge  of  powder  for  heavy 
guns  is  one-fourth  the  weight  of  the  shot.      For  firing 
double  shot  it  is  one-sixth  that  weight. 

Range  of  a  42-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  1°  30',  charge 

lOi-lbs 860  yards. 

Range  of  a  42-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  5°,  charge 

lOJlbs 1,955     " 

Range  of  a  32-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  1°  30',  charge 

8  Ibs 800     " 

Range  of  a  32-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  5°,  charge  8  Ibs.  1,922     " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300     " 

Greatest  elevation  the  carriage  admits 8° 

Greatest  depression  the  carriage  admits 4° 

Wads. 

Rapidity  of  firing. 
Penetration  of  shot. 
See  Nos.  37  39,  and  40. 

LESSON   XIII. 

Service  of  an  8-inch  Columliad  mounted  on  a  Casemate  Car- 
riage. 

Five  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  four  otner 
cannoneers. 

134.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  etc.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  casemate  gun  in  No.  120,  sub- 
stituting haversack — worn  by  No.  4  from  the  right  shoul- 
der to  the  left  side — for  pass-box. 


MANUAL  FOE   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  239 

The  shells  are  at  the  magazine,  or  other  safe  position, 
and  are  brought,  as  required,  to  the  place  prescribed  for 
the  budge-barrel. 

135.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  differs  in  no  ma- 
terial respect  from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  XII. 

It  is  loaded  with  shell,  which  is  attached  to  a  sabot. 
The  shell  is  brought  up  by  No.  4  together  with  the  car- 
tridge, and  is  set  home  in  the  same  manner  as  the  ball,  ex- 
cept that  it  is  not  rammed. 


CHARGES,   ETC. 

136. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder 10  Ibs. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 2  Ibs.  9  oz. 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 1  Ib. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 4  oz. 

Range  at  an  angle  of  1  °,  charge  1 0  Ibs. )  Axis  of  the  piece  j     919  yards. 
Range  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  10  Ibs.  j     the  water.  °V°  ( 1,813      " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300     " 

Weight  of  shell 50  Ibs. 


LESSON    XIV. 

Service  of  a  24:-pdr.  Howitzer  mounted  on  a  Flank  Casemate 
Carriage. 

Three  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  two  other 

cannoneers. 

137.  The  piece  is  in  battery.       * 

The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows  : 

ROLLER-HAND-       j  Leaning  against  the  scarp  wall,  behind 
SPIKE,  .     .     .    (      No.  2. 

C  Leaning  against  the  scarp  wall,  behind 
SPONGE  &  RAM-]      ,T    to,  b,, 

<      No.    1,   the    rammer-head   on  the 

MEB'    '     '     '    I     ground. 


24:0  MA2OJAL   FOK   HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

TT  j  Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 

(      cable. 

Containing   the    finger-stall,   priming- 
wire,  friction  tubes,  and  the  lanyard, 


TUBE-POUCH, 


wound  in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon 


its   handle.      Suspended  from   the 

knob  of  the  cascable. 
VENT-COVER,     .       Covering  the  vent. 
TOMPION,      .     .       In  the  muzzle. 
BROOM,    .     .     .       On  the  left  of  the  piece. 

{Containing  cartridges,  at  the  safest  and 
most  convenient  place  in  rear  of  the 
piece. 

The  rounds  of  canister  are  arranged  against  the  scarp 
wall,  behind  No.  2.  The  shells,  if  used,  are  at  the  maga- 
zine, or  other  safe  position,  and  are  brought,  as  required, 
to  the  place  prescribed  for  the  budge-barrel. 

138.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  explains  to  them  the  names  and  uses 
of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures  of  the  howitzer, 
its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

139.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands : 

TAKE  IMPLEMENTS. 

The  gunner  takes  the  priming-wire  and  finger-stall, 
wearing  the  latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand ; 
gives  the  tube-pouch  to  No.  1,  and  the  haversack  to  No. 
2  ;  takes  off  the  vent-cover  and  places  it  against  the  scarp 
wall  outside  of  the  canisters  ;  seizes  the  roller-handspike 
with  the  right  hand,  and  resumes  his  post ;  holding  the 
handspike  vertically  on  the  right  side,  its  lower  end  in 
line  with  the  toes,  the  arm  extended  naturally. 

No.  1  equips  himself  with  the  tube-poucL 


MANUAL  FOB  HEAVY   AKTILLEKY.  24:1 

No.  2  equips  himself  with  the  haversack,  which  he 
wears  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

140.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands : 

1.  FROM  BATTERY. 

The  gunner,  embarring  on  the  left  mortise,  presses 
the  roller  under  the  rear  transom,  and  seizes  the  left 
handle  with  the  left  hand. 

Nos.  1  and  2  lay  hold  of  the  manoeuvring  rings  and 
handles. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command, 
HEAVE,  and  the  carriage  is  run  to  the  rear  until  the  face 
of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the  wall,  when,  dis- 
engaging the  roller,  he  commands,  HALT.  All  resume 
their  posts. 

2.  Load  by  detail — LOAD. 

141.  The  gunner  places  himself  at  the  breech ;  breaks 
the  rear  with  the  right  foot ;    closes  the  vent  with  the 
second  finger  of  the  right  hand ;  and  manages  the  elevat- 
ing screw  with  the  left. 

No.  1  seizing  the  sponge-staff  at  its  middle,  brings  it 
across  his  body  ;  plants  the  left  foot  opposite  to  the  muz- 
zle, close  to  the  carriage,  and  breaks  off  with  the  right 
foot ;  at  the  same  time  throwing  the  sponge  staff  into  the 
left  hand,  back  down,  and  extending  both  hands  towards 
the  ends  of  the  staff,  so  as  to  enter  the  rammer-head  into 
the  embrasure  and  bring  the  sponge  opposite  to  the 
muzzle.  He  then  inserts  it,  and  presses  it  to  the  bottom 
of  the  chamber  with  three  motions. 

No.  2  goes  for  a  cartridge,  and  returns  to  his  post. 
If  shells  are  used,  he  brings  a  shell  at  the  same  time. 

3.  SPONGE. 

142.  No.  1,  using  both  hands,  sponges   the  chamber 

11 


242  MANUAL    FOE    HEAVY   ARTILLKRY. 

carefully ;  withdraws  the  sponge,  pressing  it  against  the 
bottom  of  the  bore ;  turns  it  over,  stepping  to  his  left  for 
this  purpose,  and  rests  the  rammer-head  against  the  right 
side  of  the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  2  introduces  the  cartridge,  bottom  foremost,  seams 
downward.  No.  1  sets  it  home  by  three  motions,  with 
the  right  hand. 

4.  RAM. 

143.  No.  1,  drawing  out  the  rammer  to  the  full  ex- 
tent of  his  arm,  rams  once,  and  throws  out  the  rammer, 
holding  it  as  before,  the  rammer-head  against  the  right 
side  of  the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  2  introduces  the  canister  or  shell  home  with  care  ; 
throws  out  the  rammer ;  replaces  it ;  and  resumes  his 
post. 

The  gunner,  rising  upon  the  left  leg,  pricks,  leaving 
the  priming-wire  in  the  vent,  and  resumes  his  post. 

5.  IN  BATTERY. 

144.  All  apply  themselves  to  the  carriage,  as  pre- 
scribed in  No.  140,  and  ease  the  piece  into  battery.     As 
soon  as  it  touches   the  hurters,  the  gunner  commands, 
HALT.     All  resume  their  posts. 

G.  POINT. 

145.  No.  1  makes  ready  a  tube,  as  prescribed  for  No. 
3,  in  No.  24. 

No.  2  goes  to  the  rear  of  the  chassis,  and,  facing  to 
the  front,  applies  himself  to  it  by  hand,  in  order  to  tra- 
verse it. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  having 
pointed  the  piece,  gives  the  word,  READY,  making  a  signal 
with  both  hands,  at  which  No.  2  resumes  his  post ;  takes 
out  the  roller-handspike,  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  1  steps  to  the  vent  and  inserts  the  tube,  holding 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  24:3 

the  lanyard  slightly  stretched  with  the  right  hand,  the 
cord  passing  between  the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up, 
and  breaks  to  his  rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  the 
left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

7.  Number  one  (or  the  like) — FIRE. 

146.  No.  1  fires  as  prescribed  for  No.  3,  in  No.  25. 
What  is  prescribed  in  No.  26  will  apply  to  this  piece, 

substituting  No.  1  for  No.  3. 

147.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands,  beginning  with  FROM  BATTERY. 

To  change  posts. 

To  load  for  action. 

To  cease  firing. 

To  secure  piece,  and  replace  implements. 

To  leave  the  battery. 

Executed  as  in  Nos.  Ill,  112,  113,  114,  and  115. 


CHARGES,    ETC. 

148. 

Charge  of  powder 2  Ibs. 

Range  at  an  angle  of  0°,  charge  2  Ibs.,  shell 295  yards. 

Range  at  an  angle  of  1°,  charge  2  Ibs.,  shell 516     " 

Range  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  2  Ibs.,  shell 1,322     " 

Range  at  an  angle  of  2°,  charge  If  Ibs.,  spherical-case, 

time  2" 600     " 

Range  at  an  angle  of  5°  30',  charge  If  Ibs.,  spher.-case, 

time  4" 1,050    " 

Range  at  an  angle  of  3°  30',  charge  2  Ibs.,  spher.-case, 

time  3" 880     " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300     " 

Weight  of  the  24-pdr.  shell 17  Ibs. 

Weight  of  the  round  of  canister 21   " 

No.  of  bullets  in  a  round  of  canister 48  " 


244 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


LESSON    XV. 

Service  of  an  8-inch  Columliad,  mounted  on  a   Columliad 
Carriage. 

Five  men  are  necessary :  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

149.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows  : 

("Two  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  laid 
TRUCK-HAND-        J      on  the  rails,  one  in  rear  of  each  front 
BPIKES,     .     .   I      truck- wheel,  and  one  in  rear  of  each 
rear  truck-wheel. 


MANCEUVRING- 
HANDSPIKES, 


1 


One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  laid 
on  the  ground  in  a  line  with  the  can- 
noneers, opposite  to  the  traverse 
wheels,  the  small  ends  towards  the 
parapet. 

ELEVATING-BAR,    \  Laid  across  the  ties  at  tlie  junction  of 
-  the  braces,  handle  to  the  left. 

One  yard  behind  the  cannoneers  of 
the  right,  the  sponge  uppermost,  the 
sponge  and  rammer-heads  turned 
from  the  parapet,  inclined  slightly 
from  the  piece,  and  supported  upon 
a  prop. 

j  Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 

(      cable. 

f  Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the  lan- 
J  yard,  wound  in  St.  Andrew's  cross 
]  upon  its  handle.  Suspended  from 
[^  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 


SPONGE-RAMMER, 


HAVERSACK, 


TUBE-POUCH, 


8-Incli    Colu.m~biacL    on.    a    Casemate    Carriage. 


\ 


MANUAL   FOK   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


245 


GUNNER'S-POUCH, 


CHOCKS,  .     . 

VENT-COVER, 
TOMPION, 

BROOM,    .     . 


BUDGE-BARREL, 


Containing  the  gunner's  level,  breech- 
sight,  finger-stall,  priming-wire,  gun- 
ner's gimlet,  vent-punch,  chalk-line, 
and  chalk.  Suspended  from  the 
knob  of  the  cascable. 
One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  laid  on 

the  front  of  the  rails. 
Covering  the  vent. 
In  the  muzzle. 

j  Leaning  against  the  parapet,  to  the  left 
(  of  the  piece. 

C  Containing  cartridges,  at  the  safest  and 
<  most  convenient  place  in  rear  of  the 
L  piece. 

When  several  columbiads  are  served  together,  there 
will  be  only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to 
each  battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same  bat- 
tery there  will  be  one  worm  and  one  wrench. 

The  shells  are  at  the  magazine,  or  other  safe  position, 
and  are  brought,  as  required,  to  the  place  prescribed  for 
the  budge-barrel. 

150.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  explains  to  them  the  names  and  uses 
of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures  of  the  colum- 
biad,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

151.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

TAKE  IMPLEMENTS. 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable ;  takes 
off  the  vent-cover,  handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the 
parapet,  in  rear  of  his  post ;  gives  the  tube-pouch  to  No. 
3,  and  the  haversack  to  No.  4 ;  equips  himself  with  his 
own  pouch  and  the  finger-stall,  wearing  the  latter  on  the 


246  MANUAL  FOR   HEAVY   ABTILLERY. 

second  finger  of  the  left  hand ;  takes  the  elevating-bar, 
and  stepping  between  the  rails,  levels  the  piece  conven- 
iently for  loading ;  applies  his  level  to  verify  the  line  of 
sight  which  is  marked  on  the  piece,  marking  it,  if  neces- 
sary, with  the  chalk  line,  assisted  by  No.  2 ;  and  resumes 
his  post,  holding  the  elevating-bar  with  the  right  hand. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  4  equips  himself  with  the  haversack,  which  he 
wears  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  take  the  truck-handspikes  with  the 
hand  furthest  from  the  parapet,  and  carry  them  to  that 
side,  holding  them  vertically,  the  arm  extended  naturally. 

152.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  FROM  BATTERY. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  the  right  of  his  post. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  facing  from  the  parapet,  place  the 
wrenches  on  the  ends  of  the  axle-trees,  the  handspikes 
elevated  about  30°  to  the  rear,  and  at  the  word  HEAVE 
by  the  gunner,  bear  down  and  throw  the  wheels  into  gear  ; 
Nos.  3  and  4  immediately  after  laying  their  handspikes 
on  the  platform  in  front  of  their  posts. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  from  the  parapet,  embar  in  the 
most  convenient  front  mortises  of  the  truck-wheels,  the 
hand  furthest  from  the  carriage  at  the  top  of  the  handspike, 
the  other  hand  eight  inches  lower. 

Nos.  3  and  4  go  to  the  assistance  of  Nos.  1  and  2,  and, 
facing  towards  them,  seize  the  handspikes  with  both  hands 
between  those  of  Nos.  1  and  2. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  in  applying  themselves  to  the  car- 
riage, to  run  it  from  or  to  battery,  break  to  the  rear  with 
the  foot  nearest  to  the  carriage. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command, 
HEAVE. 


MANUAL   FOli   HEAVY   AKTILLERY.  247 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  act  together,  and  bear  upon  tho 
handspikes  until  they  are  nearly  down  to  the  rails,  when 
the  gunner  commands,  UNBAR.  Nos.  1  and  2  let  go  the 
handspikes  with  the  hand  nearest  to  the  carriage,  and 
chock  the  wheels.  Nos.  3  and  4  withdraw  the  handspikes 
and  pass  them  to  Nos.  1  and  2,  who  re-insert  them  in  the 
front  mortises. 

The  gunner  again  gives  the  command,  HEAVE,  and  so 
on,  until  the  face  of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the 
parapet,  when  he  commands,  HALT.  Nos.  3  and  4  take 
their  posts.  Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  wheels  as  before, 
unbar,  and  place  the  wrench  of  their  handspikes  on  the 
ends  of  the  axle-tree  of  the  front  wheels.  At  the  com- 
mand OUT  OF  GEAR  by  the  gunner,  they  throw  the  wheels 
out  of  gear ;  lay  their  handspikes  on  the  rails  between 
the  wheels  ;  and  take  their  posts. 

2.  Load  by  detail — LOAD. 

153.  Executed  as  in  Nos.  102  and  103.     The  gunner, 
if  necessary,  adjusts  the  piece  conveniently  for  loading  be- 
fore closing  the  vent.     No.  4  brings  up  a  shell,  together 
with  the  cartridge. 

3.  SPONGE. 

154.  Executed  as  in  No,  104. 

4.  RAM. 

155.  Executed  as  in  No.  105,  except  that  the  shell  is 
set  carefully  home  without  being  rammed. 

5.  IN  BATTERY. 

156.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and  place  the 
chocks  on  the  ties. 

Nos.  1,2, 3,  and  4,  facing  towards  the  parapet,  apply 
the  wrenches  of  their  handspikes  to  the  ends  of  the  axle- 
trees  ;  Nos.  1  and  2  so  as  to  throw  the  front  wheels  into 


24:8  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

gear,  and  Nos.  3  and  4  so  as  to  throw  the  rear  wheels  out 
of  gear. 

The  gunner  commands,  HEAVE,  when  the  front  wheels 
are  thrown  into  gear. 

Should  the  carriage  run  too  easily  after  it  is  in  mo- 
tion, the  gunner  will  command,  REAR  WHEELS  OUT  OF 
GEAR,  when  the  rear  wheels  are  thrown  out  of  gear.  Nos. 
3  and  4  each  take  a  chock  and  hold  it  in  front  of  the  rear 
wheels,  ready  to  apply  it  under  them  if  necessary. 

When  the  head  of  the  cheeks  is  about  one  foot  from 
the  end  of  the  rails,  the  gunner  commands,  CHOCK,  when 
Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  rear  wheels.  The  wheels  are  un- 
chocked,  and  the  piece  is  run  gently  into  battery,  by  Nos. 
3  and  4  throwing  the  rear  wheels  alternately  out  of  and 
into  gear.  As  soon  as  the  head  of  the  carriage  touches 
the  hurters,  the  gunner  commands,  OUT  OF  GEAR,  when 
the  front  wheels  are  thrown  out  of  gear ;  also  the  rear 
wheels,  should  they  be  in  gear.  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  take 
their  posts,  and  lay  their  handspikes  on  the  platform  just 
in  front  of  them. 

6.  POINT. 

157.  No.  3  passes  the  hook  of  the  lanyard  through 
the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to  rear  ;  holds  the  handle  of 
the  lanyard  with  the  right  hand,  the  hook  between  the 
thumb  and  forefinger ;  and  stands  ready  to  hand  it  to  the 
gunner. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  passing  outside  of  the  other  cannoneers, 
move  to  the  rear  of  the  chassis,  and,  each  taking  one  of 
the  manoeuvring  handspikes,  embar  with  the  levelled  end 
under  the  traverse  wheels.  For  traversing  large  angles, 
Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  apply  themselves  by  hand  at  the  end 
of  the  chassis. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire  ;  inserts  the 
pawl  of  the  elevating  machine  in  the  proper  notch  by 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  249 

means  of  the  elevating  bar,  and  with  the  breech-sight 
gives  the  required  elevation ;  No.  4  turning  the  handle  of 
the  screw  according  to  his  direction. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises  on 
the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word  READY,  making  a  signal 
with  both  hands,  at  which  Nos.  1  and  2  unbar,  lay  down 
the  handspikes,  and  resume  their  post ;  receives  the  tube 
from  No.  3,  which  he  inserts  in  the  vent ;  dismounts  from 
the  chassis ;  and  goes  to  the  windward  to  observe  the 
effect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3  stretches  the  lanyard  as  in  No.  107. 

7.  Number  one  (or  the  like) — FIRE. 

158.  Executed  as  in  No.  108. 

What  is  prescribed  in  No.  109  will  apply  to  this  piece. 

159.  Remark. — If  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  at  high  an- 
gles, it  is  elevated  in  the  following  manner  :    . 

Nos.  1  and  2 — the  former  carrying  his  traversing- 
handspike  with  him — move  to  the  mule ;  place  the  hand- 
spike in  the  bore ;  pass  the  bight  of  a  trace-rope  over  it ; 
and  bear  down  slightly  on  the  handspike  to  enable  the 
gunner  to  free  the  pawl  from  the  notch.  The  gunner 
draws  the  pawl  back  by  its  handle,  and  commands  EASE 
AWAY.  Nos.  1  and  2,  holding  the  ends  of  the  rope,  ease 
down  the  breech  steadily,  until  the  gunner  commands, 
STEADY,  when  he  inserts  the  pawl  in  the  proper  notch. 

160.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands,  beginning  with  FROM  BATTERY  : 

To  change  posts. 
To  load  for  action. 
To  cease  firing. 

To  secure  piece,  and  replace  implements. 
To  leave  the  battery. 
Executed  as  in  Nos.  Ill,  112, 113,  114,  and  115. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

AMMUNITION. 

TROOPS  in  the  field  should  not  only  be  supplied  with 
a  sufficient  quantity  of  ammunition,  but  the  men  of  the 
command  should  be  taught  how  to  prepare  it.  Cart- 
ridges for  small-arms  are  made  of  paper,  in  the  follow- 
ing manner :  Having  prepared  the  paper,  which  should 
be  strong,  but  not  too  thick,  by  cutting  it  first  into  strips 
eight  and  a  half  inches  wide,  then  cutting  these  strips 
crosswise  into  smaller  strips  four  and  a  half  inches  in 
width,  and  then  cutting  these  last  diagonally,  so  that  the 
pieces  will  be  three  inches  on  one  side  and  five  and  a  half 
on  the  other  ;  the  pieces  are  then  rolled  on  a  small  cylin- 
drical stick  of  the  same  diameter  as  the  ball  to  be  used, 
about  six  inches  long,  having  a  spherical  cavity  at  one 
end  and  rounded  at  the  other.  The  paper  is  laid  on  a 
table  with  the  side  perpendicular  to  the  bases  next  the 
workman,  the  broad  end  to  the  left ;  the  stick  laid  on 
it  with  the  concave  end  half  an  inch  from  the  broad  edge 
of  the  paper,  and  enveloped  in  it  once.  The  right  hand  is 
then  laid  flat  on  the  stick,  and  all  the  paper  rolled  on  it. 
The  projecting  end  of  the  paper  is  now  neatly  folded  down 
into  the  concavity  of  the  stick,  pasted,  and  pressed  on  a 
ball  imbedded  in  the  table  for  the  purpose. 


AMMUNITION.  251 

Instead  of  being  pasted,  these  cylinders  may  be  closed 
by  choking  with  a  string,  tied  to  the  table,  and  having  at 
the  other  end  a  stick  by  which  to  hold  it.  The  convex 
end  of  the  former  is  placed  to  the  left,  and  after  the  paper 
is  rolled  on,  the  former  is  taken  in  the  left  hand,  and  a 
turn  made  around  it  with  the  choking  string  half  an  inch 
from  the  end  of  the  paper.  Whilst  the  string  is  drawn 
tight  with  the  right  hand,  the  former  is  held  in  the  left 
with  the  forefinger  resting  on  the  end  of  the  cylinder,  fold- 
ing it  neatly  down  upon  the  end  of  the  former.  The 
choke  is  then  firmly  tied  with  twine. 

For  ball  cartridges,  make  the  cylinders  and  choke 
them  as  above  described,  and  the  choke  tied  without  cut- 
ting the  twine.  The  former  is  then  withdrawn,  the  ball 
put  in,  and  the  concave  end  of  the  former  put  in  after  it. 
The  half  hitches  are  made  a  little  above  the  ball,  and  the 
twine  cut  off. 

For  ball  and  buckshot  cartridges,  make  the  cylinder 
as  before,  insert  three  buckshot,  fasten  them  with  a  half 
hitch,  and  insert  and  secure  the  ball  as  before. 

For  buckshot  cartridges,  make  the  cylinder  as  before, 
insert  four  tiers  of  three  buckshot  each,  as  at  first,  making 
a  half  hitch  between  the  tiers,  and  ending  with  a  double 
hitch. 

To  fill  the  cartridges,  the  cylinders  are  placed  upright 
in  a  box,  and  the  charge  poured  into  each  from  a  conical 
charger  of  the  appropriate  size  ;  the  mouths  of  the  cylin- 
ders are  now  folded  down  on  the  powder  by  two  rectan- 
gular folds,  and  the  cartridges  bundled  in  packages  of  ten. 
For  this  a  folding  box  is  necessary  ;  it  is  made  with  two 
vertical  sides  at  a  distance  from  each  other  equal  to  five 
diameters  of  the  ball,  and  two  diameters  high. 

The  manner  of  preparing  ammunition  for  artillery  is 
found  in  the  Manual  of  Artillery  in  preceding  chapter. 


252 


AMMUNITION. 


TABLE. 

DIMENSIONS   OP   CARTRIDGE-BAGS. 


O 

OQ 


I 

|       TO 

o 

CO 
Oi                           o5 
.2      0                    '      0      0       £      00 
1—  1 

O 
£       'nj-01 

d  «?        «             £ 

5      ir-                             CO       r-5        IS      <N 

•eSaig  -01-3 

43.                         o3 

•«     ri<               <M      rji      Ci       ^=>     T}< 
i—  I 

3 

o 
0 

•qoui-8 

CO 
.                         Ci         ^      U5 

•So                 o    cs     ^2    o 

<M        rH          ^       rH 

•qotn-oi 

CO 
.      »0                0 
•S     J>                        rjJ      rJ^      ^     CO 
<M       rH        '-1      r-l 

6 

•JP<*-5i: 

d      ^                                •       "?         «         . 

"-•     rp               C^l     r}<      O       <°     CO 

rH 

upd-si 

O 
«•     «0               ±^                           «     10 

•2    ^           ,H-    ^    ^     £    ^J 

upd-fg 

3 

Q             •                              .              •              .             O!3             • 

^     \O                rH      CO      C5       £     «O 

upd-5S 

C      ^                *         •      **       * 

—  •    »o           1-1    co    o     £    co 

upd-3? 

CO 
.                       O»                            .     VO 
•So'                      •       0^       rn        §      0 

I   ^o    J    J    'd           : 

illl!     1 

1  *  a  2  !    & 
8  i  s  |  *    : 

0       «M       ^        §      ^                         £? 

»-1i!   1 

g       fcO     p^     0       tO               c3 

1  J       £  J       1 

